US20230213525A1 - Detecting microbial infection in wounds - Google Patents

Detecting microbial infection in wounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230213525A1
US20230213525A1 US16/090,091 US201716090091A US2023213525A1 US 20230213525 A1 US20230213525 A1 US 20230213525A1 US 201716090091 A US201716090091 A US 201716090091A US 2023213525 A1 US2023213525 A1 US 2023213525A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
reactive
wound
cbm
chitosan
anchor
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US16/090,091
Inventor
Michael Burnet
Andrea HEINZLE
Eva Sigl
Daniel Luschnig
Clemens GAMERITH
Gregor TEGL
Georg GUEBITZ
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Universitaet fuer Bodenkultur Wien BOKU
ACIB GmbH
Qualizyme Diagnostics GmbH and Co KG
Original Assignee
Universitaet fuer Bodenkultur Wien BOKU
ACIB GmbH
Qualizyme Diagnostics GmbH and Co KG
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Universitaet fuer Bodenkultur Wien BOKU, ACIB GmbH, Qualizyme Diagnostics GmbH and Co KG filed Critical Universitaet fuer Bodenkultur Wien BOKU
Priority to US16/090,091 priority Critical patent/US20230213525A1/en
Publication of US20230213525A1 publication Critical patent/US20230213525A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/52—Use of compounds or compositions for colorimetric, spectrophotometric or fluorometric investigation, e.g. use of reagent paper and including single- and multilayer analytical elements
    • G01N33/528—Atypical element structures, e.g. gloves, rods, tampons, toilet paper
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/58—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances
    • G01N33/583—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances with non-fluorescent dye label
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/543—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
    • G01N33/544—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals the carrier being organic
    • G01N33/548—Carbohydrates, e.g. dextran
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/569—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for microorganisms, e.g. protozoa, bacteria, viruses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/573—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for enzymes or isoenzymes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/58—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/58—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances
    • G01N33/582—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances with fluorescent label
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/6893—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids related to diseases not provided for elsewhere
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/195—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
    • C07K14/24—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Enterobacteriaceae (F), e.g. Citrobacter, Serratia, Proteus, Providencia, Morganella, Yersinia
    • C07K14/245—Escherichia (G)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/20—Fusion polypeptide containing a tag with affinity for a non-protein ligand
    • C07K2319/21—Fusion polypeptide containing a tag with affinity for a non-protein ligand containing a His-tag
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/50—Fusion polypeptide containing protease site
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90—Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/902—Oxidoreductases (1.)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90—Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/902—Oxidoreductases (1.)
    • G01N2333/908—Oxidoreductases (1.) acting on hydrogen peroxide as acceptor (1.11)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90—Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/914—Hydrolases (3)
    • G01N2333/916—Hydrolases (3) acting on ester bonds (3.1), e.g. phosphatases (3.1.3), phospholipases C or phospholipases D (3.1.4)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90—Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/914—Hydrolases (3)
    • G01N2333/924—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2)
    • G01N2333/936—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2) acting on beta-1, 4 bonds between N-acetylmuramic acid and 2-acetyl-amino 2-deoxy-D-glucose, e.g. lysozyme
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90—Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/914—Hydrolases (3)
    • G01N2333/948—Hydrolases (3) acting on peptide bonds (3.4)
    • G01N2333/95—Proteinases, i.e. endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.99)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90—Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/914—Hydrolases (3)
    • G01N2333/948—Hydrolases (3) acting on peptide bonds (3.4)
    • G01N2333/966—Elastase
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2400/00—Assays, e.g. immunoassays or enzyme assays, involving carbohydrates
    • G01N2400/10—Polysaccharides, i.e. having more than five saccharide radicals attached to each other by glycosidic linkages; Derivatives thereof, e.g. ethers, esters
    • G01N2400/38—Heteroglycans, i.e. polysaccharides having more than one sugar residue in the main chain in either alternating or less regular sequence, e.g. gluco- or galactomannans, e.g. Konjac gum, Locust bean gum, Guar gum
    • G01N2400/40—Glycosaminoglycans, i.e. GAG or mucopolysaccharides, e.g. chondroitin sulfate, dermatan sulfate, hyaluronic acid, heparin, heparan sulfate, and related sulfated polysaccharides
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/26—Infectious diseases, e.g. generalised sepsis

Definitions

  • the Sequence Listing associated with this application includes the nucleotide and/or amino acid sequences and associated information using the symbols and format in accordance with the requirements of 37 CFR 1.821 - 1.825.
  • the Sequence Listing is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the Sequence Listing includes no new matter.
  • the name of the ASCII text file which includes the Sequence Listing is Sequence_Listing_CVT05_40137 - Sequence Listing.
  • the date of creation is Oct. 29, 2020.
  • the size of the file is 3 KB.
  • Embodiments described herein generally relate to wound healing, and in particular to compositions and methods for the detection and treatment of wounds.
  • Wound healing is a complex dynamic process that results in the restoration of anatomic continuity and function: an ideally healed wound is one that has returned to normal anatomic structure, function, and appearance.
  • the inflammatory phase is particularly important to the wound healing process, wherein biochemical reactions at the wound situs facilitate healing but also cause tissue breakdown due to production of excess proteases.
  • pathogens in a wound can produce toxins (e.g., Clostridium species), generate noxious metabolites like ammonia that raise pH (e.g., Proteus species), activate or produce tissue lytic enzymes like proteases, or promote tissue invasion, thereby leading to an increase in the size or seriousness of the wound. In a worst case, pathogens can leave the wound and cause sepsis.
  • toxins e.g., Clostridium species
  • generate noxious metabolites like ammonia that raise pH e.g., Proteus species
  • activate or produce tissue lytic enzymes like proteases
  • promote tissue invasion thereby leading to an increase in the size or seriousness of the wound.
  • pathogens can leave the wound and cause sepsis.
  • a variety of assessment techniques and/or tools are employed in the clinical and veterinary setting.
  • Current methods of assessing an infected wound are based primarily on assaying for a variety of parameters associated with the wound. For instance, a wound may be assessed visually, length and depth measurements may be taken, digital photography may be used where available to track the visual condition and size of a wound (Krasner et al., supra).
  • diagnosis of infection is based on measurement of secondary parameters, such as, odor, presence of local pain, heat, swelling, discharge, and redness Many of these clinical indicators, such as inflammation and discharge have a low predictive value of infection in wounds.
  • the number(s) and type(s) of pathogenic flora at the wound situs may be determined using laboratory and/or clinical diagnostic procedures. Swabbing of a wound followed by microbiology testing in the hospital laboratory is an option for confirmation of bacterial colonization and identification of the strains associated with infection, thus allowing for the prescription of correct antibiotic course.
  • this process is time consuming and labor intensive. Delay in diagnosis of infection can delay the administration of antibiotics and may increase the risk of developing sepsis.
  • the technology disclosed herein provides for compositions and methods of detecting infected and/or chronic wounds.
  • the disclosed technology improves upon exiting assays by: increasing the sensitivity, precision and specificity of detection of infected wounds; providing for the ability of qualitative and quantitative measurements; and, increasing the speed of detection of infected wounds in situ and in real-time.
  • the assays and methods described herein are partly based on the use of specific reagents that detect biomarkers and/or probes which are present in infected or chronic wounds.
  • the detection process may involve use of reagents that are specific to the markers present in infected wounds but not non-infected or non-chronic wounds and the detection step may involve qualitative or quantitative measurements of the signal(s) that are generated when the probe is acted upon by the marker.
  • the probes comprise modified enzyme substrates that are specific to the enzyme, which generate signals that may be optionally amplified. This greatly improves efficiency and specificity of detection.
  • a plurality of detection probes, each specific for one or more targets, e.g., enzymes that are specific to the wounds, may be employed.
  • the experimental results disclosed herein confirm that the novel probes and the assay techniques based thereon are capable of detecting and characterizing various types of wounds.
  • the reagents of the disclosed technology may be used together with therapeutic molecules such as antibiotics, antifungal agents, etc. to monitor and evaluate treatment and management of chronic wounds.
  • Embodiments described herein are based, in part, on the discovery that cells of the immune system, including enzymes generated thereby, may serve as markers in the early diagnosis of wounds. These cells, e.g., neutrophils, are recruited at the wound situs to combat infection, do so by engulfing bacteria (and other pathogens) and/or neutralizing them with enzymes.
  • Some enzymes are specific towards proteins (e.g., elastase, cathepsin G), others are specific towards cell wall components (e.g., lysozyme) and yet others mediate protein denaturation (e.g., NADPH oxidase, xanthine oxidase, myeloperoxidase (MPO) and other peroxidases).
  • proteins e.g., elastase, cathepsin G
  • cell wall components e.g., lysozyme
  • mediate protein denaturation e.g., NADPH oxidase, xanthine oxidase, myeloperoxidase (MPO) and other peroxidases.
  • MPO myeloperoxidase
  • neutrophils are generally only short-lived and when they lyse in the area of the infection, they release the contents of their lysosomes including the enzymes, which can then be
  • various embodiments described herein utilize the detection of enzyme markers, which are indicative of the presence of myeloid cells, and neutrophils in particular, in a biological sample of interest, for example, wound tissue. Increased level or activity of such enzymes in the wound fluid, therefore, corresponds to a heightened bacterial challenge and a manifestation of disturbed host/bacteria equilibrium in favor of the invasive bacteria.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I), wherein the anchor A is covalently associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form a recognition site S.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I), wherein the anchor A is covalently associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form a recognition site S, and wherein the recognition site (S) is specific for a wound-specific hydrolase.
  • the hydrolase is a glycosidase or a protease.
  • the protease is elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a polysaccharide, a cellulose, a polyacrylate, a polyethyleneimine, a polyacrylamide, a peptidoglycan, or a chitosan, or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a monomer of chitosan comprising D-glucosamine or N-acetyl-D-glucosamine, an oligomer thereof, or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises at least two units of D-glucosamine, N-acetyl -D-glucosamine or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, chitosan oligosaccharide, carboxymethyl chitosan, or hydroxyalkyl chitosan or a derivative thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, wherein the acetylated chitosan comprises a degree of acetylation (DA) between about 40% to about 90%.
  • A is an anchor
  • I is an indicator region
  • the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan
  • the acetylated chitosan comprises a degree of acetylation (DA) between about 40% to about 90%.
  • DA degree of acetylation
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, wherein the acetylated chitosan comprises a degree of acetylation (DA) of greater than 50%.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, wherein the chitosan is halogenated.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor and the conjugate is a substrate for a glycosidase.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor and the conjugate is a substrate for a glycosidase.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor and the conjugate is a substrate for lysozyme.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor via a glycosidic bond at the la- carbon of chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, or a derivative thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) further comprises a dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group or a dye containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) further comprises a dye which is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16 or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) further comprises a dye which is reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19, or reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) comprises a detectable label selected from the group consisting of a luminescent molecule, a chemiluminescent molecule, a fluorochrome, a fluorescent quenching agent, a lipid, a colored molecule, a radioisotope, a scintillant, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, an antibody or a fragment thereof, a polyhistidine, Ni2+, a Flag tag, a myc tag, a heavy metal, and an enzyme.
  • A is an anchor and I is an indicator region
  • the indicator (I) comprises a detectable label selected from the group consisting of a luminescent molecule, a chemiluminescent molecule, a fluorochrome, a fluorescent quenching agent, a lipid, a colored molecule, a radiois
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region and the anchor is directly conjugated to the indicator via a glycosidic linkage.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region and the anchor is directly conjugated to the indicator via a glycosidic linkage, wherein the indicator is selected from the group consisting of reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I (Trichoderma reesei) or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase ⁇ Alcaligenes faecalis) or a chimeric variant thereof.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • PDB hydrophobic binding module
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I ⁇ Trichoderma reesei) or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase ⁇ Alcaligenes faecalis) or a chimeric variant thereof, wherein the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof or polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • PDB hydrophobic binding module
  • the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof or polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I ⁇ Trichoderma reesei) or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase ⁇ Alcaligenes faecalis) or a chimeric variant thereof, wherein the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof or polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • PDB hydrophobic binding module
  • the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof or polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof.
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I ⁇ Trichoderma reesei) or a chimeric variant thereof and the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof, wherein the indicator is hydrophilically associated with the anchor.
  • A is an anchor and I is an indicator region
  • the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I ⁇ Trichoderma reesei) or a chimeric variant thereof and the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof, wherein the indicator is hydrophilically associated with the anchor.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase ⁇ Alcaligenes faecalis) and the anchor comprises polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof, wherein the indicator is hydrophobically associated with the anchor.
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof.
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) gene, a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof.
  • trxA thioredoxin
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof.
  • the spacer sequence encodes a hexahistidine (His6) tag [SEQ ID NO: 11.
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21.
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence.
  • the elasubl sequence is located subsequent to the enterokinase cleavage site.
  • the elasubl sequence encodes for functional amino acids selected from the group consisting of cysteine, lysine, arginine, glutamine, asparagine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, serine, threonine or tyrosine.
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence.
  • trxA thioredoxin
  • spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence.
  • PDM Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala- Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • HLE recognition site Ala-Pro- Val
  • CatG recognition site Al-Ala-Pro-Phe
  • a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and & Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • HLE recognition site Al-Ala-Pro- Val
  • CatG recognition site Al-Ala
  • a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and & Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • PDM Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolyme
  • a host cell comprising a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • the host cell is a bacterial cell or an insect cell
  • a host cell comprising a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • a vector comprising an
  • a method of making the protein encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding (a) a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof; (b) a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag; (c) an enterokinase cleavage site or a portion thereof; (d) an elasubl sequence subsequent to the enterokinase cleavage site; (e) a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence; and (f) an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites in the elasubl sequence; comprising culturing a host cell comprising the chimeric construct under conditions sufficient to induce expression of the chimeric construct and obtaining the chi
  • a method of making the protein encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding (a) a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof; (b) a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag; (c) an enterokinase cleavage site or a portion thereof; (d) an elasubl sequence subsequent to the enterokinase cleavage site; (e) a hydrophobic Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence; and (f) an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites in the elasub 1 sequence; comprising culturing a host cell comprising the
  • a polypeptide encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • composition comprising the CBM sequence containing polypeptide (“CBM polypeptide”) and a dye or a label.
  • CBM polypeptide CBM sequence containing polypeptide
  • a chemical entity comprising an anchor and an indicator region comprising the composition comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label.
  • a chemical entity comprising an anchor which is cellulose or a derivative thereof and the indicator region comprising the composition comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label.
  • a polypeptide encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a Alcatigenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • a trxA thioredoxin
  • a composition comprising the PDM sequence containing polypeptide (“PDM polypeptide”) and a dye or a label.
  • PDM polypeptide PDM sequence containing polypeptide
  • a chemical entity comprising an anchor and an indicator region comprising the composition comprising the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label.
  • a chemical entity comprising an anchor which is polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof and the indicator region comprising the composition comprising the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label.
  • a method for the determining the presence or absence of an enzyme selected from the group consisting of HLE and CatG in a biological sample comprising contacting the biological sample with the composition containing the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label.
  • a method for the determining the presence or absence of an enzyme selected from the group consisting of HLE and CatG in a biological sample comprising contacting the biological sample with the composition containing the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label.
  • a method for diagnosing an infected or a chronic wound comprising, contacting the wound with the composition containing the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label.
  • the wound is present in a tissue, e.g., skin tissue, of a subject in need of such diagnosis, e.g., a human subject.
  • the detection is made in situ.
  • the diagnosis can be at multiple time points, based on visual and/or electronic valuation of the dye.
  • a method for diagnosing an infected or a chronic wound comprising, contacting the wound with the composition containing the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label.
  • the wound is present in a tissue, e.g., skin tissue, of a subject in need of such diagnosis, e.g., a human subject.
  • the detection is made in situ.
  • the diagnosis can be at multiple time points, based on visual and/or electronic valuation of the dye.
  • a method for treating an infected or a chronic wound comprising, contacting the wound with any of the foregoing compositions, wherein the composition comprises at least one antibiotic and optionally together with a healing agent.
  • the wound to be treated is present in a tissue, e.g., skin tissue, of a subject in need of such diagnosis, e.g., a human subject.
  • the wound is treated in situ and may be accompanied by pre-treatment or post-treatment diagnosis.
  • a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y - Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y - Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 1 and 50, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y - Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 1 and 10, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y - Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 1 and 6, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y - Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label, wherein each of the peptides comprising the sequence X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V F/A)X y -L-Z , are each, individually, labile to elastase.
  • composition comprising a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y - Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label, and a carrier.
  • a chemical entity comprising an anchor region (A) and an indicator region (I) comprising a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) X y AAPX y -Z , (b) X y AAPX y -L-Z , (c) X y AAP(V/F/A)X Z , or (d) X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X N 4 N 3 N 2 N -Z , or (b) X N 4 N 3 N 2 N -E-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N 4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N 3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine ; N 2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N 1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X N 4 N 3 N 2 N3 ⁇ 4-Z, or (b) X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X Y -L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 1 to 3; N 4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N 3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine ; N 2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N 1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z , or (b) X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X Y -L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N 4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N 3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine ; N 2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N 1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label, wherein the polypeptides comprising the sequence (a) X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -
  • composition comprising a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X y N ⁇ N ⁇ X y -Z , or (b) X y N ⁇ N ⁇ X y -L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N 4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N 3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine ; N 2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N 1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label and a carrier.
  • a chemical entity comprising an anchor region (A) and an indicator region (I) comprising a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z, or (b) X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N 4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N 3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine; N 2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N 1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • FIG. 1 Infrared spectrum of Example 2. Chitosan derivatives with varying degree of acetylation (DA) were produced, but only material with a DA of 48% was further used.
  • DA acetylation
  • FIG. 2 Infrared spectrum and NMR spectrum of Example 2. Chitosan derivatives with varying DA were produced, but only material with a DA of 48% was further used.
  • FIG. 3 Infrared spectrum of chitooligosaccharides of Example 5.
  • FIG. 4 Infrared spectrum of chitooligosaccharides of Example 6.
  • FIG. 5 Time course of dye release from dye conjugated acetyl chitosan when incubated with 5000 units per mL lysozyme.
  • FIG. 6 (A) Time course of dye release from dye conjugated acetyl chitosan when incubated with 5000 units per mL lysozyme in phosphate buffer when the chitosan has varying concentrations of dye conjugated; (B) Time course of dye release from dye conjugated acetyl chitosan when incubated with 5000 units per mL lysozyme in either phosphate buffer of artificial wound fluid containing 2% protein as BSA.
  • FIG. 7 Color response of immobilized nitrazine yellow and bromocresol purple of Example 11 varies depending on the pH at which the preparation is dried.
  • FIG. 8 Comparison of different lysozyme responsive dye releases of different staining degrees.
  • FIG. 9 Influence of the proportion between reactive dye and PG.
  • FIG. 10 Elastase responsive dye release.
  • FIG. 11 Multiple Sequence Alignment of the Various Constructs.
  • Asterisk (*) indicates identity; semi -colon (:) indicates conservative substitution; and period (.) indicates semi-conservative substitution.
  • “Substantially” or “essentially” means nearly totally or completely, for instance, 80%-95% or greater of some given quantity, e.g., at least 85%, at least 87%, at least 88%, at least 89%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, at least 99.9%, or more % by weight or volume or any other parameter being measured.
  • “Substantially free” means nearly totally or completely absent of some given quantity such as being present at a level of less than about 1% to about 20% of some given quantity, e.g., less than 10%, less than 9%, less than 8%, less than 7%, less than 6%, less than 5%, less than 4%, less than 3%, less than 2%, less than 1%, less than 0.5%), less than 0.1%, or less % by weight or volume or any other parameter being measured.
  • “substantially free” means presence at a level of less than or equal to 1 -5% by weight of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • compositions and systems for the therapy and diagnosis of wounds and wound management wherein the compositions, when in use, indicate the presence of elevated enzyme levels in a wound in situ.
  • wound refers to physical disruption of the continuity or integrity of tissue structure.
  • Wild healing refers to the restoration of tissue integrity. It will be understood that this can refer to a partial or a full restoration of tissue integrity. Treatment of a wound thus refers to the promotion, improvement, progression, acceleration, or otherwise advancement of one or more stages or processes associated with the wound healing process.
  • the wound may be acute or chronic.
  • Chronic wounds including pressure sores, venous leg ulcers and diabetic foot ulcers, can simply be described as wounds that fail to heal. Whilst the exact molecular pathogenesis of chronic wounds is not fully understood, it is acknowledged to be multi -factorial. As the normal responses of resident and migratory cells during acute injury become impaired, these wounds are characterized by a prolonged inflammatory response, defective wound extracellular matrix (ECM) remodeling and a failure of re-epithelialization.
  • ECM extracellular matrix
  • the wound may be any internal wound, e.g., where the external structural integrity of the skin is maintained, such as in bruising or internal ulceration, or external wounds, particularly cutaneous wounds, and consequently the tissue may be any internal or external bodily tissue.
  • the tissue is skin (such as human skin), i.e. the wound is a cutaneous wound, such as a dermal or epidermal wound.
  • the human skin is composed of two distinct layers, the epidermis and the dermis, below which lies the subcutaneous tissue.
  • the primary functions of the skin are to provide protection to the internal organs and tissues from external trauma and pathogenic infection, sensation and thermoregulation.
  • the skin tissue of most mammals is structured similarly.
  • the outermost layer of skin, the epidermis is approximately 0.04 mm thick, is avascular, is comprised of four cell types (keratinocytes, melanocytes, Langerhans cells, and Merkel cells), and is stratified into several epithelial cell layers.
  • the inner-most epithelial layer of the epidermis is the basement membrane, which is in direct contact with, and anchors the epidermis to, the dermis. All epithelial cell division occurring in skin takes place at the basement membrane. After cell division, the epithelial cells migrate towards the outer surface of the epidermis. During this migration, the cells undergo a process known as keratinization, whereby nuclei are lost and the cells are transformed into tough, flat, resistant non-living cells.
  • Migration is completed when the cells reach the outermost epidermal structure, the stratum corneum, a dry, waterproof squamous cell layer which helps to prevent desiccation of the underlying tissue.
  • This layer of dead epithelial cells is continuously being sloughed off and replaced by keratinized cells moving to the surface from the basement membrane. Because the epidermal epithelium is avascular, the basement membrane is dependent upon the dermis for its nutrient supply.
  • the dermis is a highly vascularized tissue layer supplying nutrients to the epidermis.
  • the dermis contains nerve endings, lymphatics, collagen protein, and connective tissue.
  • the dermis is approximately 0.5 mm thick and is composed predominantly of fibroblasts and macrophages. These cell types are largely responsible for the production and maintenance of collagen, the protein found in all animal connective tissue, including the skin. Collagen is primarily responsible for the skin’s resilient, elastic nature.
  • the subcutaneous tissue, found beneath the collagen-rich dermis provides for skin mobility, insulation, calorie storage, and blood to the tissues above it.
  • Wounds can be classified in one of two general categories, partial thickness wounds or full thickness wounds.
  • a partial thickness wound is limited to the epidermis and superficial dermis with no damage to the dermal blood vessels.
  • a full thickness wound involves disruption of the dermis and extends to deeper tissue layers, involving disruption of the dermal blood vessels.
  • the healing of the partial thickness wound occurs by simple regeneration of epithelial tissue. Wound healing in full thickness wounds is more complex. Cutaneous wounds contemplated herein may be either partial thickness or full thickness wounds.
  • Wounds contemplated herein include cuts and lacerations, surgical incisions or wounds, punctures, grazes, scratches, compression wounds, abrasions, friction wounds (e.g., nappy rash, friction blisters), decubitus ulcers (e.g., pressure or bed sores); thermal effect wounds (burns from cold and heat sources, either directly or through conduction, convection, or radiation, and electrical sources), chemical wounds (e.g.
  • pathogenic infections e.g., viral, bacterial or fungal
  • pathogenic infections including open or intact boils, skin eruptions, blemishes and acne, ulcers, chronic wounds, (including diabetic-associated wounds such as lower leg and foot ulcers, venous leg ulcers and pressure sores), skin graft/transplant donor and recipient sites, immune response conditions, e.g., psoriasis and eczema, stomach or intestinal ulcers, oral wounds, including a ulcers of the mouth, damaged cartilage or bone, amputation wounds and corneal lesions.
  • Embodiments described herein provide chemical entities, which may be used to diagnose and/or treat chronic wounds.
  • the chemical entities and compositions thereof, as described herein are used in methods to detect the level of one or more enzymes in a mammalian wound.
  • the chemical entities and compositions thereof, as described herein are used in methods to diagnose a chronic wound in a mammal.
  • the chemical entities and compositions thereof described herein are used in methods to diagnose an infected wound in a mammal.
  • the chemical entities and compositions thereof described herein are used in methods to treat a wound in a mammal.
  • the chemical entities and compositions thereof described herein are used in methods to treat an infected or a chronic wound in a mammal.
  • a chemical entity capable of detecting enzyme activity from a body fluid, the chemical entity comprising: an anchor region (A) and an indicator region (I).
  • the chemical entity has a basic chemical structure A-I (Formula I), wherein A is an anchor region and I is an indicator region.
  • the anchor region (A) is associated with the indicator region (I) via an enzyme recognition site (S).
  • the enzyme recognition site is a structure or a motif that allows binding to an enzyme.
  • the enzyme recognition site (S) is naturally present in the anchor region. In another embodiment, the enzyme recognition site (S) is introduced in the anchor region via chemical modification. Alternately, the enzyme recognition site (S) may be naturally present in the indicator region (I) or synthetically introduced in the indicator region (I) via one or more chemical modifications.
  • the chemical entity of Formula I comprises an anchor (A) which is associated with the indicator (I), either covalently or non-covalently.
  • the association between the anchor region (A) and the indicator region (I) is mediated via a covalent interaction.
  • covalent bonds involve sharing of electrons between the bonded atoms.
  • non-covalent bonds may include, for example, ionic interactions, electrostatic interactions, hydrogen bonding interactions, physiochemical interactions, van der Waal forces, Lewis-acid/Lewis-base interactions, or combinations thereof.
  • the anchor A is associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form the recognition site S. In another embodiment, the anchor A is associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction that is not a part of the recognition site S.
  • the chemical entity further comprises an enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region (R).
  • the reactive region (R) is a part of the anchor region.
  • the reactive region (R) is a part of the indicator region (I).
  • the reactive region (R) is a part of the enzyme recognition site (S).
  • the reactive region (R) interacts with one or more target enzymes selected from the group consisting of elastase, lysozyme, cathepsin G, and myeloperoxidase, or a combination thereof.
  • the anchor region comprises a compound which is a polysaccharide, cellulose, polyacrylate, polyethyleneimine, polyacrylamide, peptidoglycan, or chitosan, or a monomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • the anchor A comprises a compound which is a chitosan or a monomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • Non-covalent bonds may include, for example, ionic interactions, electrostatic interactions, hydrogen bonding inetyl-D-glucosamine (acetylated unit).
  • chitosan monomer may comprise D-glucosamine and N-acetyl-D-glucosamine.
  • the chitosan may comprise at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, or more units of D-glucosamine or N-acetyl-D-glucosamine or a combination thereof.
  • Chitosan, including, shorter fragments thereof is generally manufactured by treating chitin with an alkaline substance, e.g., sodium hydroxide, and optionally hydrolyzing the glycosidic linkages between the individual monomer units.
  • the anchor A comprises a chitosan derivative.
  • Example chitosan or chitosan derivatives include chitosan salts, water-soluble chitosan, water-soluble, randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, chitosan oligosaccharide, carboxymethyl chitosan, and hydroxyalkyl chitosan.
  • the hydroxyalkyl substituents of the hydroxyalkyl, chitosans and the carboxym ethyl substituents of the carboxy methyl chitosans could be attached to any of the pendant nitrogen or oxygen groups on the chitin or chitosan ring subunit.
  • hydroxyalkyl chitosans include but are not limited to, hydroxyethyl chitosan (also known as glycol chitosan), hydroxypropyl chitosan, dihydroxypropyl chitosan, hydroxybutyl chitosan and dihydroxybutyl chitosan.
  • the chitosan derivative is a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan.
  • the acetylated chitosan derivatives are generally defined by a degree of acetylation or degree of acetylation.
  • the degree of acetylation represents the proportion of N-acetyl-d-glucosamine units with respect to the total number of units in the chitosan molecule. See, Chatelet et al., Biomaterials , 22(3):261-8, 2001.
  • degree of deacetylation is meant the percentage of free amino groups on the water soluble, chitosan or chitosan derivative.
  • the percent of N-acetylation can be calculated from the deacetylation value.
  • N-acetylation or O-acetylation are also referred to as the degree of substitution with C(0)CH 3 on either N or O.
  • a chitosan derivative having a DA value greater than 50% N-acetylation is sometimes described as a chitin.
  • the term “chitosan” is used throughout the disclosure herein to include chitosans and, if the N-acetylation is greater than 50%, to include chitins. See, U.S. Pat. No. 7,683,039.
  • the chitosan derivative has a DA of at least about 40%, about 41%, about 42%, about 43%, about 44%, about 44%, about 45%, about 46%, about 47%, about 48%, about 49%, about 50%, about 51%, about 52%, about 53%, about 54%, about 55%, about 56%, about 57%, about 58%, about 59%, about 60%, about 61%, about 62%, about 63%, about 64%, about 65%, about 66%, about 67%, about 68%, about 69%, about 70%, about 71%, about 72%, about 73%, about 74%, about 75%, about 76%, about 77%, about 78%, about 79%, about 80%, about 81%, about 82%, about 83%, about 84%, about 85%, about 86%, about 87%, about 88%, about 89%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about
  • chitosan derivative as used herein includes salts, amides, esters, enol ethers, enol esters, acetals, ketals, orthoesters, hemiacetals, hemiketals, acids, bases, solvates, hydrates or prodrugs of the chitosan.
  • Such derivatives may be readily prepared by those of skill in this art using known methods for such derivatization.
  • the derivatives may be administered to animals or humans without substantial toxic effects and either are pharmaceutically active or are prodrugs. Representative types of chitosan derivatives are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 9,012,429; 5,773,608; and 3,911,116.
  • the derivative is a salt of the polymeric compound, e.g., salts of Li + , Na + , K + , Rb + , Mg 2+ , Ca 2+ , Sr 2+ , or Ba 2+ , preferably Na + , K + , Mg 2+ , Ca + .
  • Salts of chitin and chitosan, such as sodium or calcium salts, are known in the art. See, U.S. Pat. No. 5,599,916.
  • the derivative anchor compound is a halogenated anchor compound, e.g., halogenated polysaccharide, halogenated cellulose, halogenated polyacrylate, halogenated polyethyleneimine, halogenated polyacrylamide, halogenated peptidoglycan, or halogenated chitosan, or a monomer thereof, e.g., halogenated D-glucosamine and/or halogenated N-acetyl -D-glucosamine.
  • the halogen is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, I; particularly, the halogen is CI.
  • the derivative compound is an isomer of the anchor compound
  • term “isomer” includes compounds with the same formula but a different arrangement of atoms in the molecule.
  • isomers of the compounds are “tautomers” or “stereoisomers” of the compounds.
  • stereoisomer refers to compounds that differ in the chirality of one or more stereocenters. Stereoisomers include enantiomers and diastereomers.
  • tautomer refers to alternate forms of a compound that differ in the position of a proton, such as enol-keto and imine-enamine tautomers, or the tautomeric forms of the anchor compound.
  • the anchor compound may contain a combination or mixture of one or more of the aforementioned compounds.
  • the term “combination” includes compounds containing more than one component, which may be conjugated or non-conjugated to one another.
  • the anchor compound comprises a combination of one or more of the aforementioned compounds which are conjugated to each other, e.g., via covalent or non-covalent interaction.
  • the anchor may comprise a combination of chitosan and oxidized cellulose. See, U.S. Pat. Application Publication No. 2014/0045761.
  • the compounds include mixtures of the aforementioned polymeric compounds.
  • the term “mixture” refers to a mingling together of two or more substances without the occurrence of a reaction by which they would lose their individual properties.
  • a mixture of compound A and compound B may contain any weight ratio of compound A and compound B, such that the total weight of the mixture would amount to 100%, e.g., 99: 1 weight ratio of compound A/compound B or 1 :99 weight ratio of compound A/compound B.
  • a typical mixture may contain about 2, 3, 4, 5, or more of the aforementioned polymer compounds.
  • the anchor A further comprises an ionic chemical group, a material with a hydrophilic moiety, or a material with a hydrophobic moiety, e.g., an aliphatic chain or an aliphatic alcohol.
  • the anchor comprises an ionic chemical group
  • the ionic chemical group may be positively or negatively charged.
  • the anchor region comprises a reactive moiety for covalent attachment to a support material such as a photoactive phenylazide or an epoxide group. See, U.S. Pat. Application Publication No. 2016/0159777.
  • the chemical entities comprise one or more indicators, e.g., at least 1, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, or more of indicators.
  • Such compositions may include, for example, a plurality of substrates conjugated to the same gel polymer or different gel polymers.
  • the indicators are labeled.
  • label refers to any substance attached to an epitope binding agent, or other substrate material, in which the substance is detectable by a detection method.
  • suitable labels include luminescent molecules, chemiluminescent molecules, fluorochromes, fluorescent quenching agents, colored molecules, radioisotopes, scintillants, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, antibodies or fragments thereof, polyhistidine, Ni2+, Flag tags, myc tags, heavy metals, and enzymes (including alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase, and luciferase). Methods for attaching the labels to the anchor compounds are described in the Examples.
  • the indicators are labeled with a label which is a detectable label.
  • a detectable label is a moiety, the presence of which can be ascertained directly or indirectly.
  • detection of the label involves the creation of a detectable signal such as for example an emission of energy.
  • the label may be of a chemical, peptide or nucleic acid nature although it is not so limited. The nature of label used will depend on a variety of factors, including the nature of the analysis being conducted, the type of the energy source and detector used and the type of polymer, analyte, probe and primary and secondary analyte-specific binding partners.
  • the label is sterically and chemically compatible with the constituents to which it is bound, e.g., the anchor region.
  • the label is of the shape and size that it does not hinder enzyme recognition site (S) and/or enzyme-reactive region (R).
  • the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a glycosidase.
  • the indicator or motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for lysozyme.
  • the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase (MAO), or a combination thereof.
  • a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase (MAO), or a combination thereof.
  • the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a glycosidase which is lysozyme and a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase (MAO), or a combination thereof.
  • a glycosidase which is lysozyme and a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase (MAO), or a combination thereof.
  • the indicator (I) or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a peroxidase substrate, an arylamine, an amino phenol, an aminophenyl ether, an indoxyl, a neutral dye, a charged dye, a nanoparticle, or a colloidal gold particle.
  • the indicator (I) or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a peroxidase substrate.
  • the peroxidase substrate is selected from p-aminophenol, ABTS (2,2inophenol, ABTS (strate.
  • acid) diammonium salt 3,3′-diaminobenzidine, 3,4 diaminobenzoic acid, DCPIP, N,N dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, o-dianisidine, /?-phenylenediamine, 4-chloro-l-naphthol, o-phenylenediamine N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethylisoluminol, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole, 4-aminophthalhydrazide, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 2,2′-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid), indoxyl, indigo, Fast Blue RR, 4-chloro-7-nitrobenzofurazan.
  • the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an arylamine. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an amino phenol. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an aminophenol ether. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an indoxyl. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a neutral dye. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a charged dye.
  • the charged dye is selected from remazole brilliant blue, toluidine blue, reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, and reactive orange 16, or a hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the charged dye is remazole brilliant blue, or a hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the charged dye is toluidine blue.
  • the charged dye is reactive black 5, or ahydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the charged dye is reactive violet 5, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the charged dye is reactive orange 16, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10. In some embodiments, the dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye appears black.
  • the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a reactive dye containing a sulfonyl ethyl -hydrogensulphate-reactive-group.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5.
  • the reactive dye is remazol brilliant blue.
  • the reactive dye is reactive violet 5.
  • the reactive dye is reactive orange 16.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, or reactive violet 5.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5 or remazol brilliant blue.
  • the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a nanoparticle. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a colloidal gold particle. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a charged dye, an indole derivative, or a luminol derivative.
  • the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor comprises a dye containing a sulfonyl ethyl -hydrogensulphate-reactive-group, e.g., reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, or a combination thereof; or a dye containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group, e.g., reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • a dye containing a sulfonyl ethyl -hydrogensulphate-reactive-group e.g., reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, or a combination thereof
  • a dye containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group e.g., reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • an anchor A is conjugated with the indicator I directly, e.g., via an glycosidic linkage.
  • the indicator is selected from the group consisting of reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • a glycosidic linkage is formed between a hydroxyl group of the anchor compound with a reactive group in the indicator compound.
  • the la-carbon in the sugar backbone of the anchor molecule is involved in the glycosidic linkage.
  • Embodiments described herein may utilize chemical moieties that assay for various biological markers present in a chronic or infected wound.
  • the marker is a wound- specific marker, which is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of hydrolases, proteases, esterases, and peroxidases.
  • a “wound specific enzyme” is an enzyme that is differentially expressed in a wound.
  • differential expression it is meant that the level or the activity of the enzyme is higher or lower in the wound microenvironment compared to other sites, e.g., normal tissue or surrounding tissue. Particularly, differential expression implies higher level of expression or activity of the enzyme in the wound microenvironment compared to normal or unwounded tissue.
  • Differential expression of enzyme may be analyzed by routine means. For example, levels of enzyme in a sample may be analyzed by ELISA assays or other immunoassays. Activities of the enzyme may be analyzed by measuring rates of loss of a substrate and/or rates of formation of the product, e.g., using mass spectroscopy or HPLC. Such techniques are known in the art and are described in the Examples section.
  • the marker is a hydrolase.
  • a “hydrolase” or “hydrolytic enzyme” is an enzyme that catalyzes the hydrolysis of a chemical bond, e.g., esterases and nucleases (break ester bonds); glycolases (break glycosidic linkers); peptidases (break peptide bonds), etc.
  • the wound-specific glycoside hydrolase is lysozyme.
  • Lysozyme (UNIPROT accession Nos. P61626 [human] and P08905 [mouse]) is a glycoside hydrolase and its main function is to destroy the cell walls of bacteria. It hydrolyses the (1 ⁇ 4)- ⁇ -linkages between N-acetylmuramic acid and N-acetyl-D-glucosamine residues in peptidoglycan and also between N-acetyl-D glucosamine residues in chitodextrin.
  • the natural substrate for lysozyme is the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • the individual components of the chemical moiety have been adapted for recognition by wound-specific hydrolase, e.g., a wound-specific lysozyme.
  • the individual components of the chemical moiety can be modified for recognition by other wound specific enzymes.
  • the additional wound specific enzyme is a protease.
  • a “wound specific protease” is a protease that is differentially expressed in a wound.
  • differential expression it is meant that the level or the activity of the protease is higher or lower in the wound microenvironment compared to other sites, e.g., normal tissue or surrounding tissue.
  • differential expression implies higher level of expression or activity of the protease in the wound microenvironment compared to unwounded tissue. Differential expression of proteases may be analyzed by routine means.
  • levels of proteases in a sample may be analyzed by ELISA assays or other immunoassays. Activities of the proteases may be analyzed by measuring rates of loss of a peptide substrate and/or rates of formation of the product, e.g., using mass spectroscopy or HPLC. Such techniques are known in the art and are described in the Examples section.
  • the wound-specific protease is cathepsin G (UNIPROT accession Nos. P08311 [human] and P28293 [mouse]), which is one of the three serine proteases of the chymotrypsin family that are stored in the azurophil granules.
  • Cathepsin G-specific substrates have the sequence Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe [SEQ ID NO: 41 or Ala-Ala-Pro-Met [SEQ ID NO: 51 (Sigma Aldrich Catalog Nos. S7388 and M7771).
  • the wound specific protease is elastase (e.g., human neutrophil elastase or HNE) (UNIPROT accession Nos. P08246 [human] and Q3UP87 [mouse]).
  • HNE is a serine proteinase in the same family as chymotrypsin and has broad substrate specificity. Secreted by neutrophils and macrophages during inflammation, it destroys bacteria and host tissue.
  • the substrate for detecting HNE has a core sequence Alanine-Alanine-Proline- Valine (AAPV) [SEQ ID NO: 31.
  • the substrate for HNE is Ala- Pro-Glu-Glu-Ile/[ SEQ ID NO: 6]Met-Arg-Arg-Gln [SEQ ID NO: 7](APEEI MRRQ) (Kasperkiewicz et al., PNAS USA, 111(7): 2518-2523, 2014; Korkmaz et al., Methods Mol Biol , 844: 125-138, 2012).
  • the wound-specific enzyme is peroxidase, more specifically, a myeloperoxidase (MPO).
  • MPO myeloperoxidase
  • H202 hydrogen peroxide
  • a halide most commonly chloride
  • hypochlorite singlet oxygen
  • chlorine C12
  • hydroxyl radicals OH ⁇
  • MPO can be detected using tetramethylbenzidine or 4-Benzoylamino-2,5-dimethoxyaniline. See, Andrews et al, Anal Biochem , 127(2):346-50, 1982; Klebanoff et al., J. Leukocyte Biol , 11, 598-625, 2005.
  • the chemical moiety comprises an anchor region A or an indicator (I) comprising a recognition site for a wound-specific enzyme, e.g., an enzyme cleavage site.
  • the enzyme recognition site comprises glycosidic bonds.
  • a “glycosidic bond” is formed between the hemiacetal or hemiketal group of a saccharide (or a molecule derived from a saccharide) and the hydroxyl group of some compound such as an alcohol.
  • a substance containing a glycosidic bond is a glycoside.
  • glycoside is now extended to also cover compounds with bonds formed between hemiacetal (or hemiketal) groups of sugars and several chemical groups other than hydroxyls, such as -SR (thioglycosides), -SeR (selenoglycosides), -NR1R2 (N-glycosides), or even -CR1R2R3 (C-glycosides).
  • the chemical moieties disclosed herein contain one or more glycosidic bonds which are cleaved by glycolases.
  • the chemical moieties comprise a glycosidic bond linking anchor A and the indicator I, either directly or via another group.
  • the anchor A and the indicator I are directly linked via one or more glycosidic bonds, in which case, the chemical entity is cleaved by the glycolase and therefore can be used in detecting the glycolase.
  • the indicator molecule comprises an enzymatically-cleavable peptide comprising a peptide bond.
  • a “peptide bond” is formed by the condensation reaction between two amino acids, wherein the acid moiety of one reacts with the amino moiety of the other to produce a peptide bond (—CO—NH—) between the two amino acids.
  • the individual peptides provide a motif for the recognition by a sequence-specific protease.
  • sequence-specific protease means a protease recognizing a specific sequence of a peptide for its digesting (for example, caspase), and is distinguished from a generic protease (for example, trypsin) that sequentially decomposes a peptide from one end thereof or digest a peptide in a sequence-nonspecific manner.
  • the amino acid sequence of the peptide substrate may comprise four or more amino acid (a.a.) residues.
  • peptide includes a natural peptide comprising a linear chain or branched amino acids, peptidomimetics, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • a peptide comprises a plurality of amino acid residues, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, or more amino acid residues which are bonded to each other via covalent bonds, e.g., a peptide bond.
  • Amino acid residue means the individual amino acid units incorporated into the peptides of the disclosure.
  • amino acid means a naturally occurring or synthetic amino acid, as well as amino acid analogs, stereoisomers, and amino acid mimetics that function similarly to the naturally occurring amino acids.
  • amino acids such as: (1) histidine (His) (2) isoleucine (He) (3) leucine (Leu) (4) ysine (Lys) (5) methionine (Met) (6) phenylalanine (Phe) (7) threonine (Thr) (8) tryptophan (Trp) (9) valine (Val) (10) arginine (Arg) (11) cysteine (Cys) (12) glutamine (Gin) (13) glycine (Gly) (14) proline (Pro) (15) serine (Ser) (16) tyrosine (Tyr) (17) alanine (Ala) (18) asparagine (Asn) (19) aspartic acid (Asp) (20) glutamic acid (Glu) (21) selenocysteine (Sec); including unnatural amino acids: (a) citrulline; (b) cystine; (c) gama-amino butyric acid (GAB A); (d)
  • amino acids containing reactive side chains e.g., cysteine, serine, threonine, lysine, arginine, aspartate/asparagine, glutamate/glutamine, glycine, alanine, etc. are particularly employed for modification of the substrate.
  • the chemical entities contain one or more enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive regions (R) for the detection of wound-specific enzymes.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an acyl chitosan of at least 3 glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine or peptidoglycan units, which are optionally acetylated.
  • the enzyme reactive site may contain, for example, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20 or more units of glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine or peptidoglycan units.
  • the R comprises at least 3 glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine or a combination thereof, wherein the glucosamine and/or N-acetylglucosamine are optionally acetylated.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises peptidoglycan, wherein the peptidoglycan is optionally acetylated.
  • the chemical moieties comprise enzyme reactive sites (R) for one or more wound-specific protease disclosed above, e.g., cathepsin G, and myeloperoxidase, elastase or a combination thereof.
  • R enzyme reactive sites
  • the term “reactive site for a protease” means a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of a protein, which is recognized by the protease as a substrate for its protease activity, e.g., as a substrate that can be cleaved into one or more products.
  • the chemical entities comprise a peptide region comprising a peptide sequence comprising a plurality of amino acids.
  • the indicator region (I) of the chemical entity comprises the peptide which serves as the enzyme reactive site for the wound-specific protease.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide that is labile to elastase, cathepsin G, myeloperoxidase or a combination thereof.
  • the enzyme-labile region comprises a peptide that is liable to elastase.
  • the chromogenic indicator for elastase would be high contrast and thus serve as a clear indicator when used in situ in medicinal products.
  • the ideal substrate would make a blue, violet or deep green colour. It would also be fixed in a sterically permissible position with high turnover.
  • the state of the art is the opposite.
  • Available substrates contain a p-nitrophenol group, which is low molecular weight but gives rise to a yellow soluble chromophore.
  • Most skilled investigators regard that the substrate should be soluble in water, reasoning that this is the most likely way that the substrate will find its way to the active site.
  • embodiments described herein contemplate use of a low water soluble, elastase substrates that give rise to Blue, violet or Green colors.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
  • the reactive region R comprises the peptide sequence X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein X, L and Z are each, as described above, and y is, each, independently an integer from 1 to 50.
  • the reactive region R comprises the peptide sequence X y AAPX Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein X, L and Z are each, as described above, and y is, each, independently an integer from 1 to 10.
  • the reactive region R comprises the peptide sequence X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , wherein X, L and Z are each, as described above, and y is, each, independently an integer from 1 to 6.
  • each of the aforementioned peptides comprising the sequence X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z , are each, individually, labile to elastase.
  • one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z is protected, e . g . , with an amine protection group, for example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • an amine protection group for example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • the elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide that is labile to cathepsin G.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
  • one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence is protected. In some embodiments, one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence is protected with an fmoc group. In some embodiments, one of the amino acid in the amino acid sequence is protected with an fmoc group.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of
  • each of the aforementioned peptides comprising the sequence X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 -Z and X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , are each, individually, labile to cathepsin G.
  • one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z and X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z is protected, e.g., with an amine protection group, for example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • an amine protection group for example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • Z is a peroxidase substrate, an arylamine, an amino phenol, an aminophenyl ether, an indoxyl, a neutral dye, a charged dye, a nanoparticle, or a colloidal gold particle.
  • Z is a peroxidase substrate selected from p-aminophenol, ABTS (2,2inophenol, ABTS (s, the peroxidase substrate acid) diammonium salt), 3,3′-diaminobenzidine, 3,4 diaminobenzoic acid, DCPIP, N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, o-dianisidine, >-phenylenediamine, 4-chloro-l-naphthol, o-phenylenedi amine N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethylisoluminol, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole, 4-aminophthalhydrazide, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 2,2′-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid), indoxyl, indigo, Fast Blue RR, 4-chloro-7-nitrobenzofurazan.
  • Z is an arylamine, an amino phenol, an aminophenol ether, an indoxyl, a neutral dye, a charged dye selected from remazole brilliant blue, toluidine blue, reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, and reactive orange 16, or a hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • Z is a charged dye selected from remazole brilliant blue; toluidine blue; reactive black 5 or a hydrolytic or an ammonolytic derivative thereof.
  • Z is a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10. In some embodiments, the dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye appears black. In some embodiments, Z is a reactive dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group.
  • Z is a nanoparticle. In some embodiments, Z is a colloidal gold particle.
  • Z is a charged dye, an indole derivative, or a luminol derivative.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a phenol, an amino phenol, an aminophenyl ether, an indoxyl, or a quinone. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a phenol. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an amino phenol. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an amino phenol ether. In some embodiments, the enzyme-label or enzyme-reactive region comprises an indoxyl. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a quinone. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region reacts with myeloperoxidase but does not react with heme.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peroxidase substrate, an arylamine, an amino phenol, a neutral dye, a charged dye, a nanoparticle, or a colloidal gold particle. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peroxidase substrate.
  • the peroxidase substrate is selected from p-aminophenol, ABTS (2,2-Azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid) diammonium salt), 3,3′-diaminobenzidine, 3,4 diaminobenzoic acid, DCPIP, N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, o-dianisidine, p-phenylenediamine, 4-chloro-l-naphthol, o- phenylenediamine N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethylisoluminol, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole, 4- aminophthalhydrazide, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 2,2′-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid), and 4-chloro-7-nitrobenzofurazan, Fast Blue RR, N-(2-hydroxy)
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an arylamine. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an amino phenol. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a neutral dye. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a charged dye. In some embodiments, the charged dye is selected from remazole brilliant blue, toluidine blue, reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, and reactive orange 16, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives of each of these. In some embodiments, the charged dye is remazole brilliant blue, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is toluidine blue.
  • the charged dye is reactive black 5, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive violet 5, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive orange 16, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a nanoparticle.
  • Z is a colloidal gold particle.
  • the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a charged dye, an indole derivative, or a luminol derivative. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an indole derivative. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a luminol derivative.
  • the indicator region comprises a dye that presents a visible color change in normal ambient lighting.
  • the dye has a contrasting color to wound products, which are commonly red, yellow, or brown.
  • the dye is violet, blue or dark green.
  • the dye is violet.
  • the dye is blue.
  • the dye is dark green.
  • the dye has low molecular weight, is charged, contains reactive or linkable groups, is stable to gamma irradiation, and is deeply colored.
  • the dye is selected from cibracron series dyes, azo dyes, and remazol dyes, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the dye is selected from cibracron series dyes. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from azo dyes. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from remazol dyes, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • the dye is selected from rhodamine, coumarin, cyanine, xanthene, polymethine, pyrene, dipyrromethene borondifluoride, napthalimide, a phycobiliprotein, peridinium chlorophyll proteins, fluorescein, 6-FAM, rhodamine, Texas Red, California Red, iFluor594, tetramethylrhodamine, a carboxyrhodamine, carboxyrhodamine 6F, carboxyrhodol, carboxyrhodamine 110, Cascade Blue, Cascade Yellow, coumarin, Cy2®, Cy3®, Cy3.5®, Cy5®, Cy5.5®, Cy7®, Cy-Chrome, DyLight 350, DyLight 405, DyLight 488, DyLight 549, DyLight 594, DyLight 633, DyLight 649, DyLight 680, DyLight 750, DyL
  • the indicator region comprises a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10. In some embodiments, the dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye appears black.
  • the indicator region comprises the reaction product of a reactive dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5.
  • the reactive dye is remazol brilliant blue.
  • the reactive dye is reactive violet 5.
  • the reactive dye is reactive orange 16.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, or reactive violet 5.
  • the reactive dye is reactive black 5 or remazol brilliant blue.
  • the indicator region comprises a particle ⁇ e.g., colloidal metal or quantum dots) that present color changes in normal ambient lighting.
  • the indicator region comprises a nanoparticle.
  • the indicator region comprises a colloidal gold particle.
  • the indicator region comprises a dye that presents a visible color change under UV light. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dye that is fluorescent. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dye that is luminescent.
  • the indicator region comprises an enzyme-reactive moiety.
  • the enzyme-reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is visible to the naked eye or detectable by electronic means.
  • the enzyme-reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is visible to the naked eye.
  • the enzyme -reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is detectable by electronic means.
  • the indicator region comprises an indoxyl glycoside that is cleaved by hexaminidase, glucuronidase, glucosidase or galactosidase depending on the terminal sugar used, to produce indigo.
  • the indicator region comprises a phenol that is oxidized by an accessory enzyme to produce a visible product. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a phenol that is oxidized by laccase to produce a visible product. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a metallo motif that is detectable by electronic means. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a ferrocene or ferrocene analog that is detectable by electronic means.
  • the accessory enzyme is selected from lipase, esterase, hexosaminidase, peroxidase, oxidase, glycosidase, glucosidase, and laccase. In some embodiments, the accessory enzyme is not present in the wound fluid. In some embodiments, the accessory enzyme is present in the wound fluid. In some embodiments, the enzyme-reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is visible under UV light.
  • chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction group (R).
  • S enzyme recognition sites
  • R enzyme reaction group
  • such chemical entities are employed to assay for a plurality of enzymes, e.g., a combination comprising at least one protease and at least one glycosidase.
  • chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G, myeloperoxidase or a combination thereof.
  • S enzyme recognition sites
  • R enzyme reaction sites
  • chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase.
  • S enzyme recognition sites
  • R enzyme reaction sites
  • chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of cathepsin G.
  • S enzyme recognition sites
  • R enzyme reaction sites
  • chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of myeloperoxidase (MPO).
  • S enzyme recognition sites
  • R enzyme reaction sites
  • MPO myeloperoxidase
  • the diagnostic utility of chemical entities comprising a plurality of reaction and recognition sites will be greatly enhanced compared to entities comprising unitary (e.g., single type) of reaction and recognition sites.
  • entities comprising a plurality of reaction/recognition sites will permit diagnosis of at least 2, at least 3, at least 4 or more markers simultaneously.
  • lysosomal and protease activity at the wound situs may be detected and monitored simultaneously using the multiplex chemical entities disclosed herein.
  • the anchor region (A) of the chemical entity binds the chemical entity to a support material, e.g., via covalent interaction, ionic interaction, hydrophobic interaction, electrostatic interactions, hydrogen bonding interactions, physiochemical interactions, van der Waal forces, Lewis-acid/Lewis-base interactions, or combinations thereof.
  • the support matrix comprises dextran, agarose, silica, synthetic polymer, or dextran, agarose, silica, or synthetic polymer covalently coupled to an antibody, ligand, or epitope tag.
  • the anchor region is a polystyrene bead, silica gel bead, polysaccharide bead, polyacrylamide bead, cellulose bead, polysaccharide, derivatized cellulose, polyacrylate, polyethyleneimine, polyacrylamide, UV-activatable reactive group, peptidoglycan, or chitosan derivative, or a combination thereof.
  • the anchor region binds to a support material after a short period of UV irradiation.
  • the chemical entity is printed on or in a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action.
  • the reporting entity or chemical entity is chemically bonded onto or into a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action that is similar in all dimensions.
  • the chemical entity is ionically bound onto or into a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action.
  • the chemical entity is covalently bound onto or into a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action.
  • Support material includes, but is not limited to, cellulose, polyamide, polyester, polyacrylate and other similar polymers that are useful as fibers.
  • the support material is cellulose.
  • the support material is polyamide.
  • the support material is polyester.
  • the support material is polyacrylate.
  • the pH of a wound can influence many factors of wound healing, such as angiogenesis, protease activity, oxygen release, and bacterial toxicity.
  • Chronic nonhealing wounds may have an elevated alkaline environment. As the wound progresses towards healing, the pH of the wound moves to neutral and then becomes acidic. Monitoring of the pH of the wound may provide a method to assess the condition of the wound (e.g., infection or no infection) and aid in determining a wound’s response to treatment.
  • the chemical entity for the detection of infection in a wound comprises an indicator region comprising a pH-sensitive moiety that presents a visible color change.
  • the pH-sensitive moiety is selected from the group consisting of bromothymol blue, phenol red, bromophenol red, chlorophenol red, thymol blue, bromocresol green, bromocresol purple; nitrazine yellow; and sulfophthalein dyes or a combination thereof.
  • compositions are Compositions:
  • Embodiments described herein further relate to compositions containing the compounds of Formula I. Such compositions may be prepared using conventional methods.
  • the resulting stock composition of compounds of Formula I may be further modified into desired form, e.g., gels, balms, lotions, cream, paste, ointments, etc. using conventional methods, e.g., using carriers, gelling agents, emollients, surfactants, humectants, viscosity enhancers, emulsifiers, etc. See, e.g., WO 2013/004953.
  • Carriers for use in the composition may include, but are not limited to, water, glycerin, diglycerin, glycerin derivatives, glycols, glycol derivatives, sugars, ethoxylated and/or propoxylated esters and ethers, urea, sodium PCA, alcohols, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, and combinations thereof.
  • the carrier is propylene glycol.
  • the composition contains a carrier in an amount from about 1% by weight of the composition to about 99.9% by weight of the composition, more typically from about 2% by weight of the composition to about 95% by weight of the composition, and more typically from about 5% by weight of the composition to about 90% by weight of the composition.
  • Thermo-reversible gelling agents are defined as ingredients that are soluble, partially soluble, or miscible in a hydrophilic carrier at elevated temperatures, such as 50° C., wherein the agents have the ability to thicken the carrier when cooled to 25° C., but will be less viscous at 50° C. when application to a substrate is necessary.
  • Suitable hydrophilic carriers include water, glycols, e.g., propylene glycol.
  • Thermo-reversible gelling agents for use in the composition may include salts of fatty acids such as sodium stearate, sodium palmitate, potassium stearate. These salts can be added to the composition or can be created in-situ by addition of the fatty acid and neutralizing with appropriate base.
  • compositions are to provide stearic acid and sodium hydroxide to produce sodium stearate.
  • Other common hermos-reversible gelling agents could include, e.g., polyethylene glycols and derivatives such as PEG-20, PEG-150 distearate, PEG-150 pentaerythrityl tetrastearate, disteareth-75 IPDI, disteareth-100 IPDI, fatty alcohols, e.g., cetyl alcohol, fatty acids such as stearic acid, hydroxystearic acid and its derivatives, and combinations thereof.
  • the composition can contain various other ingredients and components.
  • other ingredients that may be included within the composition are emollients, sterols or sterol derivatives, natural and synthetic fats or oils, viscosity enhancers, rheology modifiers, polyols, surfactants, alcohols, esters, silicones, clays, starch, cellulose, particulates, moisturizers, film formers, slip modifiers, surface modifiers, skin protectants, humectants, sunscreens, and the like.
  • Embodiments described herein further relate to pharmaceutical compositions and/or preparations comprising one or more of the aforementioned compounds of Formula I and a carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable is employed herein to refer to those compounds, salts, compositions, dosage forms, etc., which are—within the scope of sound medical judgment—suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and/or other mammals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • “pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved by a regulatory agency of the federal or a state government, or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in mammals (e.g., animals), and more particularly, in humans.
  • compositions may be prepared by any suitable means known in the art.
  • suitable means known in the art.
  • examples of such compositions include those adapted for: (a) topical application, e.g., articles (e.g., gauzes, pads, swabs, dressings), creams, ointments, gels, lotions, etc.; (b) parenteral administration, e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as a sterile solution or suspension; (c) oral administration, external application (e.g. drenches including aqueous and non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pellets for admixture with feedstuffs, pastes for application to the tongue, etc.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may comprise one or more antibiotic agents.
  • antibiotic or “antimicrobial agent” refers to a substance that inhibits the growth of or destroys microorganisms.
  • the antibiotic is useful in curbing the virulence of an infectious agent and/or treating an infectious disease.
  • Antibiotic also refers to semi-synthetic substances wherein a natural form produced by a microorganism, e.g., yeast or fungus is structurally modified.
  • the antibiotic is selected from the group consisting of ⁇ -lactams (including, ⁇ -lactamase inhibitors and cephalosporins), fluoroquinolones, aminoglycosides, tetracyclines and/or glycylcyclines and/or polymyxins.
  • ⁇ -lactams including, ⁇ -lactamase inhibitors and cephalosporins
  • fluoroquinolones aminoglycosides
  • tetracyclines and/or glycylcyclines and/or polymyxins Any combination of antimicrobial agents may also be employed, e.g., at least one ⁇ -lactam and at least one fluoroquinolone; at least one aminoglycoside and one cephalosporin; at least one ⁇ -lactam and one ⁇ -lactamase inhibitor, optionally together with an aminoglycoside, etc.
  • ⁇ -lactam includes natural and semi-synthetic penicillins and penicillin derivatives, e.g., benzathine penicillin, benzylpenicillin (penicillin G), phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V), procaine penicillin and oxacillin; methicillin, dicloxacillin and flucloxacillin; temocillin; amoxicillin and ampicillin; azlocillin, carbenicillin, ticarcillin, mezlocillin and piperacillin; biapenem, doripenem, ertapenem, imipenem, meropenem, panipenem and PZ-601 ; cephalexin, cephalothin, cefazolin, cefaclor, cefuroxime, cefamandole, cefotetan, cefoxitin, cefotaxime, and cefpodoxime; cefepime and cefpirome; cefadrox
  • Fluoroquinolones include, ciprofloxacin, garenoxacin, gatifloxacin, gemifloxacin, levofloxacin, and moxifloxacin.
  • Aminoglycosides include, for e.g., kanamycin, amikacin, tobramycin, dibekacin, gentamicin, sisomicin, netilmicin, neomycin B, neomycin C, neomycin E (paromomycin) and streptomycin, including, synthetic derivatives clarithromycin and azithromycin.
  • Tetracyclines include naturally-occurring compounds (e.g., tetracycline, chlortetracycline, oxytetracycline, demeclocycline) or semisynthetic agents (e.g., lymecycline, meclocycline, methacycline, minocycline, roli tetracycline).
  • Glycylcyclines e.g., minocycline/tigecycline
  • Polymyxins include, e.g., polymyxin B and polymyxin E (colistin).
  • the compositions may contain an antibiotic at a concentration of 0.1 mg/mL, 0.5 mg/L, 1 mg/mL, 2 mg/mL, 3 mg/mL, 4 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL, 6 mg/mL, 7 mg/mL, 8 mg/mL, 9 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 11 mg/mL, 12 mg/mL, 13 mg/mL, 14 mg/mL, 15 mg/mL, 16 mg/mL, 17 mg mL, 18 mg/mL, 19 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 21 mg/mL, 22 mg/mL, 23 mg/mL, 24 mg/mL, 25 mg mL, 26 mg mL, 27 mg/mL, 28 mg/mL, 29 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 31 mg/mL, 32 mg/mL, 33 mg/mL, 34 mg mL, 35 mg/mL, 36 mg/mL, 37 mg/mL, 38 mg/mL, 10
  • wound dressings comprising wound dressing materials as described herein, e.g., compounds of Formula I.
  • the wound dressings consist essentially of the wound dressing materials as described herein, e.g., a compound of Formula I.
  • wound dressing disclosed herein are biocompatible, biodegradable, non-immunogenic and readily commercially available.
  • the compounds of Formula I are provided in the form of particles, such as fiber particles or powder particles, optionally containing a medicament.
  • the materials preferably contain CMC fibers.
  • compositions may preferably comprise an intimate mixture of the dressing material and other compounds.
  • the intimate mixture comprises a mixed solution or dispersion of the dressing material and a suitable vehicle, such as a solvent, or a solid composition produced by removing solvent from such a solution or dispersion.
  • the dressing material makes up at least 5%, more preferably at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 50%, 75%, 90% or greater % by weight of the material.
  • the material consists essentially of the dressing material.
  • Other components of the material may include 0-25% by weight, for example from about 1 to about 20% by weight, of one or more other biocompatible polysaccharides, for example alginates such as sodium alginate or calcium alginate, starch derivatives such as sodium starch glycolate, cellulose derivatives such as methyl cellulose or carboxymethyl cellulose, or glycosaminoglycans such as hyaluronic acid or its salts, chondroitin sulfate or heparan sulfate.
  • the materials may also comprise up to about 25% by weight, for example from about 1 to about 20%) by weight, of one or more structural proteins selected from the group consisting of fibronectin, fibrin, laminin, elastin, collagen and mixtures thereof.
  • the protein comprises collagen, and more preferably it consists essentially of collagen.
  • the materials may also comprise up to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 2% to about 10% by weight of water.
  • the materials may also contain 0-40% by weight, for example from about 5 to about 25% by weight, of a plasticizer, preferably a polyhydric alcohol such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • the materials may also comprise up to about 10% by weight, for example from about 0.01 to about 5% by weight, typically from about 0.1 to about 2% by weight of one or more therapeutic wound healing agents, such as non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (e.g., acetaminophen), steroids, local anesthetics, antimicrobial agents, or growth factors (e.g., fibroblast growth factor or platelet derived growth factor).
  • therapeutic wound healing agents such as non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (e.g., acetaminophen), steroids, local anesthetics, antimicrobial agents, or growth factors (e.g., fibroblast growth factor or platelet derived growth factor).
  • the antimicrobial agent may, for example, comprise an antiseptic, an antibiotic, or mixtures thereof.
  • Preferred antibiotics include tetracycline, penicillins, terramycins, erythromycin, bacitracin, neomycin, polymycin B, mupirocin, clindamycin and mixtures thereof.
  • Preferred antiseptics include silver, including colloidal silver, silver salts including salts of one or more of the anionic polymers making up the material, silver sulfadiazine, chlorhexidine, povidone iodine, triclosan, sucralfate, quaternary ammonium salts and mixtures thereof.
  • the weight ratio of the wound dressing material to other auxiliary agents and materials is from about 1 :99 to about 99: 1. More preferably, the weight ratio is in the range about 1 :9 to about 9: 1, more preferably it is in the range about 4: 1 to about 1 :4, still more preferably in the range about 2: 1 to about 1 :2.
  • the material may be in any convenient form, such as a powder, microspheres, flakes, a mat or a film.
  • the material is in the form of a semisolid or gel ointment for topical application.
  • the material is in the form of a freeze-dried or solvent-dried bioabsorbable sponge for application to a chronic wound.
  • the average pore size of the sponge is in the region of 10-500 ⁇ m, more preferably about 100-300 ⁇ m.
  • a suitable sponge has been made by freeze-drying or solvent drying an aqueous dispersion comprising compounds of Formula I, together with suitable therapeutic agents.
  • the material is in the form of a flexible film, which may be continuous or interrupted (e.g. perforated).
  • the flexible film preferably comprises a plasticizer to render it flexible, such as glycerol.
  • both gel forming polymers e.g., cellulose derivatives
  • having a range of controllable properties means that the properties of the compositions the disclosed technology can be controlled to an exceptional degree.
  • the rate of biological absorption, porosity and density of the materials can be controlled.
  • wound dressing materials in sheet form comprising an active layer of a composition comprising compounds of Formula I.
  • the active layer would normally be the wound contacting layer in use, but in some embodiments it could be separated from the wound by a liquid-permeable top sheet.
  • the area of the active layer is from about 1 cm 2 to about 400 cm 2 , particularly from about 4 cm 2 to about 100 cm 2 .
  • the wound dressing material further comprises a backing sheet extending over the active layer opposite to the wound facing side of the active layer.
  • the backing sheet is larger than the active layer such that a marginal region of width 1 mm to 50 mm, preferably 5 mm to 20 mm extends around the active layer to form a so-called island dressing.
  • the backing sheet is preferably coated with a pressure sensitive medical grade adhesive in at least its marginal region.
  • the back sheet is substantially liquid-impermeable.
  • the backing sheet is semipermeable, e.g., the backing sheet is preferably permeable to water vapor, but not permeable to liquid water or wound exudate.
  • the backing sheet is also microorganism-impermeable.
  • Suitable continuous conformable backing sheets will preferably have a moisture vapor transmission rate (MVTR) of the backing sheet alone of 300 to 5000 g/m 2 /24 hrs, preferably 500 to 2000 g/m 2 /24 hrs at 37.5° C. at 100% to 10% relative humidity difference.
  • the backing sheet thickness is preferably in the range of 10 to 1000 micrometers, more preferably 100 to 500 micrometers.
  • Suitable polymers for forming the backing sheet include polyurethanes and poly alkoxyalkyl acrylates and methacrylates.
  • the backing sheet comprises a continuous layer of a high density blocked polyurethane foam that is predominantly closed-cell.
  • a suitable backing sheet material is a polyurethane film.
  • the adhesive layer should be moisture vapor transmitting and/or patterned to allow passage of water vapor.
  • the adhesive layer is preferably a continuous moisture vapor transmitting, pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the type conventionally used for island-type wound dressings, for example, a pressure sensitive adhesive based on acrylate ester copolymers, polyvinyl ethyl ether and polyurethane. Polyurethane-based pressure sensitive adhesives may be selectively used.
  • the dressing may comprise further layers of a multilayer absorbent article may be built up between the active layer and the protective sheet.
  • these layers may comprise an apertured plastic film to provide support for the active layer in use, in which case the apertures in the film are preferably aligned in register with the apertures in the hydrogel layer.
  • the dressing may comprise an absorbent layer between the active layer and the protective sheet, especially if the dressing is for use on exuding wounds.
  • the optional absorbent layer may be any of the layers conventionally used for absorbing wound fluids, serum or blood in the wound healing art, including gauzes, nonwoven fabrics, superabsorbents, hydrogels and mixtures thereof.
  • the absorbent layer comprises a layer of absorbent foam, such as an open celled hydrophilic polyurethane foam.
  • the absorbent layer may be a nonwoven fibrous web, for example a carded web of viscose staple fibers.
  • the wound dressing may be protected by a removable cover sheet.
  • the cover sheet is normally formed from flexible thermoplastic material. Suitable materials include polyesters and polyolefins.
  • the adhesive-facing surface of the cover sheet is a release surface. That is to say, a surface that is only weakly adherent to the active layer and the adhesive on the backing sheet to assist peeling of the hydrogel layer from the cover sheet.
  • the cover sheet may be formed from a non-adherent plastic such as a fluoropolymer, or it may be provided with a release coating such as a silicone or fluoropolymer release coating.
  • the wound dressing is sterile and packaged in a microorganism-impermeable container.
  • kits comprising, in one or separate compartments, the compounds of Formula I, optionally together with an excipient, carrier or oil.
  • the kits may further comprise additional ingredients, e.g., gelling agents, emollients, surfactants, humectants, viscosity enhancers, emulsifiers, etc., in one or more compartments.
  • additional ingredients e.g., gelling agents, emollients, surfactants, humectants, viscosity enhancers, emulsifiers, etc.
  • the kits may optionally comprise instructions for formulating an article for diagnosing, detecting or treating wounds, e.g., chronic or infected wounds.
  • the kits may also comprise instructions for using the components, either individually or together, in the treatment of wounds.
  • kits comprising a package and at least one absorbent article (described above) comprising the aforementioned compositions.
  • the kits may comprise the individual components separately, optionally together with secondary information, useable in or with the package.
  • the wound is a chronic wound, for example a wound selected from the group consisting of venous ulcers, decubitis ulcers and diabetic ulcers.
  • Embodiments of the disclosed technology further provide for surfaces comprising the aforementioned compounds of Formula I, wherein the reporter or peptide is oriented to permit binding to a partner, e.g., an enzyme.
  • a partner e.g., an enzyme.
  • the surface is a surface of a solid support. Numerous and varied solid supports are known to those in the art.
  • Useful solid supports include natural polymeric carbohydrates and their synthetically modified, cross-linked or substituted derivatives, such as agar, agarose, cross-linked alginic acid, substituted and cross-linked guar gums, cellulose esters, especially with nitric acid and carboxylic acids, mixed cellulose esters, and cellulose ethers; natural polymers containing nitrogen, such as proteins and derivatives, including cross-linked or modified gelatins; natural hydrocarbon polymers, such as latex and rubber; synthetic polymers which may be prepared with suitably porous structures, such as vinyl polymers, including polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, polyvinylchloride, polyvinylacetate and its partially hydrolyzed derivatives, polyacrylamides, polymethacrylates, copolymers and terpolymers of the above polycondensates, such as polyesters, polyamides, and other polymers, such as polyurethanes or polyepoxides; porous inorganic materials such as sulfates
  • the support is a well of an array plate, e.g., a microarray.
  • array plate e.g., a microarray.
  • Methods for constructing such arrays are known in the art, e.g., Cao et al., Appl Environ Microbiol , 77(23): 8219-8225, 201 1.
  • Each compound of Formula I (or the peptide indicators alone) may be spotted in triplicate to eliminate irregular data due to physical defects in the array.
  • Embodiments of the disclosed technology further provide for diagnostic systems comprising the aforementioned compositions and/or kits.
  • the various components of the diagnostic systems may be provided in a variety of forms.
  • the compounds of Formula I e.g., compounds containing peptide reporters
  • these lyophilized reagents may be pre-mixed before lyophilization so that when reconstituted they form a complete mixture with the proper ratio of each of the components ready for use in the assay.
  • the diagnostic systems of the disclosed technology may contain a reconstitution reagent for reconstituting the lyophilized reagents of the kit.
  • nucleic acids encoding the following peptides:
  • nucleic acids encoding the polypeptide sequences for ElaSubl CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSubl PDM, CatGSubl_PDM, ElaSubl PDM His, CatGSubl PDM His, ElaSub2_PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • nucleic acids encoding the polypeptide sequences set forth in Table 4 (for ElaSubl CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM _His, CatGSub2_CBM_His) or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • nucleic acid or “nucleic acid sequence,” as used herein, refer to an oligonucleotide, nucleotide, polynucleotide, or any fragment thereof, to DNA or RNA of genomic or synthetic origin which may be single- stranded or double- stranded and may represent the sense or the antisense strand, to peptide nucleic acid (PNA), or to any DNA-like or RNA-like material.
  • fragments refers to those nucleic acid sequences which are greater than about 10 nucleotides in length, and most preferably are at least about 40 nucleotides, at least about 100 nucleotides, or at least about 300 nucleotides in length.
  • Embodiments disclosed herein further relate to variants of the aforementioned polynucleotides.
  • nucleic acids which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the nucleic acids encoding the following peptides: X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X L-Z ; X N 4 N 3 N 2 Z 1 -Z or X N 4 N 3 N 2 Z 1 -L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • nucleic acids which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the nucleotide coding sequence in ElaSubl CBM, CatGSub 1 CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1_PDM, CatGSub 1 PDM, ElaSubl PDM His, CatGSub 1 PDM His, ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM His, or the complementary strand thereto, or the RNA equivalent thereof, or a complementary RNA equivalent thereof.
  • nucleotide sequence variants of aforementioned nucleic acids which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the nucleotide encoding the polypeptide sequences set forth in Table 4 (for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSub 1 CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM_His, CatGSub2_CBM _His) , or the complementary strand thereto, or the RNA equivalent thereof, or a complementary RNA equivalent thereof.
  • Three-to-One Sequence Manipulation Suite which generates three potential nucleic acid sequences for each inputted polypeptide sequence
  • the Three-to-One software is available freely from bioinformatics(dot)org.
  • Percent identity refers to the percentage of sequence similarity found in a comparison of two or more amino acid or nucleic acid sequences. Percent identity can be determined electronically, e.g., by using the MEGALIGN program (LASERGENE software package, DNASTAR).
  • the MEGALIGN program can create alignments between two or more sequences according to different methods, e.g., the Clustal Method. (Higgins, D. G. and P. M. Sharp (1988) Gene 73 :237-244.)
  • the Clustal algorithm groups sequences into clusters by examining the distances between all pairs. The clusters are aligned pairwise and then in groups.
  • the percentage similarity between two amino acid sequences is calculated by dividing the length of sequence A, minus the number of gap residues in sequence A, minus the number of gap residues in sequence B, into the sum of the residue matches between sequence A and sequence B, times one hundred. Gaps of low or of no homology between the two amino acid sequences are not included in determining percentage similarity. Percent identity between nucleic acid sequences can also be calculated by the Clustal Method, or by other methods known in the art, such as the Jotun Hein Method. (See, e.g., Hein, J. (1990) Mehtods Enzymol. 183:626-645.) Identity between sequences can also be determined by other methods known in the art, e.g., by varying hybridization conditions.
  • hybridization refers to any process by which a strand of nucleic acid bonds with a complementary strand through base pairing.
  • hybridization under high stringency conditions could occur in about 50% formamide at about 37° C. to 42° C.
  • Hybridization could occur under reduced stringency conditions in about 35% to 25% formamide at about 30° C. to 35° C.
  • hybridization could occur under high stringency conditions at 42° C.
  • Hybridization could occur under reduced stringency conditions as described above, but in 35% formamide at a reduced temperature of 35° C.
  • the temperature range corresponding to a particular level of stringency can be further narrowed by calculating the purine to pyrimidine ratio of the nucleic acid of interest and adjusting the temperature accordingly. Variations on the above ranges and conditions are well known in the art.
  • hybridization complex refers to a complex formed between two nucleic acid sequences by virtue of the formation of hydrogen bonds between complementary bases.
  • a hybridization complex may be formed in solution or formed between one nucleic acid sequence present in solution and another nucleic acid sequence immobilized on a solid support (e.g., paper, membranes, filters, chips, pins or glass slides, or any other appropriate substrate to which cells or their nucleic acids have been fixed).
  • variants which are polynucleotide fragments of the aforementioned nucleic acids.
  • oligonucleotides e.g., PCR primers, which hybridize to one or more nucleic acids.
  • oligonucleotide refers to a nucleic acid sequence of at least about 6 nucleotides to 60 nucleotides, preferably about 15 to 30 nucleotides, and most preferably about 20 to 25 nucleotides, which can be used in PCR amplification or in a hybridization assay or microarray.
  • the term “oligonucleotide” is substantially equivalent to the terms “amplimers,” “primers,” “oligomers,” and “probes,” as these terms are commonly defined in the art.
  • PNA protein nucleic acid
  • PNA protein nucleic acid
  • PNA refers to an antisense molecule or anti-gene agent which comprises an oligonucleotide of at least about 5 nucleotides in length linked to a peptide backbone of amino acid residues ending in lysine. The terminal lysine confers solubility to the composition.
  • PNAs preferentially bind complementary single stranded DNA and RNA and stop transcript elongation, and may be pegylated to extend their lifespan in the cell. (See, e.g., Nielsen, P. E. et al. (1993) Anticancer Drug Des. 8:53-63.)
  • the vector comprises at least one protein encoding nucleic acid, e.g., nucleic acids encoding the polypeptide sequences for ElaSubl_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 20], CatGSub 1_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 201, ElaSubl _CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 211, CatGSubl __CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 221, ElaSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 231, CatGSub2___CBM [SEQ ID NO: 241, ElaSub2_CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 251, CatGSub2__CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 261, ElaSubl _PDM, CatGSub 1_PDM, ElaSubl _PDM _His, CatGSubl PDM His, ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2_PDM, ElaSub2_PDM
  • operably associated or “operably linked,” as used herein, refer to functionally related nucleic acid sequences.
  • a promoter is operably associated or operably linked with a coding sequence if the promoter controls the transcription of the encoded polypeptide. While operably associated or operably linked nucleic acid sequences can be contiguous and in reading frame, certain genetic elements, e.g., repressor genes, are not contiguously linked to the encoded polypeptide but still bind to operator sequences that control expression of the polypeptide.
  • Codon optimization for expression in a host cell e.g., bacteria such as E. coli or insect Hi5 cells
  • Codon Optimization Tool may be routinely performed using Codon Optimization Tool (CodonOpt), available freely from Integrated DNA Technologies, Inc., Coralville, Iowa.
  • the host cell is capable of recombinantly expressing the gene sequence contained in the vector under standard culture conditions to generate the polypeptide product, e.g., polypeptide sequences for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSub 1 CBM His, CatGSub 1 CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1_PDM, CatGSub 1_PDM, ElaSub 1 PDM His, CatGSubl PDM His, ElaSub2_PDM, CatGSub2_PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • the host cell is E. coli .
  • polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V F/A)X y -L-Z ; X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z or X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • polypeptide sequences set forth in Table 4 for ElaSubl CBM [SEQ ID NO: 111, CatGSub 1 CBM [SEQ ID NO: 121, ElaSub l_CBM_His [SEQ ID NO: 131, CatGSub l CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 14], ElaSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 151] CatGSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 161, ElaSub2_CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 171, CatGSub2_CBM_His [SEQ ID NO: 181] or an enzyme- cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • variants of aforementioned polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, an amino acid sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the following polypeptide sequences: X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V F/A)X y -L-Z ; X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z or X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • variant polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, an amino acid sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%o, 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the polypeptide sequences for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSub 1 CBM, ElaSub 1 CBM His, CatGSub 1 CBM His, ElaSub2 CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1 PDM, CatGSub 1 PDM, ElaSub 1 PDM His, CatGSub 1 PDM His, ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2 _PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof.
  • the fragment comprises a minimal structural motif for the enzyme recognition site (S) or enzyme-reactive site (R) for the hydrolase enzymes described herein, e.g., lysozyme, elastase, cathepsin G, MAO, or a combination thereof.
  • the fragment peptides are immunogenic molecules that can be recognized by antibodies or antigen-binding domains thereof.
  • homologs to the aforementioned peptides and polynucleotides.
  • a partially complementary sequence that at least partially inhibits an identical sequence from hybridizing to a target nucleic acid is referred to as “substantially homologous.” The inhibition of hybridization of the completely complementary sequence to the target sequence may be examined using a hybridization assay (Southern or northern blot, solution hybridization, and the like) under conditions of reduced stringency.
  • a substantially homologous sequence or hybridization probe will compete for and inhibit the binding of a completely homologous sequence to the target sequence under conditions of reduced stringency. This is not to say that conditions of reduced stringency are such that nonspecific binding is permitted, as reduced stringency conditions require that the binding of two sequences to one another be a specific (i .e., a selective) interaction.
  • the absence of non-specific binding may be tested by the use of a second target sequence which lacks even a partial degree of complementarity (e.g., less than about 30% homology or identity). In the absence of nonspecific binding, the substantially homologous sequence or probe will not hybridize to the second non-complementary target sequence.
  • variant peptides comprising a mutation in the core polypeptide sequence for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSub 1 CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSub 1_CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1 PDM, CatGSub 1 PDM, ElaSubl PDM His, CatGSub1 PDM His, ElaSub2 PDM, CatGSub2 PDM, ElaSub2 PDM His, CatGSub2 PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof.
  • the mutation is a substitution, deletion, addition of 1-3 amino acids.
  • the mutation does not change the enzyme recognition sites in the mutant peptides so formed. If the mutation results in a change in the composition of the recognition site or cleavage site, then it is contemplated that the mutation is due to a conserved amino acid substitution,
  • substitution refers to changes in an amino acid or nucleotide sequence resulting in the addition of one or more amino acid residues or nucleotides, respectively, to the sequence found in the naturally occurring molecule.
  • substitution refers to the replacement of one or more amino acids or nucleotides by different amino acids or nucleotides, respectively.
  • Embodiments disclosed herein further include antibodies which bind specifically to one or more of the aforementioned immunogenic peptides.
  • the antibodies bind to polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V F/A)X y -L-Z ; X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z or X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • the antibodies bind to fragment of these polypeptides.
  • Antigen-binding fragments of such antibodies e.g., F(ab) domain, F(ab) 2 domains, scFv domains, including synthetically generated antibodies (using, e.g., phase display technology).
  • the antibodies bind to polypeptide sequences for ElaSub1_CBM, CatGSub1_CBM, ElaSub1_CBM His, CatGSub1_CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub1_PDM, CatGSub1_PDM, ElaSub1_PDM His, CatGSub1_PDM His, ElaSub2_PDM, CatGSub2_PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • Antigen-binding fragments of such antibodies e.g., F(ab) domain, F(ab) 2 domains, scFv domains, including synthetically generated antibodies (using, e.g., phase display technology).
  • nucleic acids e.g., nucleic acids, proteins, peptides, and/or antibody molecules, including, conjugates thereof.
  • substantially purified refers to nucleic acids, amino acids or antibodies that are removed from their natural environment and are isolated or separated, and are at least about 60% free, preferably about 75% free, and most preferably about 90% free from other components with which they are naturally associated.
  • the biomolecules may be altered by combining with various components of the chemical entities, e.g., anchor region and/or indicator region, such that their form and/or functionality is significantly changed compared to any natural counterparts.
  • Embodiments provided herein further relate to methods of making compounds of Formula I, including precursors thereof.
  • precursor includes any compound which is employed as a reactant to generate an intermediary or a final product.
  • a method of making a compound of Formula I comprising the structure A-I, wherein, A is an anchor as described above and I is an indicator as described above, comprising, conjugating the anchor with the indicator molecule, e.g., via covalent bond.
  • the anchor or the indicator may comprise a recognition site (S) or a reaction/labile site (R) for a wound-specific marker, e.g., a wound-specific enzyme such as a hydrolase, and more specifically a protease or glycosidase, as described before.
  • the substrate for the wound-specific marker comprises, for example, a hydrolysable substrate, e.g., an amino acid, a sugar, a peptide, a polysaccharide, a nucleic acid, a lipid, or a combination thereof.
  • a hydrolysable substrate e.g., an amino acid, a sugar, a peptide, a polysaccharide, a nucleic acid, a lipid, or a combination thereof.
  • the anchor is conjugated to the reporter molecule via a peptide linkage, a glycosidic linkage, an amide linkage, an ester linkage, an ether linkage, an anhydride linkage or a similar linkage.
  • a “peptide bond” is formed by the condensation reaction between two amino acids, wherein the acid moiety of one reacts with the amino moiety of the other to produce a peptide bond (—CO—NH—) between the two amino acids.
  • the peptide bond is cleaved with a wound-specific protease, e.g., elastase, cathepsin G or MAO, or a combination thereof.
  • a “glycosidic bond” is formed between the hemiacetal or hemiketal group of a saccharide (or a molecule derived from a saccharide) and the hydroxyl group of some compound such as an alcohol.
  • the peptide bond is cleaved with a wound-specific glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme.
  • a method of making a compound of Formula I comprising the structure A-I, wherein, A and I are each, as described previously.
  • the A is conjugated to the I via a glycosidic linkage.
  • the A is conjugated to the I via a hydrophilic or hydrophobic linkage.
  • the compound of Formula I having the structure A-I is synthesized by first conjugating the anchor region A with the indicator region I to generate the compound of Formula I.
  • the indicator is first synthesized via genetic recombinant technology, e.g., expressing a nucleic acid encoding the indicator region in a suitable host cell, and combining the indicator with the anchor region.
  • the indicator region is designed to contain nucleic acid sequences which bind to the anchor region, e.g., hydrophilically or hydrophobically.
  • hydrophilic interaction comprises use of an anchor containing polar groups, e.g., partially deacetylated (e.g., DA of ⁇ 30%) chitosan, cellulose or carboxym ethyl cellulose (or a derivative thereof), which interacts with a hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I ⁇ Trichoderma reesei).
  • an anchor containing polar groups e.g., partially deacetylated (e.g., DA of ⁇ 30%) chitosan, cellulose or carboxym ethyl cellulose (or a derivative thereof)
  • CBM hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module
  • hydrophobic interaction comprises use of an anchor containing non-polar groups, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate (or a derivative thereof), which interacts with a or the hydrophobic binding module from Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolym erase (PDB).
  • an anchor containing non-polar groups e.g., polyethylene terephthalate (or a derivative thereof)
  • PDB Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolym erase
  • peptide indicators e.g., polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z ; X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z or X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, Land Z are each, as described above, (including variant polypeptides) may be synthesized via host-cell expression systems.
  • Such a method may comprise, for example, generating a construct encoding one or more of the aforementioned polypeptides or variants, placing said construct in a suitable vector, e.g., plasmid vector or baculovirus vector, transfecting a host cell, e.g., E coli or insect Hi5 cells, with the vector; culturing the host cells under suitable conditions to allow expression of said vector; and optionally purifying the expressed polypeptide from the culture.
  • a suitable vector e.g., plasmid vector or baculovirus vector
  • peptide indicators e.g., polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: X y AAPX y -Z , X y AAPX y -L-Z , X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -Z or X y AAP(V/F/A)X y -L-Z ; X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -Z or X y N 4 N 3 N 2 N 1 X y -L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, Land Z are each, as described above (including variant polypeptides) may be synthesized using solid-phase peptide synthesis (see, Merrifield et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85 (14): 2149-2154).
  • the compound of Formula I having the structure A-I may be synthesized in a single reaction chamber or multiple reaction chambers.
  • the compositions, dressing materials, articles, kits and systems described herein are useful in diagnosing or treating wounds, particularly chronic or infected wounds.
  • any type of wound may be diagnosed and/or treated, the embodiments are particularly suitable for diagnosing and treating wounds that exude wound fluid.
  • the wound may be a chronic or acute wound.
  • Representative examples of chronic wounds include, e.g., venous ulcers, pressure sores, decubitis ulcers, diabetic ulcers and chronic ulcers of unknown aetiology.
  • Representative examples of acute wounds include, e.g., acute traumatic laceration, perhaps resulting from an intentional operative incision.
  • a wound fluid refers to any wound exudate or other fluid (suitably substantially not including blood) that is present at the surface of the wound, or that is removed from the wound surface by aspiration, absorption or washing.
  • the determining, measuring or quantifying is suitably carried out on wound fluid that has been removed from the body of the patient, but can also be performed on wound fluid in situ.
  • wound fluid does not normally refer to blood or tissue plasma remote from the wound site.
  • the wound fluid is mammalian wound fluid, suitably human wound fluid.
  • the diagnostic method comprises contacting a wound with at least one composition comprising a compound of Formula I or Formula II, a dressing material comprising such compounds, article comprising such materials or compounds, kits comprising such materials or compounds, or a system comprising such materials or compounds described herein; and measuring a parameter associated with the wound.
  • the parameter being measured is a level or activity of a wound-specific hydrolase.
  • the parameter being measured is the activity of the hydrolase.
  • the measurement may either be made in situ or ex situ.
  • in situ refers to processes, events, objects, or components that are present or take place within the context of the system or device, including, the surrounding environment, for example, the biological material with which the composition, article, system or device is in contact with.
  • an in situ reaction may refer to the reaction of the various components present in the device (e.g., compound of Formula I or Formula II), including, components provided by the human skin tissue (e.g., wound exudate containing the enzyme).
  • ex situ refers to outside of the environment.
  • the measurement is performed ex situ, e.g., removing the fluid from the wound for analysis in the apparatus or device of the disclosed technology.
  • the measurement is made in situ.
  • the method comprising determining a level of a reporter, e.g., a product of a substrate acted upon by a wound-specific enzyme. More specifically, the method comprises determining a level of a hydrolase enzyme product.
  • determining includes measuring a numerical value of the activity or level of said hydrolase; establishing if the activity or level falls above or below a predetermined range; and/or comparing the numerical value of activity or level with a control standard.
  • the control standard may comprise determining a level or activity of the hydrolase in a biopsy material obtained from an unwounded site or from a healthy subject.
  • the term “determining” comprises measuring the parameter (e.g., activity or level) of at least one wound specific protease is selected from the group consisting of MMP-1 (collagenase), MMP-2 (gelatinase A), MMP-3 (stomelysin 1), MMP-8 (neutrophil collagenase), MMP-9 (gelatinase B), human neutrophil elastase (HNE), cathepsin G, urokinase-type plasminogen activator (uPA), and lysozyme, or a combination thereof; establishing if said parameter exceeds a first predetermined threshold; and/or comparing the numerical value of parameter with a control standard.
  • MMP-1 collagenase
  • MMP-2 gelatinase A
  • MMP-3 stomelysin 1
  • MMP-8 neutral collagenase
  • MMP-9 gelatinase B
  • HNE human neutrophil elastase
  • cathepsin G cathe
  • the control standard may comprise determining a parameter of the protease in a biopsy material obtained from an unwounded site or from a healthy subject.
  • the term “determining” comprises establishing whether a weighted average (weighted sum) of the parameters associated with a plurality of the aforementioned proteases exceeds a predetermined threshold value for said weighted average.
  • the parameter is activity level of the analyte (e.g. a protease) in a wound fluid.
  • the activity of an individual analyte is expressed in terms units/mL.
  • the parameter is the level of the analyte (e.g., protease) in a wound fluid.
  • the term amount is also indicative of the activity of a particular analyte.
  • the term “combined amount” or “combined activity” refers to a single numerical value that results from the application of a mathematical function to a plurality of values, for example those amounts obtained for a number of individual analytes.
  • the term “combined amount” or “combined activity” may refer to the sum or product of a group of individual values.
  • the term “combined amount” or “combined activity” relates to the sum of a group of individual values.
  • the amount of elastase refers to elastase-like activity (e.g., U/mL) and the amount of metalloproteinase (MMP) refers to total concentration of the respective analyte (e.g., in ng/mL).
  • MMP metalloproteinase
  • the term “quantifying” refers to measuring an absolute numerical quantity of a particular analyte(s) or substrate(s) in a sample, within the margins of experimental error.
  • markers refers to any chemical entity that is identified or determined using the apparatus, devices, kits or methods defined herein.
  • the markers or analytes determined or identified by the apparatus, devices, kits or methods of the disclosed technology are cleaved products of the aforementioned enzymes.
  • the term “predetermined range” refers to a data range or profile that the skilled person would understand is indicative of a particular sub-class of patient.
  • the predetermined range may be a data range or profile that is typical of a wound that would respond well to a particular wound treatment, such as antibiotic therapy.
  • the predetermined range may suitably refer to a data range that is typical of a wound that would not respond well to a particular wound treatment, such as antibiotic therapy.
  • the term “predetermined threshold” refers to a minimum level that the skilled person would determine is indicative of a non-healing wound based on statistical analysis of levels determined for known healing and non-healing wounds, for example as explained further above.
  • the threshold should be set at an appropriate level so that non-healing wounds with high protease activity are correctly identified. Increasing the threshold will increase the chance of only non-healing wounds being over the threshold. However, if the threshold is too high, wounds that are non-healing due to a high level of proteases would not be identified and clinically this would mean they would not receive the required protease modulating treatment.
  • control standard refers to a data set or profile that can be used as a reference or comparison in order to define or normalize another data point or set of data.
  • control or “control standard” may be data set or profile that is indicative of a particular sub-class of patient.
  • control standard may be a data set or profile indicative of healing or non-healing wound status.
  • control or “control standard” can be a data set or profile that can be used as a comparative tool to allow a skilled person to determine whether a wound is likely to be responsive or non-responsive to a wound treatment, such as antibiotic therapy.
  • control standard is a data set or profile indicative of a patient that does not respond well to wound treatment.
  • control standard is a data set or profile indicative of a patient that responds well to wound treatment.
  • Patients that tend to respond well to wound treatment as disclosed herein exhibit lower combined amount or activity of hydrolases than patients that tend not to respond well to the treatment. For example, patients that tend to respond well to wound treatment as disclosed herein exhibit lower combined amounts of at least one wound-specific hydrolase.
  • the threshold human neutrophil elastase activity is about 5 U/mL to about 30 U/mL, including all values in between, e.g., about 6 U/mL, about 7 U/mL, about 8 U/mL, about 9 U/mL, about 10 U/mL, about 11 U/mL, about 12 U/mL, about 13 U/mL, about 14 U/mL, about 15 U/mL, about 16 U/mL, about 17 U/mL, about 18 U/mL, about 19 U/mL, about 20 U/mL, about 21 U/mL, about 22 U/mL, about 23 U/mL, about 24 U/mL, about 25 U/mL, or more, indicate chronic wound infection.
  • the threshold human neutrophil elastase activity levels of at least 9.6 indicate chronic wound infection. In some embodiments, human neutrophil elastase activity levels of at least 22.9 U/mL indicate chronic wound infection.
  • the threshold cathepsin G activity levels of about 10 U/mL to about 100 U/mL including all values in between, e.g., about 15 U/mL, about 20 U/mL, about 25 U/mL, about 30 U/mL, about 35 U/mL, about 40 U/mL, about 45 U/mL, about 50 U/mL, about 55 U/mL, about 60 U/mL, about 65 U/mL, about 70 U/mL, about 75 U/mL, about 80 U/mL, about 85 U/mL, about 90 U/mL, about 95 U/mL, about 100 U/mL, about 1 10 U/mL, about 120 U/mL, or more, indicate chronic wound infection.
  • cathepsin G activity levels of at least 50 U/mL, at least 40 U/mL, at least 30 U/mL, at least 20 U/mL, at least 15 U/mL or at least 10 U/mL indicates chronic wound infection.
  • Embodiments disclosed herein further relate to treatment of chronic or infected wounds using the compositions, materials, articles, dressings, kits and/or systems described herein.
  • the therapeutic embodiment includes, contacting a composition, material, article, dressing, kit, system or devices of the disclosed technology with a subject in need thereof.
  • the method may include determination of whether the subject is responding to the treatment.
  • wounds are “responsive to treatment” or not.
  • the skilled person will readily be able to determine the levels of the proteases identified in the present claims that are predictive or indicative of a good response or poor response to wound treatment, particularly to treatment with wound dressings comprising oxidized cellulose.
  • responsive and responder(s) refer to wounds that are considered to respond well to wound treatment, particularly to treatment with a pharmacological agent, e.g., antibiotics.
  • non-responsive and non-responder(s) refers to wounds that are not considered to respond well to wound treatment, particularly to treatment with the pharmacological agent, e.g., antibiotics. For instance, patients who exhibit better than 50% wound closure after 4 weeks of wound treatment are considered to be responsive to said treatment.
  • a patient may be simultaneously diagnosed and treated with the compositions, articles, systems, or devices described herein.
  • the term “simultaneously” means performing the stated objectives, e.g., diagnosis and treatment, together.
  • a patient may be sequentially diagnosed and treated with the compositions, articles, systems, or devices described herein.
  • Embodiments described herein further enable a care giver or a patient to determine quickly and reliably whether a wound is likely to be non-healing, and to select an appropriate therapy based on this determination.
  • non-healing wounds may require the application of special wound dressings such as wound dressings comprising specific therapeutic agents, to promote healing.
  • embodiments described herein further provide methods of treatment of a wound, e.g., chronic or infected wounds, comprising determining whether a wound is healing or non-healing, followed by applying a wound dressing comprising a therapeutic agent to the wound if it is non-healing.
  • Embodiments described herein provide methods and assays for diagnosis or detection of infected wounds.
  • the methods are suitable for the detection of bacterial infectious agents.
  • the wounds are infected with gram-negative bacteria.
  • Typical gram-negative bacteria include proteobacteria such as E. coli, Salmonella, Pseudomonas, and Helicobacter, and cyanobacteria .
  • the wounds are infected with gram-positive bacteria.
  • gram-positive bacteria is meant a bacterium or bacteria that contain(s) teichoic acid ⁇ e.g., lipoteichoic acid and/or wall teichoic acid), or a functionally equivalent glycopolymer ⁇ e.g., a rhamnopolysaccharide, teichuronic acid, arabinogalactan, lipomannan, and lipoarabinomannan) in its cell wall.
  • functionally equivalent glycopolymers are described in Weidenmaier et al, Nature , 6:276-287, 2008.
  • the bacteria include pathogenic bacteria that infect mammalian hosts ⁇ e.g. , bovine, murine, equine, primate, feline, canine, and human hosts).
  • pathogenic bacteria include, e.g., members of a bacterial species such as Bacteroides, Clostridium, Streptococcus, Staphylococcus, Pseudomonas, Haemophilus, Legionella, Mycobacterium, Escherichia, Salmonella, Shigella, Vibrio, or Listeria .
  • the infectious bacteria is selected from the group consisting of Clostridium difficile , Carbapenem-Resistant Enterobacteriaceae (CK- Klebsiella spp; CK- E. coli ), and Neisseria gonorrhoeae .
  • the infectious bacteria is selected from the group consisting of multi drug-resistant Acinetobacter , drug-resistant Campylobacter , extended spectrum ⁇ -Lactamase (ESBL)-producing enterobacteriaceae , vancomycin-resistant enterococcus , multidrug-resistant pseudomonas aeruginosa , drug-resistant non-typhoidal Salmonella , drug-resistant Salmonella enterica serovar Typhi , drug-resistant Shigella , methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA), drug-resistant Streptococcus pneumoniae , and drug-resistant Tuberculosis .
  • multi drug-resistant Acinetobacter drug-resistant Campylobacter
  • ESBL extended spectrum ⁇ -Lactamase
  • ESBL extended spectrum ⁇ -Lactamase
  • ESBL extended spectrum ⁇ -Lactamase
  • ESBL extended spectrum ⁇ -Lactamase
  • ESBL extended spectrum ⁇ -Lactamas
  • the infectious bacteria is selected from the group consisting of vancomycin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus , erythromycin-resistant Group A Streptococcus , clindamycin-Resistant Group B Streptococcus .
  • the chronic or infected wounds are found in host subjects.
  • the hosts are mammals, e.g., a rodent, a human, a livestock animal, a companion animal, or a non-domesticated or wild animal.
  • the subject may be a rodent, e.g. a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, etc.
  • the subject may be a livestock animal.
  • suitable livestock animals may include pigs, cows, horses, goats, sheep, llamas and alpacas.
  • the subject may be a companion animal.
  • companion animals may include pets such as dogs, cats, rabbits, and birds.
  • the subject may be a zoo animal.
  • a “zoo animal” refers to an animal that may be found in a zoo. Such animals may include non-human primates, large cats, wolves, and bears.
  • the subject is a human.
  • kits for detecting levels of one or more enzymes in a mammalian wound comprising the steps of: (a) placing the wound dressing material described herein in contact with the mammalian wound; (b) visually comparing the wound dressing material in contact with the mammalian wound with one or more reference samples; and (c) obtaining a qualitative determination of the concentration of reporter molecules in the wound dressing material in contact with the mammalian wound.
  • the diagnosis and treatment is conducted in situ.
  • Embodiments described herein therefore allow diagnosis and treatment of wounds in an easy, non-invasive manner.
  • the diagnosis may be made in real time and the treatment may be applied to the infected wound or to the patient (systemically) and the progress of wound treatment be monitored over real-time, e.g., dissipation of the signal generated by the reporter molecule due to wound-healing.
  • a chemical entity comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of: an anchor region, an enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region, and an indicator region.
  • the method compromises placing substrates for MPO, elastase, lysozyme, phospholipase, and catalase on a solid surface such that any reaction is visible to the eye.
  • the method serves to assess a variety of body fluids including wound, tear, vitreal, CSF, airway aspirates or sputum, synovial, blood, plasma, serum, urine, peritoneal, interstitial, subcutaneous, bile, intestinal or similar fluids, via contacting them with a material containing the substrates and assessing the change of the substrates thereafter.
  • Chitosan (10 g, from shrimp shells) was dissolved in 2% acetic acid solution (1 L). The solution was stirred overnight at room temperature and afterwards filtered using a nylon filter (0.45 ⁇ t). Subsequently the pH was adjusted to 8 by the addition of 4 M NaOH to precipitate chitosan. The obtained precipitate was isolated by centrifugation (10000 rpm, 10 min) and thoroughly washed with distilled water until the pH of the washing solution reached ⁇ 7. Afterwards the precipitate was washed with 90% ethanol, the remaining ethanol was allowed to evaporate and the chitosan was freeze-dried. The purified product was analyzed by FTIR (1560 cm ′1 , 1640 cm ′′1 ) and material with an approximate DA of 48% was used further
  • chitosan (example 1) was dissolved in 10% acetic acid solution to obtain a 1% chitosan solution. An equal volume of 96% Ethanol was added as well as acetic anhydride. The reaction was stirred for 1 h before the pH was adjusted to 7. The precipitate was isolated by centrifugation and freeze-dried. Subsequently, the obtained acetylated chitosan was several times washed with distilled water and again freeze-dried. The degree of N-acetylation (DA) was analyzed by ⁇ -NMR and FTIR (1560 cm ′′1 , 1640 cm ′′1 ) and found to be 40-60% as indicated in the graphic below. Chitosan derivatives with varying DA were produced, but only material with a DA of 48% was further used
  • a solution consisting of 2.5% (w/v) Na 2 SO 4 and 1% (w/v) Na 2 CO 3 in distilled water was added, and the mixture was incubated at 25° C. for 10 min. After a subsequent incubation step at 65° C., the solid was isolated by centrifugation (7800 rpm, 5 min). The precipitate was washed with distilled water until the washing solution remained colorless and subsequently freeze dried.
  • the dye content was determined measuring the unbound reactive black 5 after the reaction was completed. The dye was largely associated with the precipitate and high MW fraction. Degree of acylation was 48%.
  • chitosan (2.5 g; Example 1) was dissolved in acetate buffer (100 mM, pH 5) to obtain a 1% chitosan solution. Afterwards chitosanase from Streptomyces griseus (1 unit) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 d on a thermomixer (37° C., 150 rpm). The solution was concentrated in vacuo and non-oligomeric chitosan was precipitated using 1 volumetric equivalent of 96% ethanol. The supernatant was concentrated again and subsequently oligosaccharides were precipitated by the addition of 9 volumetric equivalents of acetone.
  • the oligosaccharides were isolated by centrifugation, several times washed with 50% acetone in water, and freeze-dried without prior washing.
  • the degree of polymerization was determined by TLC and SEC (TSK gel G5000 PWXL, Pullulan as standard), indicating a mean MW of 5360 associated to a degree of polymerization of ca. 24.
  • Mn Number molecular weight
  • PDI Polydispersity Index
  • DP Degree of polymerization
  • a chitooligosaccharide mixture (7 g) (example 4) was dissolved in distilled water (200 mL) before 96% ethanol (400 mL) was added. The solution was stirred for 5 min and acetic anhydride (4.12 mL, 1 molar equiv. calc. to free amines) was added. The mixture was stirred for further 2 h at room temperature before the pH was adjusted to 7 with a 10%) NaOH solution. The solvent was removed, and the remaining precipitate was freeze-dried. The degree of N-acetylation was analyzed by 1 H-NMR, FTIR (1560 cm -1 , 1640 cm -1 ) and dye content (photometrically, 626 nm). The degree of N-acetylation was found to be 48 %.
  • Lysozyme digestion of dyed chitosan derivatives The synthesized substrates were investigated in different media: potassium phosphate buffer (66 mM, pH 6.2) as well as artificial wound fluid containing 5000 U of lysozyme from hen egg white, and human wound fluid from infected wounds (see FIGS. 5 and 6 ).
  • Two milligrams of the lysozyme substrates was suspended in the respective test medium and incubated at 35° C.
  • the sample was briefly centrifuged, 200 ⁇ L of the supernatant was transferred to a 96-well plate and photometrically analyzed at the absorption maximum of the respective dye. After the analysis, the withdrawn sample was returned in the reaction vial and further incubated.
  • composition of the artificial wound fluid contained human serum albumin (2%), sodium chloride (0.36%), sodium bicarbonate, (0.05%), sodium citrate (0.02%), sodium lactate (0.1%), glucose (0.1%), calcium chloride dihydrate (0.01%), magnesium chloride (0.02%), and urea (0.01%).
  • Example 7 Synthesis of Indol/Chitooligomer Based Substrates for the Detection Of Wound Infection.
  • COSs chito oligosaccharides
  • DP degree of polymerization
  • Example 8 1-chloro,3-O,6-O-Diacetyl-4-O-[3-O,4-O,6-O-triacetyl-2- (acetylamino)-2-deoxy-P-D-glucopyranosyl]-2-(acetylamino)-2-deoxy- ⁇ -D-glucopyranoside (Compound 7)
  • Chitobiose octaacetate 2 (20 mg) was suspended in acetyl chloride and the solution was saturated with HCl gas and stirred for 30 h. Afterwards the solution was evaporated and used without further purification.
  • Example 9 1-(5-Bromo-4-chloro-N-acetyl-3-indolyl),3-0,6-0-Diacetyl-4-0-[3-0,4-O,6-O-triacetyl-2-(acetylamino)-2-deoxy- ⁇ -D-glucopyranosyl]-2-(acetylamino)-2-deoxy- ⁇ -D-glucopyranoside (Compound 13)
  • a 12 g MPLC column was used for the separation with a gradient of pure chloroform to 15 parts chloroform to one part ethanol over 10 column volumes. Then 5 column volumes 15 parts chloroform to one part ethanol were used isocratic. The final flushing step was 10 parts chloroform to one part ethanol for 5 column volumes.
  • GlcNAc 14 (100 mg) was dissolved in H 2 0 (1.8 mL) and triethylamine (0.6 mL) was added. The solution was chilled in an ice bath prior to the addition of 2-chloro-1, 3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride (DMC, 230 mg). The solution was stirred for 30 min. DMC and TEA were removed by MPLC (CI 8) using H 2 0 as eluent. The product fractions were pooled and concentrated in vacuo .
  • DMC 2-chloro-1, 3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride
  • N-Acetyl- ⁇ -D-glucosamine tetraacetate (391 mg, 1.00 mmol) was suspended in acetyl chloride (7 mL) while cooling with an ice bath. The mixture was degassed with argon for 5 min. Afterwards MeOH (1.00 mL) was added dropwise over a period of two hours. During the first 15 min of MeOH addition the reaction mixture was degassed with argon; then it was kept under argon atmosphere (stirred in ice bath all the time). After complete addition of the MeOHl the reaction mixture was stirred additional 10 min with cooling in an ice bath. Afterwards it was allowed to warm to RT and was stirred at RT overnight. The mixture was concentrated to dryness, taken up in DCM (10 mL), concentrated to dryness again, taken up in diisopropyl ether (15 mL) and concentrated to dryness once more to yield a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
  • Example 12 (jV-Acetyl-5-bromo-4-chloro-indol-3-yl) 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (12a) and (5-Bromo-4-chloro-indol-3-yl) 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (12b)
  • Example 19 The crude product of Example 19 was dissolved in acetyl chloride (1 mL) under argon atmosphere and cooled in an ice bath. MeOH (55 ⁇ L) was added dropwise within approximately 1 min. After complete addition the mixture was stirred in the ice bath for additional 10 min, then the solution was allowed to warm to RT; additional acetyl chloride (5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at RT overnight. Afterwards it was concentrated to dryness, taken up in dichloromethane (5 mL), concentrated to dryness again, suspended in diisopropyl ether and concentrated to dryness another time to yield 55 mg crude product. The crude product was used for the next step without further purification.
  • Example 20 Synthesis of Phenol/Chitosan/Laccases Based Substrates for The Detection of Wound Infection.
  • N-acetyl chitosan was dissolved in sodium acetate buffer (100 mM, pH 5.0) to obtain a 1% solution (w/v). 20 mL of this solution were mixed with 20 mL of a sinapic acid solution in ethanol (20 mM). EDC and NHS were added (1.3 g each) and the solution was stirred for 2 h. The reaction was stopped by adding NaOH (1 M) drop-wise, the resulting precipitate was washed with water until no phenol could be detected anymore in the washing solution. Afterwards the product was freeze dried.
  • N-acetyl chitosan was dissolved in sodium acetate buffer (100 mM, pH 5.0) and aminomethoxyphenol (dissolved in ethanol) was added to obtain a total concentration of 20 mM. 2.3 mL of this solution were mixed with 1.6 mL of dodecane and applied to a sonicator to produce an emulsion.
  • SA grafted N-acetyl chitosan (5 mg) was suspended in 500 potassium phosphate buffer (62 mM, pH 6.2) containing lysozyme (0.1 mg/mL). The solution was incubated for one hour. The reaction supernatant was incubated with laccase (1 U/mL) and an immediate color change was observed.
  • N-acetyl chitosan / aminomethoxyphenol nanoparticle emulsion 50 ⁇ L was mixed with 450 ⁇ L potassium phosphate buffer (62 mM, pH 6.2) containing lysozyme (0.1 mg/mL) and laccase (1 U/mL). The nanoparticles were destructed after 15 min (yielding a clear solution) developing strong colour.
  • Different reactive dyes can be used for the dying of peptidoglycan (Table 1).
  • reactive dyes containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group such as reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16.
  • dyes containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10 can be used.
  • Dyes were evaluated by consideration of their degree of reaction with peptidoglycan and the speed with which the dye was released when the dyed peptidoglycan was incubated with lysozyme (see earlier section of Example 7 for dying and Example 6 for digestion assay).
  • Micrococcus lysodeicticus cell broth from an animal free fermentation was centrifuged at 4000 g and 4° C. for 15 min to gain a wet cell pellet.
  • the cell pellet (20 g) was washed twice with ddH20 (800 ml) to get rid of any remaining media components (constant centrifugation conditions).
  • the wet Micrococcus lysodeicticus cell pellet (20 g, we dry ration 4: 1, 5 g dry M. lysodeicticus cells) were suspended in 1 M HCl (80 g) and incubated for 1 h at 60° C. and 720 rpm. The sterilized and interrupted cells were then centrifuged at 4000 g and 4° C. for 15 min.
  • the peptidoglycan pellet was resuspended and washed with Na-Phosphate buffer (400 ml, 100 mM, pH 7.0) to adjust the pH of the suspension to a neutral pH and to get rid of cell components of the disruption process (constant centrifugation conditions).
  • Another washing step with 500 ml of ddH20 was carried out to get rid of disrupted cell components and buffer salts. The gained pellet after the last washing step was ready to use for the staining procedure.
  • Peptidoglycan 50 mg
  • reactive black 5 5 mg
  • Na2C03 10 mg
  • Na2S04 25 mg
  • ddH20 double-distilled water
  • the reaction mixture was incubated at 25° C. and 750 rpm for 10 min followed by a second incubation step at 65° C. and 750 rpm-shaking for another 30 min.
  • the dyed peptidoglycan was centrifuged at 10000 g for 10 min. The supernatant was collected, and the pellet was re-suspended in ddH20 and centrifuged again at 10000 g for 10 min. The washing procedure was repeated until the supernatant was clear. Different buffers or organic solvents like ethanol could be used for the washing procedure. The absorbance levels of all supernatants were measured at 597 nm. The supernatant was defined as clear, if the absorbance was below a value of 0.05. The amount of unbound dye in the supernatant was calculated using a calibration curve and the measured absorbance levels of the supernatants. Consequentially, the amount of peptidoglycan-bound dye was calculated. The dyed peptidoglycan was stored at 4-8° C. for a maximum of 2 wks or dried via lyophilization for a longer storage period.
  • Reactive black 5 200 mg
  • peptidoglycan 300 mg
  • ddH20 40 mL
  • the reaction solution was stirred at 50° C. for 30 min.
  • Na2S04 1 g
  • Na3P04 200 mg was added to the reaction solution, which was stirred again for 30 min at 50° C.
  • the dyed peptidoglycan was centrifuged at 10000 g for 10 min. The supernatant was collected, and the pellet was re-suspended in ddH20 and was again centrifuged at 10000 g for 10 min. The washing procedure was repeated until the supernatant was clear. Different buffers or organic solvents like ethanol could be used for the washing procedure. The absorbance levels of all supernatants were measured at 597 nm. The supernatant was defined as clear, if the absorbance was below a value of 0.05. The amount of unbound dye in the supernatant was calculated using a calibration curve and the measured absorbance levels of the supernatants. Consequentially, the amount of peptidoglycan-bound dye was calculated. The dyed peptidoglycan was stored at 4-8° C. where it appears to be stable or dried via lyophilisation.
  • Peptidoglycan (150 mg, dry weight) was suspended in ddH20 (20 ml) and heated to 50° C.
  • the reaction was started by the addition of reactive black 5 (7 different variants with different amounts of reactive dye according to table X).
  • the reaction was stirred (210 rpm) at 50° C. for 1 h.
  • Na2C03 was added periodically every 10 minutes (5 x 100 mg, after 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 min reaction time).
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for another 10 min after the last addition of Na2C03.
  • the reaction solution was centrifuged at 4000 g at 4° C. for 15 min.
  • the pellet was resuspended and washed in ddH20 (40 g) 3 times and always centrifuged as before.
  • Example 23 Colorimetric Enzyme Assay for Detection of Myeloperoxidase Activity
  • Reagents like 3,4-diamino benzoic acid, 3-amino-4-hydroxy benzoic acid, 4-amino- 3-hydroxy benzoic acid, 2,3-diamino benzoic acid, 3,4-dihydroxy benzoic acid, 2-amino phenol, 2-amino-3-methoxy benzoic acid, Methyl-3,4-diaminibenzoate and 2-amino-4-methoxy phenol can be used for the detection of MPO activity (Table 2). Assay conditions: 1 mg/mL DABA or equivalent was dissolved in 100 mM sodium-phosphate-buffer (pH 6.4). H 2 O 2 was added to a final concentration of 5 mM.
  • the substrate/H 2 0 2 solution (95 ⁇ L) was added to a 96-well microtiter plate along with 5 ⁇ L of a MPO-containing sample.
  • the solution turned brownish upon MPO oxidation.
  • the reaction was monitored at 450 nm using a standard photometric plate reader.
  • Chimeric gene variants were synthesized encoding one to four concatemers of the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I ( Trichoderma reesei ), or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase ( Alcaligenes faecalis ).
  • CBM hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module
  • PDB hydrophobic binding module
  • Chimeric variants with the hydrophilic binding module (CBM) enable the attachment onto cellulose based filter papers/fabrics
  • chimeric variants with the hydrophobic binding module (PDM) enable the attachment onto PET (Polyethylene terephthalate) based strips.
  • TrxA- ElaSub 1_CBM_His fusion proteins were designed.
  • the construct consists of the trxA (thioredoxin) gene, a short spacer sequence that encodes a 6xHis-Tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] and the enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 2] for separating the TrxA fusion tag from the protein of interest. Subsequently to the enterokinase site, the newly designed elasub1_cbm coding sequence was introduced into the construct.
  • the elasub1 sequence encodes for amino acids that expose a lot of functional groups like thiol-, hydroxyl-, amino- or carboxy groups. These amino acids (cysteine, lysine, arginine, glutamine, asparagine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, serine, threonine or tyrosine) should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptides.
  • the coding sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) was located directly downstream to the elasub1 sequence, termed elasub1_cbm.
  • TrxA_ElaSub1_CBM-His fusion protein [SEQ ID NO: 9]:
  • Variant 1 ElaSub1_CBM.
  • the ElaSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub1 protein sequence, termed ElaSub1_CBM.
  • ElaSub1_CBM The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub1 protein sequence, termed ElaSub1_CBM.
  • a codon for cysteine is inserted.
  • the thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide.
  • two recognition/cleavage sites for HLE Al-Ala-Pro- Val
  • HLE Two recognition/cleavage sites for HLE
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye.
  • the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye.
  • the amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
  • Variant 2 CatGSub1_CBM.
  • the CatGSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub1 protein sequence, termed CatGSub1_CBM.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • a codon for cysteine is inserted into this region.
  • the thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide.
  • two recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region.
  • certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteine.
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye.
  • the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye.
  • the amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
  • Variant 3 ElaSub1_CBM_His.
  • the ElaSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub 1 protein sequence, termed ElaSub1_CBM.
  • ElaSub1_CBM The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub 1 protein sequence, termed ElaSub1_CBM.
  • a codon for cysteine is inserted.
  • the thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide.
  • two recognition/cleavage sites for HLE Al-Ala-Pro- Val
  • HLE Two recognition/cleavage sites for HLE
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye. Through ionic exchange, the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye.
  • a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
  • Variant 4 CatGSub1 CBM His.
  • the CatGSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSubl protein sequence, termed CatGSub 1 CBM.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • a codon for cysteine is inserted into this region.
  • the thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide.
  • two recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region.
  • certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteine.
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye. Through ionic exchange, the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye.
  • a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
  • Variant 5 ElaSub2_CBM.
  • the ElaSub2 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub2 protein sequence, termed ElaSub2_CBM.
  • ElaSub2_CBM The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub2 protein sequence, termed ElaSub2_CBM.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye.
  • the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye.
  • the amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 4.
  • Variant 6 CatGSub2_CBM.
  • the CatGSub2_CBM construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the CatGSub2 protein sequence, termed CatGSub2 CBM.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • the thiol group of the cysteines should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide.
  • three recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region.
  • certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteines.
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye.
  • the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye.
  • the amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 4.
  • Variant 7 ElaSub2_CBM_His.
  • the ElaSub2 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub2 protein sequence, termed ElaSub2_CBM.
  • ElaSub2_CBM The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub2 protein sequence, termed ElaSub2_CBM.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye. Through ionic exchange, the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye.
  • a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 4.
  • the CatGSub2_CBM construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids.
  • the sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the CatGSub2 protein sequence, termed CatGSub2_CBM.
  • CBM hydrophilic binding module
  • the thiol group of the cysteines should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide.
  • three recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region.
  • certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteines.
  • Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye. Through ionic exchange, the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye.
  • a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 5.
  • Variant 9 to variant 16 could be designed identically as variant 1 to variant 8 with the exception of changing the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module (CBM) against the hydrophobic binding module (PDB).
  • CBM hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module
  • PDB hydrophobic binding module
  • Table 5B Nucleotide sequence of the chimeric gene variants with the hydrophile carbohydrate binding module. All eight constructs were cloned into a pET-32b(+) expression vector (Novagen) using the Nco I and Xho I restriction sites located in the MCS of the cloning vector.
  • Elasubl CBM [SEQ ID NO: 191 ElaSub1_CBM ATGGGTGGTAGCTGCGGTGGTGGTGGTAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGGTGGTGGCGGTTCGCTGCTC CTGTGGGTGGCGGTGGTTCACCGCCTGGTGGTAATCGTGGTACAACCACCACCCGTCCGC AACCACAACCGGTAGCAGTCGGGTCCGACCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTGGTGGAGGT AACCACAACCGETAGCAGTCCGGGTCCCGACCCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTGGTGGTATTGGT TATAGCGG7CCGACCGTTTGTGCAAGCGGCACCACCACCTGTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTAT7ATAGCC AGTGTCTG
  • Example 25 Expression of Elastase (HLE) Substrates With Polymer Binding Sequences.
  • Variant 3 (Example 9): BL21 Gold (DE3) [pET32b(+)ela Sub1_cbm His]
  • the chimeric gene was cloned into a pET32b(+) expression system using Ncol and Xhoi restriction sites/enzymes.
  • Final protein expression of the chimeric peptide was carried out in E. coli BL21 Gold (DE3), a protease deficient expression host, which enables a proper protein expression based on the T7 promoter of the pET32b(+) expression vector.
  • the proper protein expression of the recombinant protein was monitored with SDS-PAGE, compared to the identically expressed empty pET32b(+) vector.
  • Purification of the chimeric construct from crude lysate was done using the IBA -NTA sepharose gravity flow column (1 ml) according to the IBA protocol. Fractions containing the purified protein were examined using SDS-PAGE. In order to prevent protein exposure to the high imidazole concentration after elution, buffer exchange was carried out using PD 10 desalting columns from GE Healthcare. The yield of the purified chimeric fusion construct could be calculated with 30 mg protein per 2 g initial cell pellet.
  • the recombinant expressed bovine enterokinase from Merck Millipore was used.
  • the separation of the desired chimeric construct from the TrxA-Tag was verified by SDS-PAGE.
  • the finished chimeric construct was adsorbed onto a cellulose based filter paper (or fabrics) through the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module.
  • the filter strip containing the chimeric peptide was incubated for 30 min with a 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.4), containing 0.05 U/ml HLE, as well as with human wound fluids.
  • a 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer solution pH 7.4
  • a 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer solution pH 7.4
  • 0.05 U/ml HLE containing 0.05 U/ml HLE
  • Initially non coloured samples (clear supernatant) that exhibit elastase activity developed a blue colour, depending on the attached dye. Due to enzymatic cleavage at one or both of the internal HLE restriction sites (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val), peptide fragments with the attached Remazol Brilliant Blue dye molecules get uncoupled, resulting in a blue coloured supernatant.
  • chimeric constructs with the hydrophobic binding module can be used for adsorption of PET (Polyethylene terephthalate) based carrier materials.
  • PET Polyethylene terephthalate
  • the PDM group can be interchanged with the CBD in a manner described before.
  • the polyhydroxybutyrate depolymerase from A. faecalis (PBM or PDM) sequences are described in Ribitsch et al., “Fusion of Binding Domains to Thermobifida cellulosilytica Cutinase to Tune Sorption Characteristics and Enhancing PET Hydrolysis,” Biomacromolecules , 14 (6), pp 1769-1776, 2013.
  • the disclosure in Ribitsch is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Analogously, any solid phase binding domain can be used in this manner.
  • Other types of CBD peptides may be employed interchangably to achieve the desired functionality.
  • the constructs disclosed herein comprise a non-soluble ancher like CBD, this can be interchanged with other anchors, notably other CBDs or PDMs. Smaller anchors are preferred for stoiciometric reasons.
  • elastase As exemplified herein, has broad preferences, wherein AAPV [SEQ ID NO: 3] sequence is most preferred, however, AAPF [SEQ ID NO: 4] is almost the same in terms of turnover and AAAA [SEQ ID NO: 4] is similar. Thus, anyone of these sequences could be exchanged for the other without loss of function.
  • Cyteines are particularly employed as a means to anchor dyes and particularly not more than one per construct, preferably one per cutting site. They should be distal from the cutting sites to ensure that the sulfonated dye does not interact with the enzyme more than necessary.
  • elastase is a basic enzyme and it is inhibited by strong negatively charged groups. This means that more than one sulfonated dye per cutting site is not required. It is desirable that the number of sulfonate groups is lower than 4 per cutting site. With greater number of such sulfonate groups, there is a risk that they will mask access to the cutting site.
  • Trx-Ela-Subl Purified and lyophilised Trx-Ela-Subl was dissolved in 3 ⁇ 40 (0.01 g/2.5 ml) (protein concentration ⁇ 0.2 mg/ml). The buffer was exchanged from Tris-HCl to a Na 2 P0 4 /Na 2 S0 4 solution using a PD-10 column.
  • the stained and purified peptide construct was applied on a cellulose surface and dried at 37° C. for 2 h. Unbound Trx-Ela-Sub 1-RBB was removed with H 2 0. The stripes with the applied Elastase substrate were incubated with and without Elastase containing buffer, respectively. The Elastase responsive dye release can be seen in FIG. 10 .
  • Example 28 3-Step-Immobilisation of Bromocresol Purple Onto OH-Rich Surfaces Like Cellulose as pH Indicator.
  • Step Soaking of OH-rich surface (e.g. cellulose) in reaction solution. Incubation of soaked material at 80 - 120° C. for 5-20 min.
  • OH-rich surface e.g. cellulose
  • Step 3 Bromocresol purple (0.1 - 3.3 mg/ml) applied on pretreated material and dried at 120° C. for 20 min.
  • p-Nitrophenylphosphorylcholine as substrate for Phospholipase C was used.
  • p-Mtrophenylphosphorylcholine is dissolved in water (50-100 mM).
  • 230 ⁇ l of the buffer and 100 ⁇ l of the substrate are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • Diagnosis A volume between 5 and 12 ⁇ L of wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 ⁇ L and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to yellow.
  • Infected wound fluid samples A, B, C
  • non-infected samples D, E, F
  • IA Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Example 30 Phospholipase A2 Based Test - Liquid System
  • Diagnosis A volume between 5 and 12 pL of wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 ⁇ l and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to yellow.
  • Example 31 Catalase Based Test - Liquid System
  • Purpald as substrate for Catalase was used. Purpalt is dissolved in water (50-100 mM). 200 ⁇ l of substrate solution are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • Diagnosis A volume between 5 and 12 ⁇ L of wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 ⁇ l and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to dark violet.
  • a material containing substrates for one or more of MPO, elastase, lysozyme, phospholipase, and catalase and optionally a pH indicator is contacted with a body fluids such as wound, tear, vitreal, CSF, airway aspirates or sputum, synovial, blood, plasma, serum, urine, peritoneal, interstitial, subcutaneous, bile, intestinal or similar fluids. Samples from infected organisms or tissues tend to show a higher degree of reaction. A combination of one or more of the reactions is used to detect the infection and its degree.
  • N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p- nitroanilide dissolved at a concentration of 20 mM in DMSO in 0.1 M HEPES buffer (pH 7.4, containing 0.5 M NaCl) is pipetted into a transparent eppendorf tube.
  • the final concentration of N- methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide can be between 0.05 to 2.50 mM, and is preferentially between 0.80 and 1.20 mM.
  • a volume between 1 and 15 L of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 2-5 ⁇ L. and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds.
  • Example 34 Elastase Based Test - Cellulose Paper Based System
  • N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide is dissolved at a concentration of 281 mM in dimethoxysulfoxide. 2-5 ⁇ l of this solution, preferentially 2 ⁇ l were pipetted onto Whatman-Filterpapier.
  • test system of Whatman-Filterpapier incubated with N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide is then incubated with 1-5 ⁇ l, preferentially 2 ⁇ l sputum sample and 2 ⁇ l 2 ⁇ l NaCl (50 mM) and incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change of the filterpaper to yellow. Non infected sputum samples will not change colour.
  • infected samples (A, B) and non infected samples (C, D) were taken and placed into the diagnostic system described in 1C containing the substrate mM N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide .
  • Example 35 Cathepsin Based Test - Liquid System
  • N-succinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe-p-nitroanilide is dissolved at a concentration of 20 mM in dimethoxysulfoxide and diluted in 0.1 M HEPES buffer (pH 7.4, containing 0.5 M NaCl).
  • the final concentration of N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe p-nitroanilide can be between 0.5 to 5 mM, and is preferentially 3 mM.
  • a volume between 1 and 5 ⁇ L of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially 2-4 uL and mixed by manual shaking. This mixture is incubated at 37° C. for 20 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change to yellow. Mixtures containing non infected samples will not change colour.
  • Example 36 Cathepsin Based Test - Cellulose Based System
  • N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe-p-nitroanilide is dissolved at a concentration of 20 mM in dimethoxysulfoxide and diluted in 0.1 M HEPES buffer (pH 7.4, containing 0.5 M NaCl).
  • the final concentration of N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe-p- nitroanilide can be between 0.5 to 10 mM, and is preferentially 5.00 mM. 10 ⁇ L of this solution were pipetted onto Whatman filter paper.
  • test system of Whatman-Filterpapier incubated with N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide is then incubated with 1-5 ⁇ l preferentially 2 ⁇ l sputum sample and 2 ⁇ l 2 ⁇ l NaCl (50 mM) and incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change of the filterpaper to yellow. Non infected sputum samples will not change colour,
  • infected samples (A, B) and non- infected samples (C, D) were taken and placed into the diagnostic system described in 1C containing the substrate mM -methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide .
  • Example 37 Myeloperoxidase Based Test - Liquid System
  • TMB TMB
  • ABTS ABTS
  • Guaiacol 4-Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid
  • Fast Blue RR 3350 ⁇ l of succinate buffer (pH 5.4) comprising 0.3 M sucrose 15 ⁇ l 1% H202 and 7 ⁇ l of the substrates (5-40 mM ABTS, 20-150 mM TMB, 0.025 mM of Fast Blue RR, 10-50 mM 4- Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid and 10-20 mM Guaiacol) were added.
  • TMB (3, 3′, 5, 5′ -Tetramethylbenzidine) is firstly dissolved in N, N- Methylformamide, Fast Blue RR is dissolved in ethanol, while ABTS can be dissolved in water and 4- Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid is dissolved in DMSO. Guaiacol. 100 ⁇ l of the solutions are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • a volume between 1 and 7 pL of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 4-6 pL and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to blue (TMB or green (ABTS), respectively and to brown to red (4-Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid and Guaiacol) Mixtures containing non infected samples will not change colour
  • Infected Sputum samples of (A, B, C) and non infected sputum samples (D, E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA containing the different substrates. Visual inspection of the samples after 5 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to blue in case of TMB only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Example 38 Myeloperoxidase Based Test - Cellulose Based System
  • test system of Whatman-Filterpapier incubated with the different MPO substrates is then incubated with 1 -5 ⁇ l preferentially 2 ⁇ l sputum sample and incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change of the filterpaper to blue, green or brown-red. Non infected sputum samples will not change colour.
  • infected samples (A, B) and non infected samples (C, D) were taken and placed into the diagnostic system described in 1C containing the substrates TMB, ABTS, Fast Blue RR, Guaiacol and 4A3Mba. Visual inspection of the samples after 5 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to brown (4A3Mba) in case of for infected samples A, B.
  • Example 39 Phospholipase A2 Based Test - Liquid System
  • 4-Nitro-3-octanoylbenzoic acid as Phospholipase A2 - substrate was used.
  • 4-Nitro-3-octanoylbenzoic acid (1.7 mM) is dissolved in assay buffer containing 50 mM Tris/HCl buffer pH 7.2, 150 mM KCL and 10 mM CaC12. 190 ⁇ l of the buffer are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • a volume between 5 and 12 ⁇ L ⁇ o ⁇ sputum wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 ⁇ l and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to yellow.
  • Infected sputum samples (A, B) and non infected samples (E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA. Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Example 40 Catalase Based Test - Liquid System
  • Purpald as substrate for catalase was used. Purpalt is dissolved in water (50-100 mM?). 200 ⁇ l of substrate solution are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • a volume between 5 and 12 ⁇ L of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 ⁇ l and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to dark violet.
  • Infected wound fluid samples A, B, C
  • non-infected samples D, E, F
  • IA Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to violet only for infected sputum samples A, B, and C.
  • Example 41 Lysozyme Based Test - Liquid System
  • Micrococcus lysodeikticus pep- tidoglycan is suspended in 15 ml 0.1 M KH2PO4 buffer (pH 7.0) . Preferentially, an amount between 8 and 10 mg is suspended. 290 ⁇ L of this solution is pipetted into a transparent microtiterplate.
  • a volume of 10 ⁇ L of sputum is added to the test system and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at 37° C. for 15 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a decrease in turbidity. Mixtures containing non infected samples will not change.

Abstract

The disclosed technology relates to chemical entities for the detection of wounds, e.g., chronic wounds or infected wounds, including compositions, substrates, kits, dressing materials, and articles, and systems containing such compounds. The disclosed technology further relates to methods of using these compositions, kits and systems in diagnostic assays, and in the diagnosis and/or detection of chronic or infected wounds based on enzymatic action on specific moieties and/or reaction sites. Additional disclosure relates to methods of characterizing wounds based on expression of a plurality of markers and using such information to treat, manage, and follow-up patients suffering from chronic or infected wounds.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS AND DISCLOSURE
  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 62/315,546, filed Mar. 30, 2016, and U.S. 62/315,556, filed Mar. 30, 2016, which disclosures are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties and made a part hereof.
  • The Sequence Listing associated with this application, which is separate part of the disclosure, includes the nucleotide and/or amino acid sequences and associated information using the symbols and format in accordance with the requirements of 37 CFR 1.821 - 1.825. The Sequence Listing is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. The Sequence Listing includes no new matter. The name of the ASCII text file which includes the Sequence Listing is Sequence_Listing_CVT05_40137 - Sequence Listing. The date of creation is Oct. 29, 2020. The size of the file is 3 KB.
    • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • Embodiments described herein generally relate to wound healing, and in particular to compositions and methods for the detection and treatment of wounds.
    • BACKGROUND
  • In mammals, dermal injury triggers an organized complex cascade of cellular and biochemical events that result in a healed wound. Wound healing is a complex dynamic process that results in the restoration of anatomic continuity and function: an ideally healed wound is one that has returned to normal anatomic structure, function, and appearance. A typical wound heals via a model consisting of four stages - ‘exudative’ phase, proliferative phase, reparative phase and epithelial maturation (Hatz et al., Wound Healing and Wound Management, Springer- Verlag, Munich, 1994) or hemostatic, inflammatory, proliferative and remodeling phase (Nwomeh et al., Clin. Plast. Surg. 1998, 25, 341). The inflammatory phase is particularly important to the wound healing process, wherein biochemical reactions at the wound situs facilitate healing but also cause tissue breakdown due to production of excess proteases.
  • Infection of the wound results in either a slower, or an arrested healing process. For example, pathogens in a wound can produce toxins (e.g., Clostridium species), generate noxious metabolites like ammonia that raise pH (e.g., Proteus species), activate or produce tissue lytic enzymes like proteases, or promote tissue invasion, thereby leading to an increase in the size or seriousness of the wound. In a worst case, pathogens can leave the wound and cause sepsis.
  • In order to keep the chronicity of wounds in check, a variety of assessment techniques and/or tools are employed in the clinical and veterinary setting. Current methods of assessing an infected wound are based primarily on assaying for a variety of parameters associated with the wound. For instance, a wound may be assessed visually, length and depth measurements may be taken, digital photography may be used where available to track the visual condition and size of a wound (Krasner et al., supra). In clinical practice, diagnosis of infection is based on measurement of secondary parameters, such as, odor, presence of local pain, heat, swelling, discharge, and redness Many of these clinical indicators, such as inflammation and discharge have a low predictive value of infection in wounds. In other instances, the number(s) and type(s) of pathogenic flora at the wound situs may be determined using laboratory and/or clinical diagnostic procedures. Swabbing of a wound followed by microbiology testing in the hospital laboratory is an option for confirmation of bacterial colonization and identification of the strains associated with infection, thus allowing for the prescription of correct antibiotic course. However, this process is time consuming and labor intensive. Delay in diagnosis of infection can delay the administration of antibiotics and may increase the risk of developing sepsis.
  • One of the biggest drawbacks associated with existing clinical diagnostics is a lag associated with the onset of infection and the timing of detection. For instance, positive identification of infection using swabbing procedures often depends on attainment of a “critical mass” of microorganisms at the wound site and so early detection cannot be made until a detectable level is reached. Also, the swabs may be contaminated with the flora of the surrounding tissue, thereby complicating the diagnostic procedure. Other drawbacks include, e.g., sampling errors, delays in transport of the swabs, errors in analytical procedures, and/or errors in reporting. See, the review by Bowler et al., Clin Microbiol Rev. 14(2): 244-269, 2001.
  • There is therefore an imminent but unmet need for diagnostic reagents and methods that enable early diagnosis of clinical infection, preferably, which permit clinical diagnosis prior to manifestation of clinical symptoms of infection. There is also a need for compositions and methods that would assist in predicting clinical infection of a wound prior to the manifestation of clinical symptoms. Such a prognostic aid would allow early intervention with suitable treatment (e.g., antimicrobial treatment) before the wound is exacerbated and surgery or other drastic intervention is required to prevent further infection. Additionally, if clinicians could respond to wound infection as early as possible, the infection could also be treated with minimal antibiotic usage. This would reduce the need for hospitalization and would reduce the risk of secondary infections, e.g., as a result of contact with other diseased subjects.
    • SUMMARY
  • The technology disclosed herein provides for compositions and methods of detecting infected and/or chronic wounds. The disclosed technology improves upon exiting assays by: increasing the sensitivity, precision and specificity of detection of infected wounds; providing for the ability of qualitative and quantitative measurements; and, increasing the speed of detection of infected wounds in situ and in real-time. The assays and methods described herein are partly based on the use of specific reagents that detect biomarkers and/or probes which are present in infected or chronic wounds. The detection process may involve use of reagents that are specific to the markers present in infected wounds but not non-infected or non-chronic wounds and the detection step may involve qualitative or quantitative measurements of the signal(s) that are generated when the probe is acted upon by the marker. In embodiments wherein the detection method involves detection of enzymes present in wounds, the probes comprise modified enzyme substrates that are specific to the enzyme, which generate signals that may be optionally amplified. This greatly improves efficiency and specificity of detection. Moreover, a plurality of detection probes, each specific for one or more targets, e.g., enzymes that are specific to the wounds, may be employed. This greatly helps to maximize both efficiency and accuracy of diagnostic assays while minimizing the incidence of false positives (e.g., due non-specific interactions and/or target redundancy). Furthermore, the experimental results disclosed herein confirm that the novel probes and the assay techniques based thereon are capable of detecting and characterizing various types of wounds. Finally, the reagents of the disclosed technology may be used together with therapeutic molecules such as antibiotics, antifungal agents, etc. to monitor and evaluate treatment and management of chronic wounds.
  • Embodiments described herein are based, in part, on the discovery that cells of the immune system, including enzymes generated thereby, may serve as markers in the early diagnosis of wounds. These cells, e.g., neutrophils, are recruited at the wound situs to combat infection, do so by engulfing bacteria (and other pathogens) and/or neutralizing them with enzymes. Some enzymes are specific towards proteins (e.g., elastase, cathepsin G), others are specific towards cell wall components (e.g., lysozyme) and yet others mediate protein denaturation (e.g., NADPH oxidase, xanthine oxidase, myeloperoxidase (MPO) and other peroxidases). These cells, e.g., neutrophils, are generally only short-lived and when they lyse in the area of the infection, they release the contents of their lysosomes including the enzymes, which can then be detected to provide a reliable measurement of the status of the wound.
  • Accordingly, various embodiments described herein utilize the detection of enzyme markers, which are indicative of the presence of myeloid cells, and neutrophils in particular, in a biological sample of interest, for example, wound tissue. Increased level or activity of such enzymes in the wound fluid, therefore, corresponds to a heightened bacterial challenge and a manifestation of disturbed host/bacteria equilibrium in favor of the invasive bacteria.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I), wherein the anchor A is covalently associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form a recognition site S.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I), wherein the anchor A is covalently associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form a recognition site S, and wherein the recognition site (S) is specific for a wound-specific hydrolase. Under this embodiment, the hydrolase is a glycosidase or a protease. Particularly under this embodiment, the protease is elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a polysaccharide, a cellulose, a polyacrylate, a polyethyleneimine, a polyacrylamide, a peptidoglycan, or a chitosan, or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a monomer of chitosan comprising D-glucosamine or N-acetyl-D-glucosamine, an oligomer thereof, or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises at least two units of D-glucosamine, N-acetyl -D-glucosamine or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, chitosan oligosaccharide, carboxymethyl chitosan, or hydroxyalkyl chitosan or a derivative thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, wherein the acetylated chitosan comprises a degree of acetylation (DA) between about 40% to about 90%.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, wherein the acetylated chitosan comprises a degree of acetylation (DA) of greater than 50%.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, wherein the chitosan is halogenated.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor; and I is an indicator region, wherein the anchor A comprises a chitosan compound or a derivative thereof selected from the group consisting of chitosan, N-acetyl chitosan; oligo-p-D-1,4-glucosamine; acetyl-D- glucopyranoside; N-Acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc); glucosamine dimer (GlcNAc)2; acetyl- chitosan; chitobiose octaacetate; a chitooligomer comprising the structure (GlcNAc)n wherein n=4, 5, or 6; a chitooligosaccharide; 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside; 2-deoxy-3,4,6- tri-O-acetyl-D-glucopyranoside; an oligomer thereof; or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor and the conjugate is a substrate for a glycosidase.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor and the conjugate is a substrate for a glycosidase.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor and the conjugate is a substrate for lysozyme.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) or a motif therein is conjugated to the anchor via a glycosidic bond at the la- carbon of chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, or a derivative thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) further comprises a dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group or a dye containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) further comprises a dye which is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16 or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) further comprises a dye which is reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19, or reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator (I) comprises a detectable label selected from the group consisting of a luminescent molecule, a chemiluminescent molecule, a fluorochrome, a fluorescent quenching agent, a lipid, a colored molecule, a radioisotope, a scintillant, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, an antibody or a fragment thereof, a polyhistidine, Ni2+, a Flag tag, a myc tag, a heavy metal, and an enzyme.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region and the anchor is directly conjugated to the indicator via a glycosidic linkage.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region and the anchor is directly conjugated to the indicator via a glycosidic linkage, wherein the anchor comprises a compound selected from the group consisting of chitosan, N-acetyl chitosan; oligo- P-D-1,4-glucosamine; acetyl -D-glucopyranoside; N-Acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc); glucosamine dimer (GlcNAc)2; acetyl-chitosan; chitobiose octaacetate; a chitooligomer comprising the structure (GlcNAc)n wherein n=4, 5, or 6; a chitooligosaccharide; 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside; 2-deoxy-3,4,6-tri-0-acetyl -D-glucopyranoside; or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region and the anchor is directly conjugated to the indicator via a glycosidic linkage, wherein the indicator is selected from the group consisting of reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region and the anchor is directly conjugated to the indicator via a glycosidic linkage, wherein the anchor comprises a compound selected from the group consisting of chitosan, N-acetyl chitosan; oligo- β-D-1,4-glucosamine; acetyl -D-glucopyranoside; N-Acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc); glucosamine dimer (GlcNAc)2; acetyl-chitosan; chitobiose octaacetate; a chitooligomer comprising the structure (GlcNAc)n wherein n=4, 5, or 6; a chitooligosaccharide; 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside; 2-deoxy-3,4,6-tri-0-acetyl -D-glucopyranoside; or a combination thereof; and wherein the indicator is selected from the group consisting of reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I (Trichoderma reesei) or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase {Alcaligenes faecalis) or a chimeric variant thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I {Trichoderma reesei) or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase {Alcaligenes faecalis) or a chimeric variant thereof, wherein the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof or polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I {Trichoderma reesei) or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase {Alcaligenes faecalis) or a chimeric variant thereof, wherein the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof or polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I {Trichoderma reesei) or a chimeric variant thereof and the anchor comprises cellulose or a derivative thereof, , wherein the indicator is hydrophilically associated with the anchor.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising a compound with the structure A-I (Formula I) wherein, A is an anchor and I is an indicator region, wherein the indicator comprises Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase {Alcaligenes faecalis) and the anchor comprises polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof, wherein the indicator is hydrophobically associated with the anchor.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) gene, a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof. Particularly, under this embodiment, the spacer sequence encodes a hexahistidine (His6) tag [SEQ ID NO: 11.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence. Particularly, under this embodiment, the elasubl sequence is located subsequent to the enterokinase cleavage site. Especially under this embodiment, the elasubl sequence encodes for functional amino acids selected from the group consisting of cysteine, lysine, arginine, glutamine, asparagine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, serine, threonine or tyrosine.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala- Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and & Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and & Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a host cell comprising a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites. Particularly under this embodiment, the host cell is a bacterial cell or an insect cell or a mammalian cell.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a host cell comprising a vector comprising an expression control sequence and a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites. Particularly under this embodiment, the host cell is a bacterial cell or an insect cell or a mammalian cell.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method of making the protein encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding (a) a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof; (b) a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag; (c) an enterokinase cleavage site or a portion thereof; (d) an elasubl sequence subsequent to the enterokinase cleavage site; (e) a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence; and (f) an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites in the elasubl sequence; comprising culturing a host cell comprising the chimeric construct under conditions sufficient to induce expression of the chimeric construct and obtaining the chimeric protein from the cell culture; and optionally purifying the construct by His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 11 affinity purification.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method of making the protein encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding (a) a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof; (b) a spacer sequence encoding a histidine-tag; (c) an enterokinase cleavage site or a portion thereof; (d) an elasubl sequence subsequent to the enterokinase cleavage site; (e) a hydrophobic Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence; and (f) an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites in the elasub 1 sequence; comprising culturing a host cell comprising the chimeric construct under conditions sufficient to induce expression of the chimeric construct and obtaining the chimeric protein from the cell culture; and optionally purifying the construct by His-tag affinity purification.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a hydrophilic binding module (CBM) directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites. Under this embodiment, provided herein is a composition comprising the CBM sequence containing polypeptide (“CBM polypeptide”) and a dye or a label. Further provided herein under this embodiment is a chemical entity comprising an anchor and an indicator region comprising the composition comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label. Especially under this embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising an anchor which is cellulose or a derivative thereof and the indicator region comprising the composition comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide encoded by a chimeric construct comprising polynucleotide sequences encoding a trxA (thioredoxin) or a portion thereof, a spacer sequence encoding a poly-histidine-tag and an enterokinase cleavage site, or a portion thereof and an enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 21 and an elasubl sequence and a Alcatigenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (PDM) sequence directly downstream to the elasubl sequence, wherein the elasubl sequence comprises nucleic acids encoding an HLE recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 31 or CatG recognition site (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 41 or both HLE and CatG recognition sites. Under this embodiment, provided herein is a composition comprising the PDM sequence containing polypeptide (“PDM polypeptide”) and a dye or a label. Further provided herein under this embodiment is a chemical entity comprising an anchor and an indicator region comprising the composition comprising the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label. Especially under this embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising an anchor which is polyethylene terephthalate or a derivative thereof and the indicator region comprising the composition comprising the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method for the determining the presence or absence of an enzyme selected from the group consisting of HLE and CatG in a biological sample, comprising contacting the biological sample with the composition containing the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method for the determining the presence or absence of an enzyme selected from the group consisting of HLE and CatG in a biological sample, comprising contacting the biological sample with the composition containing the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method for diagnosing an infected or a chronic wound, comprising, contacting the wound with the composition containing the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label. Under this embodiment, the wound is present in a tissue, e.g., skin tissue, of a subject in need of such diagnosis, e.g., a human subject. Particularly under this embodiment, the detection is made in situ. Especially under this embodiment, the diagnosis can be at multiple time points, based on visual and/or electronic valuation of the dye.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method for diagnosing an infected or a chronic wound, comprising, contacting the wound with the composition containing the PDM polypeptide and the dye/label or a chemical entity comprising the anchor and the indicator comprising the CBM polypeptide and the dye/label; and detecting the label. Under this embodiment, the wound is present in a tissue, e.g., skin tissue, of a subject in need of such diagnosis, e.g., a human subject. Particularly under this embodiment, the detection is made in situ. Further, under this embodiment, the diagnosis can be at multiple time points, based on visual and/or electronic valuation of the dye.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method for treating an infected or a chronic wound, comprising, contacting the wound with any of the foregoing compositions, wherein the composition comprises at least one antibiotic and optionally together with a healing agent. Under this embodiment, the wound to be treated is present in a tissue, e.g., skin tissue, of a subject in need of such diagnosis, e.g., a human subject. Further, under this embodiment, the wound is treated in situ and may be accompanied by pre-treatment or post-treatment diagnosis.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 1 and 50, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 1 and 10, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 1 and 6, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label, wherein each of the peptides comprising the sequence XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V F/A)Xy-L-Z , are each, individually, labile to elastase. Under this embodiment, each of the polypeptides may be optionally protected with an amine protecting group, e.g., an amine protection group which is fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a composition comprising a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label, and a carrier.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising an anchor region (A) and an indicator region (I) comprising a polypeptide comprising the sequence set forth in (a) XyAAPXy-Z , (b) XyAAPXy-L-Z , (c) XyAAP(V/F/A)X Z , or (d) XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein each X is independently any amino acid, y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, L is a linking moiety, and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X N4N3N2N -Z , or (b) X N4N3N2N -E-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine;N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) X N4N3N2N¾-Z, or (b) XyN4N3N2N1XY-L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 1 to 3; N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine;N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) XyN4N3N2N1Xy -Z , or (b) XyN4N3N2N1XY-L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine;N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label, wherein the polypeptides comprising the sequence (a) XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z , or (b) XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z, are each, individually, labile to cathepsin G. Under this embodiment, each of the polypeptides may be optionally protected with an amine protecting group, e.g., an amine protection group which is fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a composition comprising a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) XyN^N^Xy-Z , or (b) XyN^N^Xy-L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine;N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label and a carrier.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity comprising an anchor region (A) and an indicator region (I) comprising a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in (a) XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z, or (b) XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein X is each, independently any amino acid; y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6; N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine; N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine; N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine; N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; L is a linking moiety; and Z comprises a detectable label.
  • It is understood that other embodiments and configurations of the subject technology will become readily apparent to those skilled in the art from the following detailed description, wherein various configurations of the subject technology are shown and described by way of example or illustration. As will be realized, the subject technology is capable of other and different configurations and its several details are capable of modification in various other respects, all without departing from the scope of the subject technology. Accordingly, the figures and detailed description are to be regarded as illustrative in nature and not as restrictive.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • To understand the present disclosure, it will now be described by way of example, with reference to the accompanying figures in which embodiments and examples of the disclosures are illustrated and, together with the descriptions below, serve to explain the principles of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 : Infrared spectrum of Example 2. Chitosan derivatives with varying degree of acetylation (DA) were produced, but only material with a DA of 48% was further used.
  • FIG. 2 : Infrared spectrum and NMR spectrum of Example 2. Chitosan derivatives with varying DA were produced, but only material with a DA of 48% was further used.
  • FIG. 3 : Infrared spectrum of chitooligosaccharides of Example 5.
  • FIG. 4 : Infrared spectrum of chitooligosaccharides of Example 6.
  • FIG. 5 : Time course of dye release from dye conjugated acetyl chitosan when incubated with 5000 units per mL lysozyme.
  • FIG. 6 : (A) Time course of dye release from dye conjugated acetyl chitosan when incubated with 5000 units per mL lysozyme in phosphate buffer when the chitosan has varying concentrations of dye conjugated; (B) Time course of dye release from dye conjugated acetyl chitosan when incubated with 5000 units per mL lysozyme in either phosphate buffer of artificial wound fluid containing 2% protein as BSA.
  • FIG. 7 : Color response of immobilized nitrazine yellow and bromocresol purple of Example 11 varies depending on the pH at which the preparation is dried.
  • FIG. 8 : Comparison of different lysozyme responsive dye releases of different staining degrees.
  • FIG. 9 : Influence of the proportion between reactive dye and PG.
  • FIG. 10 : Elastase responsive dye release.
  • FIG. 11 : Multiple Sequence Alignment of the Various Constructs. Asterisk (*) indicates identity; semi -colon (:) indicates conservative substitution; and period (.) indicates semi-conservative substitution.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Various aspects now will be described more fully hereinafter. Such aspects may, however, be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will be thorough and complete, and will fully convey its scope to those skilled in the art.
  • Throughout this disclosure, various patents, patent applications and publications are referenced. The disclosures of these patents, patent applications and publications in their entireties are incorporated into this disclosure by reference in order to more fully describe the state of the art as known to those skilled therein as of the date of this disclosure. This disclosure will govern in the instance that there is any inconsistency between the patents, patent applications and publications cited and this disclosure.
    • I. Definitions
  • Where a range of values is provided, it is intended that each intervening value between the upper and lower limit of that range and any other stated or intervening value in that stated range is encompassed within the disclosure. For example, if a range of 1 µm to 8 µm is stated, it is intended that 2 µm, 3 µm, 4 µm, 5 µm, 6 µm, and 7 µm are also explicitly disclosed, as well as the range of values greater than or equal to 1 µπɩ and the range of values less than or equal to 8 µm.
  • The singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to a “polymer” includes a single polymer as well as two or more of the same or different polymers, reference to an “excipient” includes a single excipient as well as two or more of the same or different excipients, and the like.
  • The word “about” when immediately preceding a numerical value means a range of plus or minus 10% of that value, e.g., “about 50” means 45 to 55, “about 25,000” means 22,500 to 27,500, etc., unless the context of the disclosure indicates otherwise, or is inconsistent with such an interpretation. For example in a list of numerical values such as “about 49, about 50, about 55, “about 50” means a range extending to less than half the interval(s) between the preceding and subsequent values, e.g., more than 49.5 to less than 52.5. Furthermore, the phrases “less than about” a value or “greater than about” a value should be understood in view of the definition of the term “about” provided herein.
  • “Substantially” or “essentially” means nearly totally or completely, for instance, 80%-95% or greater of some given quantity, e.g., at least 85%, at least 87%, at least 88%, at least 89%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, at least 99.9%, or more % by weight or volume or any other parameter being measured. “Substantially free” means nearly totally or completely absent of some given quantity such as being present at a level of less than about 1% to about 20% of some given quantity, e.g., less than 10%, less than 9%, less than 8%, less than 7%, less than 6%, less than 5%, less than 4%, less than 3%, less than 2%, less than 1%, less than 0.5%), less than 0.1%, or less % by weight or volume or any other parameter being measured. In some embodiments, “substantially free” means presence at a level of less than or equal to 1 -5% by weight of the pharmaceutical composition.
    • II. Overview
  • Provided herein are compositions and systems for the therapy and diagnosis of wounds and wound management, wherein the compositions, when in use, indicate the presence of elevated enzyme levels in a wound in situ.
  • As used herein, a “wound” refers to physical disruption of the continuity or integrity of tissue structure. “Wound healing” refers to the restoration of tissue integrity. It will be understood that this can refer to a partial or a full restoration of tissue integrity. Treatment of a wound thus refers to the promotion, improvement, progression, acceleration, or otherwise advancement of one or more stages or processes associated with the wound healing process.
  • The wound may be acute or chronic. Chronic wounds, including pressure sores, venous leg ulcers and diabetic foot ulcers, can simply be described as wounds that fail to heal. Whilst the exact molecular pathogenesis of chronic wounds is not fully understood, it is acknowledged to be multi -factorial. As the normal responses of resident and migratory cells during acute injury become impaired, these wounds are characterized by a prolonged inflammatory response, defective wound extracellular matrix (ECM) remodeling and a failure of re-epithelialization.
  • The wound may be any internal wound, e.g., where the external structural integrity of the skin is maintained, such as in bruising or internal ulceration, or external wounds, particularly cutaneous wounds, and consequently the tissue may be any internal or external bodily tissue. In one embodiment the tissue is skin (such as human skin), i.e. the wound is a cutaneous wound, such as a dermal or epidermal wound.
  • The human skin is composed of two distinct layers, the epidermis and the dermis, below which lies the subcutaneous tissue. The primary functions of the skin are to provide protection to the internal organs and tissues from external trauma and pathogenic infection, sensation and thermoregulation. The skin tissue of most mammals is structured similarly.
  • The outermost layer of skin, the epidermis, is approximately 0.04 mm thick, is avascular, is comprised of four cell types (keratinocytes, melanocytes, Langerhans cells, and Merkel cells), and is stratified into several epithelial cell layers. The inner-most epithelial layer of the epidermis is the basement membrane, which is in direct contact with, and anchors the epidermis to, the dermis. All epithelial cell division occurring in skin takes place at the basement membrane. After cell division, the epithelial cells migrate towards the outer surface of the epidermis. During this migration, the cells undergo a process known as keratinization, whereby nuclei are lost and the cells are transformed into tough, flat, resistant non-living cells. Migration is completed when the cells reach the outermost epidermal structure, the stratum corneum, a dry, waterproof squamous cell layer which helps to prevent desiccation of the underlying tissue. This layer of dead epithelial cells is continuously being sloughed off and replaced by keratinized cells moving to the surface from the basement membrane. Because the epidermal epithelium is avascular, the basement membrane is dependent upon the dermis for its nutrient supply.
  • The dermis is a highly vascularized tissue layer supplying nutrients to the epidermis. In addition, the dermis contains nerve endings, lymphatics, collagen protein, and connective tissue. The dermis is approximately 0.5 mm thick and is composed predominantly of fibroblasts and macrophages. These cell types are largely responsible for the production and maintenance of collagen, the protein found in all animal connective tissue, including the skin. Collagen is primarily responsible for the skin’s resilient, elastic nature. The subcutaneous tissue, found beneath the collagen-rich dermis, provides for skin mobility, insulation, calorie storage, and blood to the tissues above it.
  • Wounds can be classified in one of two general categories, partial thickness wounds or full thickness wounds. A partial thickness wound is limited to the epidermis and superficial dermis with no damage to the dermal blood vessels. A full thickness wound involves disruption of the dermis and extends to deeper tissue layers, involving disruption of the dermal blood vessels. The healing of the partial thickness wound occurs by simple regeneration of epithelial tissue. Wound healing in full thickness wounds is more complex. Cutaneous wounds contemplated herein may be either partial thickness or full thickness wounds.
  • Wounds contemplated herein include cuts and lacerations, surgical incisions or wounds, punctures, grazes, scratches, compression wounds, abrasions, friction wounds (e.g., nappy rash, friction blisters), decubitus ulcers (e.g., pressure or bed sores); thermal effect wounds (burns from cold and heat sources, either directly or through conduction, convection, or radiation, and electrical sources), chemical wounds (e.g. acid or alkali burns) or pathogenic infections (e.g., viral, bacterial or fungal) including open or intact boils, skin eruptions, blemishes and acne, ulcers, chronic wounds, (including diabetic-associated wounds such as lower leg and foot ulcers, venous leg ulcers and pressure sores), skin graft/transplant donor and recipient sites, immune response conditions, e.g., psoriasis and eczema, stomach or intestinal ulcers, oral wounds, including a ulcers of the mouth, damaged cartilage or bone, amputation wounds and corneal lesions.
    • Chemical Entities and Compositions Thereof
  • Embodiments described herein provide chemical entities, which may be used to diagnose and/or treat chronic wounds. The chemical entities and compositions thereof, as described herein, are used in methods to detect the level of one or more enzymes in a mammalian wound. In some embodiments, the chemical entities and compositions thereof, as described herein, are used in methods to diagnose a chronic wound in a mammal. In some embodiments, the chemical entities and compositions thereof described herein are used in methods to diagnose an infected wound in a mammal. In other embodiments, the chemical entities and compositions thereof described herein are used in methods to treat a wound in a mammal. In further embodiments, the chemical entities and compositions thereof described herein are used in methods to treat an infected or a chronic wound in a mammal.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a chemical entity capable of detecting enzyme activity from a body fluid, the chemical entity comprising: an anchor region (A) and an indicator region (I). Under this embodiment, the chemical entity has a basic chemical structure A-I (Formula I), wherein A is an anchor region and I is an indicator region.
  • In some embodiments, the anchor region (A) is associated with the indicator region (I) via an enzyme recognition site (S). Under this embodiment, the enzyme recognition site is a structure or a motif that allows binding to an enzyme.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme recognition site (S) is naturally present in the anchor region. In another embodiment, the enzyme recognition site (S) is introduced in the anchor region via chemical modification. Alternately, the enzyme recognition site (S) may be naturally present in the indicator region (I) or synthetically introduced in the indicator region (I) via one or more chemical modifications.
  • In one embodiment, the chemical entity of Formula I comprises an anchor (A) which is associated with the indicator (I), either covalently or non-covalently. Particularly, the association between the anchor region (A) and the indicator region (I) is mediated via a covalent interaction. As is understood in the art, covalent bonds involve sharing of electrons between the bonded atoms. In contrast, non-covalent bonds may include, for example, ionic interactions, electrostatic interactions, hydrogen bonding interactions, physiochemical interactions, van der Waal forces, Lewis-acid/Lewis-base interactions, or combinations thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the anchor A is associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form the recognition site S. In another embodiment, the anchor A is associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction that is not a part of the recognition site S.
  • In some embodiments, the chemical entity further comprises an enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region (R). In one embodiment, the reactive region (R) is a part of the anchor region. In another embodiment, the reactive region (R) is a part of the indicator region (I). Still further, the reactive region (R) is a part of the enzyme recognition site (S).
  • In one embodiment, the reactive region (R) interacts with one or more target enzymes selected from the group consisting of elastase, lysozyme, cathepsin G, and myeloperoxidase, or a combination thereof.
    • Anchor Region (A)
  • In some embodiments of the chemical entity of Formula I, the anchor region comprises a compound which is a polysaccharide, cellulose, polyacrylate, polyethyleneimine, polyacrylamide, peptidoglycan, or chitosan, or a monomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the anchor A comprises a compound which is a chitosan or a monomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof. Non-covalent bonds may include, for example, ionic interactions, electrostatic interactions, hydrogen bonding inetyl-D-glucosamine (acetylated unit). Accordingly, chitosan monomer may comprise D-glucosamine and N-acetyl-D-glucosamine. In another embodiment, the chitosan may comprise at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, or more units of D-glucosamine or N-acetyl-D-glucosamine or a combination thereof. Chitosan, including, shorter fragments thereof, is generally manufactured by treating chitin with an alkaline substance, e.g., sodium hydroxide, and optionally hydrolyzing the glycosidic linkages between the individual monomer units.
  • In another embodiment, the anchor A comprises a chitosan derivative. Example chitosan or chitosan derivatives include chitosan salts, water-soluble chitosan, water-soluble, randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, chitosan oligosaccharide, carboxymethyl chitosan, and hydroxyalkyl chitosan. The hydroxyalkyl substituents of the hydroxyalkyl, chitosans and the carboxym ethyl substituents of the carboxy methyl chitosans could be attached to any of the pendant nitrogen or oxygen groups on the chitin or chitosan ring subunit. Representative hydroxyalkyl chitosans include but are not limited to, hydroxyethyl chitosan (also known as glycol chitosan), hydroxypropyl chitosan, dihydroxypropyl chitosan, hydroxybutyl chitosan and dihydroxybutyl chitosan.
  • In one embodiment, the chitosan derivative is a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan. The acetylated chitosan derivatives are generally defined by a degree of acetylation or degree of acetylation. As is understood in the art, the degree of acetylation (DA) represents the proportion of N-acetyl-d-glucosamine units with respect to the total number of units in the chitosan molecule. See, Chatelet et al., Biomaterials, 22(3):261-8, 2001. By the term “degree of deacetylation” is meant the percentage of free amino groups on the water soluble, chitosan or chitosan derivative. The percent of N-acetylation can be calculated from the deacetylation value. The terms N-acetylation or O-acetylation are also referred to as the degree of substitution with C(0)CH3 on either N or O. As is understood in the art, a chitosan derivative having a DA value greater than 50% N-acetylation is sometimes described as a chitin. However, the term “chitosan” is used throughout the disclosure herein to include chitosans and, if the N-acetylation is greater than 50%, to include chitins. See, U.S. Pat. No. 7,683,039.
  • In one embodiment, the chitosan derivative has a DA of at least about 40%, about 41%, about 42%, about 43%, about 44%, about 44%, about 45%, about 46%, about 47%, about 48%, about 49%, about 50%, about 51%, about 52%, about 53%, about 54%, about 55%, about 56%, about 57%, about 58%, about 59%, about 60%, about 61%, about 62%, about 63%, about 64%, about 65%, about 66%, about 67%, about 68%, about 69%, about 70%, about 71%, about 72%, about 73%, about 74%, about 75%, about 76%, about 77%, about 78%, about 79%, about 80%, about 81%, about 82%, about 83%, about 84%, about 85%, about 86%, about 87%, about 88%, about 89%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or greater %, e.g., between about 45% to 95%, particularly between about 60% to about 80%. Particularly, the chitosan is at least 48% deacetylated, especially at least 75% deacetylated.
  • In one embodiment, “chitosan derivative” as used herein includes salts, amides, esters, enol ethers, enol esters, acetals, ketals, orthoesters, hemiacetals, hemiketals, acids, bases, solvates, hydrates or prodrugs of the chitosan. Such derivatives may be readily prepared by those of skill in this art using known methods for such derivatization. In certain embodiments, the derivatives may be administered to animals or humans without substantial toxic effects and either are pharmaceutically active or are prodrugs. Representative types of chitosan derivatives are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 9,012,429; 5,773,608; and 3,911,116.
  • In another embodiment, the derivative is a salt of the polymeric compound, e.g., salts of Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, or Ba2+, preferably Na+, K+, Mg2+, Ca +. Salts of chitin and chitosan, such as sodium or calcium salts, are known in the art. See, U.S. Pat. No. 5,599,916.
  • In some embodiments, the derivative anchor compound is a halogenated anchor compound, e.g., halogenated polysaccharide, halogenated cellulose, halogenated polyacrylate, halogenated polyethyleneimine, halogenated polyacrylamide, halogenated peptidoglycan, or halogenated chitosan, or a monomer thereof, e.g., halogenated D-glucosamine and/or halogenated N-acetyl -D-glucosamine. The halogen is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, I; particularly, the halogen is CI.
  • In some embodiments, the derivative compound is an isomer of the anchor compound, term “isomer” includes compounds with the same formula but a different arrangement of atoms in the molecule. In embodiments, isomers of the compounds are “tautomers” or “stereoisomers” of the compounds. The term “stereoisomer” refers to compounds that differ in the chirality of one or more stereocenters. Stereoisomers include enantiomers and diastereomers. The term “tautomer” refers to alternate forms of a compound that differ in the position of a proton, such as enol-keto and imine-enamine tautomers, or the tautomeric forms of the anchor compound.
  • In some embodiments, the anchor compound may contain a combination or mixture of one or more of the aforementioned compounds. The term “combination” includes compounds containing more than one component, which may be conjugated or non-conjugated to one another. In one embodiment, the anchor compound comprises a combination of one or more of the aforementioned compounds which are conjugated to each other, e.g., via covalent or non-covalent interaction. As a particular example, the anchor may comprise a combination of chitosan and oxidized cellulose. See, U.S. Pat. Application Publication No. 2014/0045761.
  • In some embodiments, the compounds include mixtures of the aforementioned polymeric compounds. The term “mixture” refers to a mingling together of two or more substances without the occurrence of a reaction by which they would lose their individual properties. For instance, a mixture of compound A and compound B may contain any weight ratio of compound A and compound B, such that the total weight of the mixture would amount to 100%, e.g., 99: 1 weight ratio of compound A/compound B or 1 :99 weight ratio of compound A/compound B. A typical mixture may contain about 2, 3, 4, 5, or more of the aforementioned polymer compounds.
  • In some embodiments, the anchor A further comprises an ionic chemical group, a material with a hydrophilic moiety, or a material with a hydrophobic moiety, e.g., an aliphatic chain or an aliphatic alcohol. In embodiments wherein the anchor comprises an ionic chemical group, the ionic chemical group may be positively or negatively charged. In some embodiments, the anchor region comprises a reactive moiety for covalent attachment to a support material such as a photoactive phenylazide or an epoxide group. See, U.S. Pat. Application Publication No. 2016/0159777.
  • Methods of introducing reactive groups into chitosan and/or other glycosidic compounds such as polysaccharide, cellulose, glycans, etc., are known in the art. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 7,125,968 discloses functionalized chitosan derivatives, which comprise a chitin/chitosan and incorporated therein at least one of a carbohydrate, a photo-reactive functional group, an amphipathic group, e.g., a polyoxyethylene alkyl ether, and a glycosaminoglycan. Such techniques can be used to derivatize types of other anchor compounds.
  • Particularly, the anchor region A comprises chitosan, N-acetyl chitosan; oligo-β-D- 1,4-glucosamine; acetyl -D-glucopyranoside; N-Acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc); glucosamine dimer (GlcNAc)2; acetyl-chitosan; chitobiose octaacetate; a chitooligomer comprising the structure (GlcNAc)n wherein n=4, 5, or 6; a chitooligosaccharide; 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside; 2-deoxy-3,4,6-tri-0-acetyl -D-glucopyranoside; or a combination thereof.
    • Indicators
  • In some embodiments, the chemical entities comprise one or more indicators, e.g., at least 1, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, or more of indicators. Such compositions may include, for example, a plurality of substrates conjugated to the same gel polymer or different gel polymers.
  • In certain embodiments, the indicators are labeled. The term “label,” as used herein, refers to any substance attached to an epitope binding agent, or other substrate material, in which the substance is detectable by a detection method. Non-limiting examples of suitable labels include luminescent molecules, chemiluminescent molecules, fluorochromes, fluorescent quenching agents, colored molecules, radioisotopes, scintillants, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, antibodies or fragments thereof, polyhistidine, Ni2+, Flag tags, myc tags, heavy metals, and enzymes (including alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase, and luciferase). Methods for attaching the labels to the anchor compounds are described in the Examples.
  • In certain embodiments, the indicators are labeled with a label which is a detectable label. A detectable label is a moiety, the presence of which can be ascertained directly or indirectly. Generally, detection of the label involves the creation of a detectable signal such as for example an emission of energy. The label may be of a chemical, peptide or nucleic acid nature although it is not so limited. The nature of label used will depend on a variety of factors, including the nature of the analysis being conducted, the type of the energy source and detector used and the type of polymer, analyte, probe and primary and secondary analyte-specific binding partners.
  • In a particular embodiment, the label is sterically and chemically compatible with the constituents to which it is bound, e.g., the anchor region. In particular, the label is of the shape and size that it does not hinder enzyme recognition site (S) and/or enzyme-reactive region (R).
  • In one embodiment, the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a glycosidase. Particularly, the indicator or motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for lysozyme.
  • In another embodiment, the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase (MAO), or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a glycosidase which is lysozyme and a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G or myeloperoxidase (MAO), or a combination thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the indicator (I) or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a peroxidase substrate, an arylamine, an amino phenol, an aminophenyl ether, an indoxyl, a neutral dye, a charged dye, a nanoparticle, or a colloidal gold particle.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a peroxidase substrate. In some embodiments, the peroxidase substrate is selected from p-aminophenol, ABTS (2,2inophenol, ABTS (strate. In some embodiments, acid) diammonium salt), 3,3′-diaminobenzidine, 3,4 diaminobenzoic acid, DCPIP, N,N dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, o-dianisidine, /?-phenylenediamine, 4-chloro-l-naphthol, o-phenylenediamine N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethylisoluminol, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole, 4-aminophthalhydrazide, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 2,2′-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid), indoxyl, indigo, Fast Blue RR, 4-chloro-7-nitrobenzofurazan. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an arylamine. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an amino phenol. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an aminophenol ether. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is an indoxyl. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a neutral dye. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a charged dye. In some embodiments, the charged dye is selected from remazole brilliant blue, toluidine blue, reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, and reactive orange 16, or a hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is remazole brilliant blue, or a hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is toluidine blue. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive black 5, or ahydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive violet 5, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive orange 16, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10. In some embodiments, the dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye appears black.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a reactive dye containing a sulfonyl ethyl -hydrogensulphate-reactive-group. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is remazol brilliant blue. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive violet 5. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive orange 16. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, or reactive violet 5. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5 or remazol brilliant blue.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a nanoparticle. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a colloidal gold particle. In some embodiments, the indicator (I) or a label attached thereto is a charged dye, an indole derivative, or a luminol derivative.
  • Particularly, the indicator or a motif therein attached to the anchor comprises a dye containing a sulfonyl ethyl -hydrogensulphate-reactive-group, e.g., reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, or a combination thereof; or a dye containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group, e.g., reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
    • Anchor-Indicator Conjugates
  • In various enzymes an anchor A is conjugated with the indicator I directly, e.g., via an glycosidic linkage. The anchor portion of the conjugate is selected from the group consisting of, e.g., chitosan, N-acetyl chitosan; oligo 3-D-l,4-glucosamine; acetyl-D-glucopyranoside; N-Acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc); glucosamine dimer (GlcNAc ; acetyl-chitosan; chitobiose octaacetate; a chitooligomer comprising the structure (GlcNAc)n wherein n=4, 5, or 6; a chitooligosaccharide; 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside; 2-deoxy-3,4,6-tri-0-acetyl-D-glucopyranoside; or a combination thereof. Likewise, the indicator is selected from the group consisting of reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16, reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof. A glycosidic linkage is formed between a hydroxyl group of the anchor compound with a reactive group in the indicator compound. In order to mimic the natural substrate of glycosidase, the la-carbon in the sugar backbone of the anchor molecule is involved in the glycosidic linkage.
    • Markers
  • Embodiments described herein may utilize chemical moieties that assay for various biological markers present in a chronic or infected wound. In one embodiment, the marker is a wound- specific marker, which is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of hydrolases, proteases, esterases, and peroxidases.
  • As used herein, a “wound specific enzyme” is an enzyme that is differentially expressed in a wound. By “differential expression” it is meant that the level or the activity of the enzyme is higher or lower in the wound microenvironment compared to other sites, e.g., normal tissue or surrounding tissue. Particularly, differential expression implies higher level of expression or activity of the enzyme in the wound microenvironment compared to normal or unwounded tissue. Differential expression of enzyme may be analyzed by routine means. For example, levels of enzyme in a sample may be analyzed by ELISA assays or other immunoassays. Activities of the enzyme may be analyzed by measuring rates of loss of a substrate and/or rates of formation of the product, e.g., using mass spectroscopy or HPLC. Such techniques are known in the art and are described in the Examples section.
  • In one embodiment, the marker is a hydrolase. As used herein, a “hydrolase” or “hydrolytic enzyme” is an enzyme that catalyzes the hydrolysis of a chemical bond, e.g., esterases and nucleases (break ester bonds); glycolases (break glycosidic linkers); peptidases (break peptide bonds), etc.
  • In one specific embodiment, the wound-specific glycoside hydrolase is lysozyme. Lysozyme (UNIPROT accession Nos. P61626 [human] and P08905 [mouse]) is a glycoside hydrolase and its main function is to destroy the cell walls of bacteria. It hydrolyses the (1→4)-β-linkages between N-acetylmuramic acid and N-acetyl-D-glucosamine residues in peptidoglycan and also between N-acetyl-D glucosamine residues in chitodextrin. The natural substrate for lysozyme is the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls. However, a variety of low molecular mass substrates including murein degradation products as well as synthetic compounds have been used for various photometric, isotopic, and immunological lysozyme assays. Holtje et al, EXS, 75: 105-10, 1996. See also Sigma Catalog Number M5639 and Sigma Catalog Number N8638.
  • In one embodiment, the individual components of the chemical moiety have been adapted for recognition by wound-specific hydrolase, e.g., a wound-specific lysozyme.
  • Alternately or additionally, the individual components of the chemical moiety can be modified for recognition by other wound specific enzymes. In one embodiment, the additional wound specific enzyme is a protease. As used herein, a “wound specific protease” is a protease that is differentially expressed in a wound. By “differential expression” it is meant that the level or the activity of the protease is higher or lower in the wound microenvironment compared to other sites, e.g., normal tissue or surrounding tissue. Particularly, differential expression implies higher level of expression or activity of the protease in the wound microenvironment compared to unwounded tissue. Differential expression of proteases may be analyzed by routine means. For example, levels of proteases in a sample may be analyzed by ELISA assays or other immunoassays. Activities of the proteases may be analyzed by measuring rates of loss of a peptide substrate and/or rates of formation of the product, e.g., using mass spectroscopy or HPLC. Such techniques are known in the art and are described in the Examples section.
  • In one embodiment, the wound-specific protease is cathepsin G (UNIPROT accession Nos. P08311 [human] and P28293 [mouse]), which is one of the three serine proteases of the chymotrypsin family that are stored in the azurophil granules. Cathepsin G-specific substrates have the sequence Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe [SEQ ID NO: 41 or Ala-Ala-Pro-Met [SEQ ID NO: 51 (Sigma Aldrich Catalog Nos. S7388 and M7771).
  • In another embodiment, the wound specific protease is elastase (e.g., human neutrophil elastase or HNE) (UNIPROT accession Nos. P08246 [human] and Q3UP87 [mouse]). HNE is a serine proteinase in the same family as chymotrypsin and has broad substrate specificity. Secreted by neutrophils and macrophages during inflammation, it destroys bacteria and host tissue. In one embodiment, the substrate for detecting HNE has a core sequence Alanine-Alanine-Proline- Valine (AAPV) [SEQ ID NO: 31. In another embodiment, the substrate for HNE is Ala- Pro-Glu-Glu-Ile/[ SEQ ID NO: 6]Met-Arg-Arg-Gln [SEQ ID NO: 7](APEEI MRRQ) (Kasperkiewicz et al., PNAS USA, 111(7): 2518-2523, 2014; Korkmaz et al., Methods Mol Biol, 844: 125-138, 2012).
  • Still in a further embodiment, the wound-specific enzyme is peroxidase, more specifically, a myeloperoxidase (MPO). MPO (UNIPROT accession Nos. P05164 [human] and PI 1247 [mouse]) is a peroxidase found in neutrophil granulocytes. In the presence of hydrogen peroxide (H202) and a halide (most commonly chloride) it produces the antimicrobial substances hypochlorite, singlet oxygen (102), chlorine (C12) and hydroxyl radicals (OH·). MPO can be detected using tetramethylbenzidine or 4-Benzoylamino-2,5-dimethoxyaniline. See, Andrews et al, Anal Biochem, 127(2):346-50, 1982; Klebanoff et al., J. Leukocyte Biol, 11, 598-625, 2005.
    • Enzyme Recognition Site (S)
  • Insofar as embodiments disclosed herein relate to the specific detection of wound-specific markers, disclosed herein are substrates containing enzyme recognition sites (S) for the wound- specific markers. Thus, in one embodiment, the chemical moiety comprises an anchor region A or an indicator (I) comprising a recognition site for a wound-specific enzyme, e.g., an enzyme cleavage site.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme recognition site comprises glycosidic bonds. As used herein, a “glycosidic bond” is formed between the hemiacetal or hemiketal group of a saccharide (or a molecule derived from a saccharide) and the hydroxyl group of some compound such as an alcohol. A substance containing a glycosidic bond is a glycoside. The term “glycoside” is now extended to also cover compounds with bonds formed between hemiacetal (or hemiketal) groups of sugars and several chemical groups other than hydroxyls, such as -SR (thioglycosides), -SeR (selenoglycosides), -NR1R2 (N-glycosides), or even -CR1R2R3 (C-glycosides).
  • In one embodiment, the chemical moieties disclosed herein contain one or more glycosidic bonds which are cleaved by glycolases. In one specific embodiment, the chemical moieties comprise a glycosidic bond linking anchor A and the indicator I, either directly or via another group. Particularly, the anchor A and the indicator I are directly linked via one or more glycosidic bonds, in which case, the chemical entity is cleaved by the glycolase and therefore can be used in detecting the glycolase.
  • In one embodiment, the indicator molecule comprises an enzymatically-cleavable peptide comprising a peptide bond. As used herein, a “peptide bond” is formed by the condensation reaction between two amino acids, wherein the acid moiety of one reacts with the amino moiety of the other to produce a peptide bond (—CO—NH—) between the two amino acids. The individual peptides provide a motif for the recognition by a sequence-specific protease. As used herein, the term “sequence-specific protease” means a protease recognizing a specific sequence of a peptide for its digesting (for example, caspase), and is distinguished from a generic protease (for example, trypsin) that sequentially decomposes a peptide from one end thereof or digest a peptide in a sequence-nonspecific manner. For sequence specificity, the amino acid sequence of the peptide substrate may comprise four or more amino acid (a.a.) residues.
  • As used herein, the term “peptide” includes a natural peptide comprising a linear chain or branched amino acids, peptidomimetics, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Typically, a peptide comprises a plurality of amino acid residues, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, or more amino acid residues which are bonded to each other via covalent bonds, e.g., a peptide bond. “Amino acid residue” means the individual amino acid units incorporated into the peptides of the disclosure. As used herein, the term “amino acid” means a naturally occurring or synthetic amino acid, as well as amino acid analogs, stereoisomers, and amino acid mimetics that function similarly to the naturally occurring amino acids. Included by this definition are natural amino acids such as: (1) histidine (His) (2) isoleucine (He) (3) leucine (Leu) (4) ysine (Lys) (5) methionine (Met) (6) phenylalanine (Phe) (7) threonine (Thr) (8) tryptophan (Trp) (9) valine (Val) (10) arginine (Arg) (11) cysteine (Cys) (12) glutamine (Gin) (13) glycine (Gly) (14) proline (Pro) (15) serine (Ser) (16) tyrosine (Tyr) (17) alanine (Ala) (18) asparagine (Asn) (19) aspartic acid (Asp) (20) glutamic acid (Glu) (21) selenocysteine (Sec); including unnatural amino acids: (a) citrulline; (b) cystine; (c) gama-amino butyric acid (GAB A); (d) ornithine; (f) theanine and amino acid derivatives such as betaine; carnitine; carnosine creatine; hydroxytryptophan; hydroxyproline; N-acetyl cysteine; S-Adenosyl methionine (SAM-e); taurine; tyramine. Among these, amino acids containing reactive side chains, e.g., cysteine, serine, threonine, lysine, arginine, aspartate/asparagine, glutamate/glutamine, glycine, alanine, etc. are particularly employed for modification of the substrate.
    • Enzyme-Reactive Site (R)
  • In some embodiments, the chemical entities contain one or more enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive regions (R) for the detection of wound-specific enzymes.
  • In one embodiment, wherein the enzyme is a glycosidase such as lysozyme, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an acyl chitosan of at least 3 glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine or peptidoglycan units, which are optionally acetylated. The enzyme reactive site may contain, for example, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20 or more units of glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine or peptidoglycan units. In one embodiment, the R comprises at least 3 glucosamine or N-acetylglucosamine or a combination thereof, wherein the glucosamine and/or N-acetylglucosamine are optionally acetylated. In another embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises peptidoglycan, wherein the peptidoglycan is optionally acetylated.
  • In some embodiments, the chemical moieties comprise enzyme reactive sites (R) for one or more wound-specific protease disclosed above, e.g., cathepsin G, and myeloperoxidase, elastase or a combination thereof. As used herein, the term “reactive site for a protease” means a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of a protein, which is recognized by the protease as a substrate for its protease activity, e.g., as a substrate that can be cleaved into one or more products. In some embodiments, the chemical entities comprise a peptide region comprising a peptide sequence comprising a plurality of amino acids. The term “plurality” means two or more units, e.g., amino acids, although the individual units need not be structurally and/or functionally different. Typically, the indicator region (I) of the chemical entity comprises the peptide which serves as the enzyme reactive site for the wound-specific protease.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide that is labile to elastase, cathepsin G, myeloperoxidase or a combination thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme-labile region comprises a peptide that is liable to elastase. Under this embodiment, the chromogenic indicator for elastase would be high contrast and thus serve as a clear indicator when used in situ in medicinal products.
  • The ideal substrate would make a blue, violet or deep green colour. It would also be fixed in a sterically permissible position with high turnover. The state of the art is the opposite. Available substrates contain a p-nitrophenol group, which is low molecular weight but gives rise to a yellow soluble chromophore. Most skilled investigators regard that the substrate should be soluble in water, reasoning that this is the most likely way that the substrate will find its way to the active site.
  • In contrast the embodiments described herein depart from that general rationale. It was contemplated that elastase digests a solid phase substrate, namely structural proteins, which are, by definition, not soluble, that a substrate specific to it would have to be adapted accordingly. As such, both the color of the indicator and the systems that they could be employed with, e.g., electronically detection, were adapted to the wound environment.
  • Therefore, contrary to the art teachings to employ soluble substrates, embodiments described herein contemplate use of a low water soluble, elastase substrates that give rise to Blue, violet or Green colors.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
    • XyAAPXy-Z,
    • wherein each X is independently any amino acid,
    • y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, and
    • Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
    • XyAAPXy-L-Z ,
    • wherein each X is independently any amino acid,
    • y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, and
    • Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In another embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
    • XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy- Z ,
    • wherein each X is independently any amino acid,
    • y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200, and
    • Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In yet another embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
    • XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z,
    • wherein each X is independently any amino acid,
    • y is each, independently, an integer between 0 and 200,
    • L is a linking moiety, and
    • Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In another specific embodiment, the reactive region R comprises the peptide sequence XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein X, L and Z are each, as described above, and y is, each, independently an integer from 1 to 50.
  • Still in a further embodiment, the reactive region R comprises the peptide sequence XyAAPX Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein X, L and Z are each, as described above, and y is, each, independently an integer from 1 to 10.
  • Particularly, the reactive region R comprises the peptide sequence XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , wherein X, L and Z are each, as described above, and y is, each, independently an integer from 1 to 6.
  • In one embodiment, each of the aforementioned peptides comprising the sequence XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z , are each, individually, labile to elastase.
  • In some embodiments, one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z is protected, e.g., with an amine protection group, for example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • In general, the elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
  • In one embodiment,
    • a is selected from: A, V, F ,G ,M, R, L
    • b is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, F, A, R, L, G
    • g is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, R, L, G
    • d is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, R, L, G, V
    • e is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, R, L, G, V, E
    • f is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, R, L, G.
  • In another embodiment, elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
    • a is selected from: A, V, F ,G ,M, R, L
    • b is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, F, A, G
    • g is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, R, L, G
    • d is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, R, L, G, V
    • e is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, G, V, E
    • f is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, G.
  • In another embodiment, elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
    • a is selected from: A, V, F ,G ,M, R, L
    • b is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, F, A, G
    • g is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, L, G
    • d is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, L, G, V
    • e is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, G, V, E
    • f is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, G.
  • In another embodiment, elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
    • a is selected from: A, V, F ,G
    • b is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, F, A, G
    • g is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, G
    • d is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, A, G,
    • e is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A, G, V,
    • f is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A, G.
  • Especially, in another embodiment, elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
    • a is selected from: A, V, F
    • b is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, F, A,
    • g is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A, G
    • d is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A, G,
    • e is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A, G,
    • f is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A, G.
  • Preferably, elastase substrates have the formula a-b-c-d-e-f, wherein
    • a is selected from: A, V, F
    • b is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, P, F, A,
    • g is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A,
    • d is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A,
    • e is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A,
    • f is selected from: no amino acid, or independently, A.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide that is labile to cathepsin G.
  • In one embodiment, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of:
    • XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z , wherein
    • X is each, independently, any amino acid;
    • y is each independently a number selected from 0 to 6;
    • N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine;
    • N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine;
    • N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine;
    • N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; and
    • Z comprises a detectable label; and the peptide is labile to cathepsin G.
  • In some embodiments, one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence is protected. In some embodiments, one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence is protected with an fmoc group. In some embodiments, one of the amino acid in the amino acid sequence is protected with an fmoc group.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peptide comprising an amino acid sequence of
    • XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein
    • X is each, independently any amino acid;
    • y is each, independently, a number selected from 0 to 6;
    • N4 is selected from alanine, glycine, valine, and glutamine;
    • N3 is selected from alanine, glycine, proline, lysine, and serine;
    • N2 is selected from proline, alanine, and glycine;
    • N1 is selected from serine, lysine, phenylalanine, arginine, leucine, and methionine; and
    • L is a linking moiety; and
    • Z comprises a detectable label.
  • In one embodiment, each of the aforementioned peptides comprising the sequence XyN4N3N2N1-Z and XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , are each, individually, labile to cathepsin G.
  • In some embodiments, one or more of the amino acids in the amino acid sequence XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z and XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z is protected, e.g., with an amine protection group, for example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
    • Detectable Label Z
  • In some embodiments, Z is a peroxidase substrate, an arylamine, an amino phenol, an aminophenyl ether, an indoxyl, a neutral dye, a charged dye, a nanoparticle, or a colloidal gold particle.
  • In some embodiments, Z is a peroxidase substrate selected from p-aminophenol, ABTS (2,2inophenol, ABTS (s, the peroxidase substrate acid) diammonium salt), 3,3′-diaminobenzidine, 3,4 diaminobenzoic acid, DCPIP, N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, o-dianisidine, >-phenylenediamine, 4-chloro-l-naphthol, o-phenylenedi amine N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethylisoluminol, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole, 4-aminophthalhydrazide, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 2,2′-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid), indoxyl, indigo, Fast Blue RR, 4-chloro-7-nitrobenzofurazan.
  • In some embodiments, Z is an arylamine, an amino phenol, an aminophenol ether, an indoxyl, a neutral dye, a charged dye selected from remazole brilliant blue, toluidine blue, reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, and reactive orange 16, or a hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. Particularly, Z is a charged dye selected from remazole brilliant blue; toluidine blue; reactive black 5 or a hydrolytic or an ammonolytic derivative thereof.
  • In some embodiments, Z is a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10. In some embodiments, the dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye appears black. In some embodiments, Z is a reactive dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group.
  • In some embodiments, Z is a nanoparticle. In some embodiments, Z is a colloidal gold particle.
  • In some embodiments, Z is a charged dye, an indole derivative, or a luminol derivative.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a phenol, an amino phenol, an aminophenyl ether, an indoxyl, or a quinone. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a phenol. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an amino phenol. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an amino phenol ether. In some embodiments, the enzyme-label or enzyme-reactive region comprises an indoxyl. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a quinone. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region reacts with myeloperoxidase but does not react with heme.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peroxidase substrate, an arylamine, an amino phenol, a neutral dye, a charged dye, a nanoparticle, or a colloidal gold particle. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a peroxidase substrate. In some embodiments, the peroxidase substrate is selected from p-aminophenol, ABTS (2,2-Azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid) diammonium salt), 3,3′-diaminobenzidine, 3,4 diaminobenzoic acid, DCPIP, N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, o-dianisidine, p-phenylenediamine, 4-chloro-l-naphthol, o- phenylenediamine N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethylisoluminol, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole, 4- aminophthalhydrazide, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 2,2′-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid), and 4-chloro-7-nitrobenzofurazan, Fast Blue RR, N-(2-hydroxy)tetradecyl-Fast Blue RR. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an arylamine. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an amino phenol. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a neutral dye. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a charged dye. In some embodiments, the charged dye is selected from remazole brilliant blue, toluidine blue, reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, and reactive orange 16, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives of each of these. In some embodiments, the charged dye is remazole brilliant blue, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is toluidine blue. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive black 5, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive violet 5, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the charged dye is reactive orange 16, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a nanoparticle. In some embodiments, Z is a colloidal gold particle.
  • In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a charged dye, an indole derivative, or a luminol derivative. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises an indole derivative. In some embodiments, the enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region comprises a luminol derivative.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dye that presents a visible color change in normal ambient lighting. In some embodiments, the dye has a contrasting color to wound products, which are commonly red, yellow, or brown. In further embodiments, the dye is violet, blue or dark green. In some embodiments, the dye is violet. In some embodiments, the dye is blue. In some embodiments, the dye is dark green. In some embodiments, the dye has low molecular weight, is charged, contains reactive or linkable groups, is stable to gamma irradiation, and is deeply colored. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from cibracron series dyes, azo dyes, and remazol dyes, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from cibracron series dyes. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from azo dyes. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from remazol dyes, or hydrolytic or ammonolytic derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the dye is selected from rhodamine, coumarin, cyanine, xanthene, polymethine, pyrene, dipyrromethene borondifluoride, napthalimide, a phycobiliprotein, peridinium chlorophyll proteins, fluorescein, 6-FAM, rhodamine, Texas Red, California Red, iFluor594, tetramethylrhodamine, a carboxyrhodamine, carboxyrhodamine 6F, carboxyrhodol, carboxyrhodamine 110, Cascade Blue, Cascade Yellow, coumarin, Cy2®, Cy3®, Cy3.5®, Cy5®, Cy5.5®, Cy7®, Cy-Chrome, DyLight 350, DyLight 405, DyLight 488, DyLight 549, DyLight 594, DyLight 633, DyLight 649, DyLight 680, DyLight 750, DyLight 800, phycoerythrin, PerCP (peridinin chlorophyll-a Protein), PerCP-Cy5.5, JOE (6-carboxy-4′,5′-dichloro-2’,7′-dimethoxyfluorescein), NED, ROX (5-(and-6-)-carboxy-X-rhodamine), HEX, Lucifer Yellow, Marina Blue, Oregon Green 488, Oregon Green 500, Oregon Green 514, Alexa Fluor® 350, Alex Fluor® 430, Alexa Fluor® 488, Alexa Fluor® 532, Alexa Fluor® 546, Alexa Fluor® 568, Alexa Fluor® 594, Alexa Fluor® 633, Alexa Fluor® 647, Alexa Fluor® 660, Alexa Fluor® 680, 7-amino-4-methylcoumarin-3-acetic acid, BODIPY® FL, BODIPY® FL—Br2, BODIPY® 530/550, BODIPY® 558/568, BODIPY® 630/650, BODIPY® 650/665, BODIPY® R6G, BODIPY® TMR, BODIPY® TR, and dimethylaminoazobenzenesulfonic acid (dabsyl), or conjugates thereof, or combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10. In some embodiments, the dichlorotriazine-based reactive dye appears black.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises the reaction product of a reactive dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16. m some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is remazol brilliant blue. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive violet 5. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive orange 16. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, or reactive violet 5. In some embodiments, the reactive dye is reactive black 5 or remazol brilliant blue.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a particle {e.g., colloidal metal or quantum dots) that present color changes in normal ambient lighting. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a nanoparticle. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a colloidal gold particle.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dye that presents a visible color change under UV light. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dye that is fluorescent. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a dye that is luminescent.
  • In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises an enzyme-reactive moiety. In some embodiments, the enzyme-reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is visible to the naked eye or detectable by electronic means. In some embodiments, the enzyme-reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is visible to the naked eye. In some embodiments, the enzyme -reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is detectable by electronic means. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises an indoxyl glycoside that is cleaved by hexaminidase, glucuronidase, glucosidase or galactosidase depending on the terminal sugar used, to produce indigo. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a phenol that is oxidized by an accessory enzyme to produce a visible product. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a phenol that is oxidized by laccase to produce a visible product. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a metallo motif that is detectable by electronic means. In some embodiments, the indicator region comprises a ferrocene or ferrocene analog that is detectable by electronic means. In some embodiments, the accessory enzyme is selected from lipase, esterase, hexosaminidase, peroxidase, oxidase, glycosidase, glucosidase, and laccase. In some embodiments, the accessory enzyme is not present in the wound fluid. In some embodiments, the accessory enzyme is present in the wound fluid. In some embodiments, the enzyme-reactive moiety interacts with an accessory enzyme to produce a product that is visible under UV light.
  • Chemical entities containing a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and reaction sites (R)
  • In further embodiments, disclosed herein are chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I, which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction group (R). Typically, such chemical entities are employed to assay for a plurality of enzymes, e.g., a combination comprising at least one protease and at least one glycosidase.
  • In one embodiment, disclosed herein are chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I, which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase, cathepsin G, myeloperoxidase or a combination thereof. The individual reaction sites and recognition sites for these enzymes have been described previously.
  • In one embodiment, disclosed herein are chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I, which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of elastase. The individual reaction sites and recognition sites for these enzymes have been described previously.
  • In one embodiment, disclosed herein are chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I, which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of cathepsin G. The individual reaction sites and recognition sites for these enzymes have been described previously.
  • In one embodiment, disclosed herein are chemical entities containing the anchor A, the indicator I, which individually or together comprise a plurality of enzyme recognition sites (S) and enzyme reaction sites (R), wherein at least one reactive site is specific for a glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme; and at least one enzyme reaction site is specific for a protease selected from the group consisting of myeloperoxidase (MPO). The individual reaction sites and recognition sites for these enzymes have been described previously.
  • Owing to the greater predictive power of employing a combination of enzyme substrates, it is contemplated that the diagnostic utility of chemical entities comprising a plurality of reaction and recognition sites, as outlined above, will be greatly enhanced compared to entities comprising unitary (e.g., single type) of reaction and recognition sites. At the very least, entities comprising a plurality of reaction/recognition sites will permit diagnosis of at least 2, at least 3, at least 4 or more markers simultaneously. By the way of example, lysosomal and protease activity at the wound situs may be detected and monitored simultaneously using the multiplex chemical entities disclosed herein.
    • Support Material
  • In some embodiments, the anchor region (A) of the chemical entity binds the chemical entity to a support material, e.g., via covalent interaction, ionic interaction, hydrophobic interaction, electrostatic interactions, hydrogen bonding interactions, physiochemical interactions, van der Waal forces, Lewis-acid/Lewis-base interactions, or combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the support matrix comprises dextran, agarose, silica, synthetic polymer, or dextran, agarose, silica, or synthetic polymer covalently coupled to an antibody, ligand, or epitope tag.
  • In some embodiments, the anchor region is a polystyrene bead, silica gel bead, polysaccharide bead, polyacrylamide bead, cellulose bead, polysaccharide, derivatized cellulose, polyacrylate, polyethyleneimine, polyacrylamide, UV-activatable reactive group, peptidoglycan, or chitosan derivative, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the anchor region binds to a support material after a short period of UV irradiation.
  • In some embodiments, the chemical entity is printed on or in a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action. In some embodiments, the reporting entity or chemical entity is chemically bonded onto or into a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action that is similar in all dimensions. In some embodiments, the chemical entity is ionically bound onto or into a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action. In some embodiments, the chemical entity is covalently bound onto or into a support material such as filter paper or a woven or non-woven material that is capable of being wet by a wound fluid and which displays capillary action. Support material includes, but is not limited to, cellulose, polyamide, polyester, polyacrylate and other similar polymers that are useful as fibers. In some embodiments, the support material is cellulose. In some embodiments, the support material is polyamide. In some embodiments, the support material is polyester. In some embodiments, the support material is polyacrylate.
    • Additional Moieties
  • In some instances, the pH of a wound can influence many factors of wound healing, such as angiogenesis, protease activity, oxygen release, and bacterial toxicity. Chronic nonhealing wounds may have an elevated alkaline environment. As the wound progresses towards healing, the pH of the wound moves to neutral and then becomes acidic. Monitoring of the pH of the wound may provide a method to assess the condition of the wound (e.g., infection or no infection) and aid in determining a wound’s response to treatment.
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the chemical entity for the detection of infection in a wound comprises an indicator region comprising a pH-sensitive moiety that presents a visible color change. In one embodiment, the pH-sensitive moiety presents a visible color change at alkaline pH, e.g., a pH = 7.2-9.5; pH = 7.2-9.0; pH = 7.2-8.5; pH = 7.2-8.0; pH = 7.5- 8.5; pH = 7.5-9.0; pH = 8.0-9.0. In other embodiments, the pH-sensitive moiety presents a visible color change at pH = 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9.0, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, or 9.5, or 0.1 increments thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the pH-sensitive moiety presents a visible color change at neutral pH range, e.g., at pH = 6.9, 7.0, or 7.1, or 0.05 increments thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the pH-sensitive moiety presents a visible color change at acidic pH, e.g., pH = 4.5-6.8; pH = 4.5-6.5; pH = 5.0-6.8; pH = 5.4-6.8; pH = 5.4-6.5. In other embodiments, the pH-sensitive moiety presents a visible color change at pH = 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6.0, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, or 6.9, or 0.1 increments thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the pH-sensitive moiety is selected from the group consisting of bromothymol blue, phenol red, bromophenol red, chlorophenol red, thymol blue, bromocresol green, bromocresol purple; nitrazine yellow; and sulfophthalein dyes or a combination thereof.
    • Compositions:
  • Embodiments described herein further relate to compositions containing the compounds of Formula I. Such compositions may be prepared using conventional methods.
  • Once formulated, the resulting stock composition of compounds of Formula I may be further modified into desired form, e.g., gels, balms, lotions, cream, paste, ointments, etc. using conventional methods, e.g., using carriers, gelling agents, emollients, surfactants, humectants, viscosity enhancers, emulsifiers, etc. See, e.g., WO 2013/004953.
  • Carriers for use in the composition may include, but are not limited to, water, glycerin, diglycerin, glycerin derivatives, glycols, glycol derivatives, sugars, ethoxylated and/or propoxylated esters and ethers, urea, sodium PCA, alcohols, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, and combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the carrier is propylene glycol. Typically, the composition contains a carrier in an amount from about 1% by weight of the composition to about 99.9% by weight of the composition, more typically from about 2% by weight of the composition to about 95% by weight of the composition, and more typically from about 5% by weight of the composition to about 90% by weight of the composition.
  • Thermo-reversible gelling agents are defined as ingredients that are soluble, partially soluble, or miscible in a hydrophilic carrier at elevated temperatures, such as 50° C., wherein the agents have the ability to thicken the carrier when cooled to 25° C., but will be less viscous at 50° C. when application to a substrate is necessary. Suitable hydrophilic carriers include water, glycols, e.g., propylene glycol. Thermo-reversible gelling agents for use in the composition may include salts of fatty acids such as sodium stearate, sodium palmitate, potassium stearate. These salts can be added to the composition or can be created in-situ by addition of the fatty acid and neutralizing with appropriate base. An example of in-situ formation of the composition is to provide stearic acid and sodium hydroxide to produce sodium stearate. Other common hermos-reversible gelling agents could include, e.g., polyethylene glycols and derivatives such as PEG-20, PEG-150 distearate, PEG-150 pentaerythrityl tetrastearate, disteareth-75 IPDI, disteareth-100 IPDI, fatty alcohols, e.g., cetyl alcohol, fatty acids such as stearic acid, hydroxystearic acid and its derivatives, and combinations thereof.
  • In addition to the carrier and hermos-reversible gelling agent, the composition can contain various other ingredients and components. Examples of other ingredients that may be included within the composition are emollients, sterols or sterol derivatives, natural and synthetic fats or oils, viscosity enhancers, rheology modifiers, polyols, surfactants, alcohols, esters, silicones, clays, starch, cellulose, particulates, moisturizers, film formers, slip modifiers, surface modifiers, skin protectants, humectants, sunscreens, and the like.
    • Pharmaceutical Compositions And/or Preparations:
  • Embodiments described herein further relate to pharmaceutical compositions and/or preparations comprising one or more of the aforementioned compounds of Formula I and a carrier. The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those compounds, salts, compositions, dosage forms, etc., which are—within the scope of sound medical judgment—suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and/or other mammals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. In some aspects, “pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved by a regulatory agency of the federal or a state government, or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in mammals (e.g., animals), and more particularly, in humans.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions may be prepared by any suitable means known in the art. Examples of such compositions include those adapted for: (a) topical application, e.g., articles (e.g., gauzes, pads, swabs, dressings), creams, ointments, gels, lotions, etc.; (b) parenteral administration, e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as a sterile solution or suspension; (c) oral administration, external application (e.g. drenches including aqueous and non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pellets for admixture with feedstuffs, pastes for application to the tongue, etc.
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions may comprise one or more antibiotic agents. As used herein, the term “antibiotic” or “antimicrobial agent” refers to a substance that inhibits the growth of or destroys microorganisms. Preferably, the antibiotic is useful in curbing the virulence of an infectious agent and/or treating an infectious disease. Antibiotic also refers to semi-synthetic substances wherein a natural form produced by a microorganism, e.g., yeast or fungus is structurally modified.
  • Preferably, the antibiotic is selected from the group consisting of β-lactams (including, β-lactamase inhibitors and cephalosporins), fluoroquinolones, aminoglycosides, tetracyclines and/or glycylcyclines and/or polymyxins. Any combination of antimicrobial agents may also be employed, e.g., at least one β-lactam and at least one fluoroquinolone; at least one aminoglycoside and one cephalosporin; at least one β-lactam and one β-lactamase inhibitor, optionally together with an aminoglycoside, etc.
  • As used herein, the term “β-lactam” inhibitor includes natural and semi-synthetic penicillins and penicillin derivatives, e.g., benzathine penicillin, benzylpenicillin (penicillin G), phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V), procaine penicillin and oxacillin; methicillin, dicloxacillin and flucloxacillin; temocillin; amoxicillin and ampicillin; azlocillin, carbenicillin, ticarcillin, mezlocillin and piperacillin; biapenem, doripenem, ertapenem, imipenem, meropenem, panipenem and PZ-601 ; cephalexin, cephalothin, cefazolin, cefaclor, cefuroxime, cefamandole, cefotetan, cefoxitin, cefotaxime, and cefpodoxime; cefepime and cefpirome; cefadroxil, cefixime, cefprozil, cephalexin, cephalothin, cefuroxime, cefamandole, cefepime and cefpirome; cefoxitin, cefotetan, cefmetazole and flomoxef; tigemonam, nocardicin A and tabtoxin; clavulanic acid, moxalactam and flomoxef. Fluoroquinolones include, ciprofloxacin, garenoxacin, gatifloxacin, gemifloxacin, levofloxacin, and moxifloxacin. Aminoglycosides include, for e.g., kanamycin, amikacin, tobramycin, dibekacin, gentamicin, sisomicin, netilmicin, neomycin B, neomycin C, neomycin E (paromomycin) and streptomycin, including, synthetic derivatives clarithromycin and azithromycin. Tetracyclines include naturally-occurring compounds (e.g., tetracycline, chlortetracycline, oxytetracycline, demeclocycline) or semisynthetic agents (e.g., lymecycline, meclocycline, methacycline, minocycline, roli tetracycline). Glycylcyclines (e.g., minocycline/tigecycline) are derived from tetracyclines. Polymyxins include, e.g., polymyxin B and polymyxin E (colistin).
  • In certain embodiments, the compositions may contain an antibiotic at a concentration of 0.1 mg/mL, 0.5 mg/L, 1 mg/mL, 2 mg/mL, 3 mg/mL, 4 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL, 6 mg/mL, 7 mg/mL, 8 mg/mL, 9 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 11 mg/mL, 12 mg/mL, 13 mg/mL, 14 mg/mL, 15 mg/mL, 16 mg/mL, 17 mg mL, 18 mg/mL, 19 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 21 mg/mL, 22 mg/mL, 23 mg/mL, 24 mg/mL, 25 mg mL, 26 mg mL, 27 mg/mL, 28 mg/mL, 29 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 31 mg/mL, 32 mg/mL, 33 mg/mL, 34 mg mL, 35 mg/mL, 36 mg/mL, 37 mg/mL, 38 mg/mL, 39 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 41 mg/mL, 42 mg mL, 43 mg/mL 44 mg/mL, 45 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 70 mg/mL, 80 mg/m, 90 mg/mL, 100 mg/mL, 150 mg/mL, 200 mg/mL, 250 mg/mL, 300 mg/mL, 400 mg/mL, 500 mg/mL, or more. For example, imipenem and ertapenem may be used in the concentrations of 50, 30, 20, 15, 10, 5 and 1 mg/mL.
    • Wound Dressings:
  • Disclosed herein, in certain embodiments, are wound dressings comprising wound dressing materials as described herein, e.g., compounds of Formula I. In some embodiments, the wound dressings consist essentially of the wound dressing materials as described herein, e.g., a compound of Formula I.
  • In one embodiment, the wound dressing disclosed herein are biocompatible, biodegradable, non-immunogenic and readily commercially available.
  • In one embodiment, the compounds of Formula I are provided in the form of particles, such as fiber particles or powder particles, optionally containing a medicament. In particular, the materials preferably contain CMC fibers.
  • The compositions may preferably comprise an intimate mixture of the dressing material and other compounds. For instance, in one embodiment, the intimate mixture comprises a mixed solution or dispersion of the dressing material and a suitable vehicle, such as a solvent, or a solid composition produced by removing solvent from such a solution or dispersion. Under this embodiment, the dressing material makes up at least 5%, more preferably at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 50%, 75%, 90% or greater % by weight of the material. In certain preferred embodiments, the material consists essentially of the dressing material.
  • Other components of the material may include 0-25% by weight, for example from about 1 to about 20% by weight, of one or more other biocompatible polysaccharides, for example alginates such as sodium alginate or calcium alginate, starch derivatives such as sodium starch glycolate, cellulose derivatives such as methyl cellulose or carboxymethyl cellulose, or glycosaminoglycans such as hyaluronic acid or its salts, chondroitin sulfate or heparan sulfate. The materials may also comprise up to about 25% by weight, for example from about 1 to about 20%) by weight, of one or more structural proteins selected from the group consisting of fibronectin, fibrin, laminin, elastin, collagen and mixtures thereof. Preferably the protein comprises collagen, and more preferably it consists essentially of collagen. The materials may also comprise up to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 2% to about 10% by weight of water. The materials may also contain 0-40% by weight, for example from about 5 to about 25% by weight, of a plasticizer, preferably a polyhydric alcohol such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • In certain embodiments, the materials may also comprise up to about 10% by weight, for example from about 0.01 to about 5% by weight, typically from about 0.1 to about 2% by weight of one or more therapeutic wound healing agents, such as non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (e.g., acetaminophen), steroids, local anesthetics, antimicrobial agents, or growth factors (e.g., fibroblast growth factor or platelet derived growth factor). The antimicrobial agent may, for example, comprise an antiseptic, an antibiotic, or mixtures thereof. Preferred antibiotics include tetracycline, penicillins, terramycins, erythromycin, bacitracin, neomycin, polymycin B, mupirocin, clindamycin and mixtures thereof. Preferred antiseptics include silver, including colloidal silver, silver salts including salts of one or more of the anionic polymers making up the material, silver sulfadiazine, chlorhexidine, povidone iodine, triclosan, sucralfate, quaternary ammonium salts and mixtures thereof. These medicated wound dressing materials according to the disclosed technology provide sustained release of the therapeutic agents as the wound dressing material breaks down in use.
  • All of the above percentages are on a dry weight basis. Preferably, the weight ratio of the wound dressing material to other auxiliary agents and materials is from about 1 :99 to about 99: 1. More preferably, the weight ratio is in the range about 1 :9 to about 9: 1, more preferably it is in the range about 4: 1 to about 1 :4, still more preferably in the range about 2: 1 to about 1 :2.
  • The material may be in any convenient form, such as a powder, microspheres, flakes, a mat or a film.
  • In certain embodiments, the material is in the form of a semisolid or gel ointment for topical application.
  • In certain embodiments, the material is in the form of a freeze-dried or solvent-dried bioabsorbable sponge for application to a chronic wound. Preferably, the average pore size of the sponge is in the region of 10-500 µm, more preferably about 100-300 µm. A suitable sponge has been made by freeze-drying or solvent drying an aqueous dispersion comprising compounds of Formula I, together with suitable therapeutic agents.
  • In yet other embodiments, the material is in the form of a flexible film, which may be continuous or interrupted (e.g. perforated). The flexible film preferably comprises a plasticizer to render it flexible, such as glycerol.
  • The ready availability of both gel forming polymers, e.g., cellulose derivatives, having a range of controllable properties means that the properties of the compositions the disclosed technology can be controlled to an exceptional degree. In particular, the rate of biological absorption, porosity and density of the materials can be controlled.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein are wound dressing materials in sheet form, comprising an active layer of a composition comprising compounds of Formula I. The active layer would normally be the wound contacting layer in use, but in some embodiments it could be separated from the wound by a liquid-permeable top sheet. In one embodiment, the area of the active layer is from about 1 cm2 to about 400 cm2, particularly from about 4 cm2 to about 100 cm2.
  • In another embodiment, the wound dressing material further comprises a backing sheet extending over the active layer opposite to the wound facing side of the active layer. Preferably, the backing sheet is larger than the active layer such that a marginal region of width 1 mm to 50 mm, preferably 5 mm to 20 mm extends around the active layer to form a so-called island dressing. In such cases, the backing sheet is preferably coated with a pressure sensitive medical grade adhesive in at least its marginal region.
  • In embodiments wherein the dressing material comprises a backing sheet, the back sheet is substantially liquid-impermeable. In another embodiment, the backing sheet is semipermeable, e.g., the backing sheet is preferably permeable to water vapor, but not permeable to liquid water or wound exudate. Preferably, the backing sheet is also microorganism-impermeable. Suitable continuous conformable backing sheets will preferably have a moisture vapor transmission rate (MVTR) of the backing sheet alone of 300 to 5000 g/m2/24 hrs, preferably 500 to 2000 g/m2/24 hrs at 37.5° C. at 100% to 10% relative humidity difference. The backing sheet thickness is preferably in the range of 10 to 1000 micrometers, more preferably 100 to 500 micrometers.
  • Suitable polymers for forming the backing sheet include polyurethanes and poly alkoxyalkyl acrylates and methacrylates. Preferably, the backing sheet comprises a continuous layer of a high density blocked polyurethane foam that is predominantly closed-cell. A suitable backing sheet material is a polyurethane film.
  • In wound dressings comprising a backing layer comprising an adhesive, the adhesive layer should be moisture vapor transmitting and/or patterned to allow passage of water vapor. The adhesive layer is preferably a continuous moisture vapor transmitting, pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the type conventionally used for island-type wound dressings, for example, a pressure sensitive adhesive based on acrylate ester copolymers, polyvinyl ethyl ether and polyurethane. Polyurethane-based pressure sensitive adhesives may be selectively used.
  • In another embodiment, the dressing may comprise further layers of a multilayer absorbent article may be built up between the active layer and the protective sheet. For example, these layers may comprise an apertured plastic film to provide support for the active layer in use, in which case the apertures in the film are preferably aligned in register with the apertures in the hydrogel layer.
  • Still further, in other embodiments, the dressing may comprise an absorbent layer between the active layer and the protective sheet, especially if the dressing is for use on exuding wounds. The optional absorbent layer may be any of the layers conventionally used for absorbing wound fluids, serum or blood in the wound healing art, including gauzes, nonwoven fabrics, superabsorbents, hydrogels and mixtures thereof. Preferably, the absorbent layer comprises a layer of absorbent foam, such as an open celled hydrophilic polyurethane foam. In other embodiments, the absorbent layer may be a nonwoven fibrous web, for example a carded web of viscose staple fibers.
  • In certain embodiments, the wound dressing may be protected by a removable cover sheet. The cover sheet is normally formed from flexible thermoplastic material. Suitable materials include polyesters and polyolefins. Preferably, the adhesive-facing surface of the cover sheet is a release surface. That is to say, a surface that is only weakly adherent to the active layer and the adhesive on the backing sheet to assist peeling of the hydrogel layer from the cover sheet. For example, the cover sheet may be formed from a non-adherent plastic such as a fluoropolymer, or it may be provided with a release coating such as a silicone or fluoropolymer release coating.
  • In one embodiment, the wound dressing is sterile and packaged in a microorganism-impermeable container.
    • Kits:
  • In certain embodiments, the disclosed technology provides kits comprising, in one or separate compartments, the compounds of Formula I, optionally together with an excipient, carrier or oil. The kits may further comprise additional ingredients, e.g., gelling agents, emollients, surfactants, humectants, viscosity enhancers, emulsifiers, etc., in one or more compartments. The kits may optionally comprise instructions for formulating an article for diagnosing, detecting or treating wounds, e.g., chronic or infected wounds. The kits may also comprise instructions for using the components, either individually or together, in the treatment of wounds.
  • In a related embodiment, the disclosed technology provides kits comprising a package and at least one absorbent article (described above) comprising the aforementioned compositions. Alternately, the kits may comprise the individual components separately, optionally together with secondary information, useable in or with the package.
  • Other embodiments disclosed herein relate to the use of the composition for the preparation of a dressing for the treatment of a wound. Preferably, the wound is a chronic wound, for example a wound selected from the group consisting of venous ulcers, decubitis ulcers and diabetic ulcers.
    • Surfaces:
  • Embodiments of the disclosed technology further provide for surfaces comprising the aforementioned compounds of Formula I, wherein the reporter or peptide is oriented to permit binding to a partner, e.g., an enzyme. Preferably, the surface is a surface of a solid support. Numerous and varied solid supports are known to those in the art. Useful solid supports include natural polymeric carbohydrates and their synthetically modified, cross-linked or substituted derivatives, such as agar, agarose, cross-linked alginic acid, substituted and cross-linked guar gums, cellulose esters, especially with nitric acid and carboxylic acids, mixed cellulose esters, and cellulose ethers; natural polymers containing nitrogen, such as proteins and derivatives, including cross-linked or modified gelatins; natural hydrocarbon polymers, such as latex and rubber; synthetic polymers which may be prepared with suitably porous structures, such as vinyl polymers, including polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, polyvinylchloride, polyvinylacetate and its partially hydrolyzed derivatives, polyacrylamides, polymethacrylates, copolymers and terpolymers of the above polycondensates, such as polyesters, polyamides, and other polymers, such as polyurethanes or polyepoxides; porous inorganic materials such as sulfates or carbonates of alkaline earth metals and magnesium, including barium sulfate, calcium sulfate, calcium carbonate, silicates of alkali and alkaline earth metals, aluminum and magnesium; and aluminum or silicon oxides or hydrates, such as clays, alumina, talc, kaolin, zeolite, silica gel, or glass (these materials may be used as filters with the above polymeric materials); and mixtures or copolymers of the above classes, such as graft copolymers obtained by initializing polymerization of synthetic polymers on a pre-existing natural polymer.
  • In one embodiment, the support is a well of an array plate, e.g., a microarray. Methods for constructing such arrays are known in the art, e.g., Cao et al., Appl Environ Microbiol, 77(23): 8219-8225, 201 1. Each compound of Formula I (or the peptide indicators alone) may be spotted in triplicate to eliminate irregular data due to physical defects in the array.
    • Systems:
  • Embodiments of the disclosed technology further provide for diagnostic systems comprising the aforementioned compositions and/or kits.
  • The various components of the diagnostic systems may be provided in a variety of forms. For example, the compounds of Formula I (e.g., compounds containing peptide reporters) may be provided as a lyophilized reagent. These lyophilized reagents may be pre-mixed before lyophilization so that when reconstituted they form a complete mixture with the proper ratio of each of the components ready for use in the assay. In addition, the diagnostic systems of the disclosed technology may contain a reconstitution reagent for reconstituting the lyophilized reagents of the kit.
    • Nucleic Acids
  • In one embodiment, included herein are nucleic acids encoding the following peptides:
  • XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z ; XyN4N3N2N1-Z or XyN4N3N2N1-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • In another embodiment, included herein are nucleic acids encoding the polypeptide sequences for ElaSubl CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSubl PDM, CatGSubl_PDM, ElaSubl PDM His, CatGSubl PDM His, ElaSub2_PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • In particular embodiment, included herein are nucleic acids encoding the polypeptide sequences set forth in Table 4 (for ElaSubl CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM _His, CatGSub2_CBM_His) or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • The phrases “nucleic acid” or “nucleic acid sequence,” as used herein, refer to an oligonucleotide, nucleotide, polynucleotide, or any fragment thereof, to DNA or RNA of genomic or synthetic origin which may be single- stranded or double- stranded and may represent the sense or the antisense strand, to peptide nucleic acid (PNA), or to any DNA-like or RNA-like material. In this context, “fragments” refers to those nucleic acid sequences which are greater than about 10 nucleotides in length, and most preferably are at least about 40 nucleotides, at least about 100 nucleotides, or at least about 300 nucleotides in length.
  • Embodiments disclosed herein further relate to variants of the aforementioned polynucleotides.
  • In one embodiment, included herein are variants of aforementioned nucleic acids which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the nucleic acids encoding the following peptides: XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)X L-Z ; X N4N3N2Z1-Z or X N4N3N2Z1-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • In one embodiment, included herein are variants of aforementioned nucleic acids which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the nucleotide coding sequence in ElaSubl CBM, CatGSub 1 CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1_PDM, CatGSub 1 PDM, ElaSubl PDM His, CatGSub 1 PDM His, ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM His, or the complementary strand thereto, or the RNA equivalent thereof, or a complementary RNA equivalent thereof.
  • In a related embodiment, included herein are nucleotide sequence variants of aforementioned nucleic acids which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the nucleotide encoding the polypeptide sequences set forth in Table 4 (for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSub 1 CBM His, CatGSubl CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM_His, CatGSub2_CBM _His) , or the complementary strand thereto, or the RNA equivalent thereof, or a complementary RNA equivalent thereof. One skilled in the art can use routine software, e.g., Three-to-One Sequence Manipulation Suite (which generates three potential nucleic acid sequences for each inputted polypeptide sequence), to arrive at the encoding nucleic acid sequences. The Three-to-One software is available freely from bioinformatics(dot)org.
  • The phrases “percent identity” or “% identity” refer to the percentage of sequence similarity found in a comparison of two or more amino acid or nucleic acid sequences. Percent identity can be determined electronically, e.g., by using the MEGALIGN program (LASERGENE software package, DNASTAR). The MEGALIGN program can create alignments between two or more sequences according to different methods, e.g., the Clustal Method. (Higgins, D. G. and P. M. Sharp (1988) Gene 73 :237-244.) The Clustal algorithm groups sequences into clusters by examining the distances between all pairs. The clusters are aligned pairwise and then in groups. The percentage similarity between two amino acid sequences, e.g., sequence A and sequence B, is calculated by dividing the length of sequence A, minus the number of gap residues in sequence A, minus the number of gap residues in sequence B, into the sum of the residue matches between sequence A and sequence B, times one hundred. Gaps of low or of no homology between the two amino acid sequences are not included in determining percentage similarity. Percent identity between nucleic acid sequences can also be calculated by the Clustal Method, or by other methods known in the art, such as the Jotun Hein Method. (See, e.g., Hein, J. (1990) Mehtods Enzymol. 183:626-645.) Identity between sequences can also be determined by other methods known in the art, e.g., by varying hybridization conditions.
  • In another embodiment, included herein are variant polynucleotides which hybridize to one or more nucleic acid molecules under stringent hybridization conditions or lower stringency conditions. “Hybridization,” as the term is used herein, refers to any process by which a strand of nucleic acid bonds with a complementary strand through base pairing. For example, hybridization under high stringency conditions could occur in about 50% formamide at about 37° C. to 42° C. Hybridization could occur under reduced stringency conditions in about 35% to 25% formamide at about 30° C. to 35° C. In particular, hybridization could occur under high stringency conditions at 42° C. in 50% formamide, 5xSSPE, 0.3% SDS, and 200 µg/ml sheared and denatured salmon sperm DNA. Hybridization could occur under reduced stringency conditions as described above, but in 35% formamide at a reduced temperature of 35° C. The temperature range corresponding to a particular level of stringency can be further narrowed by calculating the purine to pyrimidine ratio of the nucleic acid of interest and adjusting the temperature accordingly. Variations on the above ranges and conditions are well known in the art.
  • The term “hybridization complex” as used herein, refers to a complex formed between two nucleic acid sequences by virtue of the formation of hydrogen bonds between complementary bases. A hybridization complex may be formed in solution or formed between one nucleic acid sequence present in solution and another nucleic acid sequence immobilized on a solid support (e.g., paper, membranes, filters, chips, pins or glass slides, or any other appropriate substrate to which cells or their nucleic acids have been fixed).
  • In another embodiment, included herein are variants which are polynucleotide fragments of the aforementioned nucleic acids.
  • Also included herein are oligonucleotides, e.g., PCR primers, which hybridize to one or more nucleic acids. The term “oligonucleotide,” as used herein, refers to a nucleic acid sequence of at least about 6 nucleotides to 60 nucleotides, preferably about 15 to 30 nucleotides, and most preferably about 20 to 25 nucleotides, which can be used in PCR amplification or in a hybridization assay or microarray. As used herein, the term “oligonucleotide” is substantially equivalent to the terms “amplimers,” “primers,” “oligomers,” and “probes,” as these terms are commonly defined in the art.
  • Also included herein are modified nucleic acids such as PNA. “Peptide nucleic acid” (PNA), as used herein, refers to an antisense molecule or anti-gene agent which comprises an oligonucleotide of at least about 5 nucleotides in length linked to a peptide backbone of amino acid residues ending in lysine. The terminal lysine confers solubility to the composition. PNAs preferentially bind complementary single stranded DNA and RNA and stop transcript elongation, and may be pegylated to extend their lifespan in the cell. (See, e.g., Nielsen, P. E. et al. (1993) Anticancer Drug Des. 8:53-63.)
    • Vectors
  • Also included herein are vectors which contain one or more of the aforementioned nucleic acids. In one embodiment, the vector comprises at least one protein encoding nucleic acid, e.g., nucleic acids encoding the polypeptide sequences for ElaSubl_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 20], CatGSub 1_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 201, ElaSubl _CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 211, CatGSubl __CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 221, ElaSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 231, CatGSub2__CBM [SEQ ID NO: 241, ElaSub2_CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 251, CatGSub2__CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 261, ElaSubl _PDM, CatGSub 1_PDM, ElaSubl _PDM _His, CatGSubl PDM His, ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof, in operable linkage with one or more additional sequences. The additional sequences may be synthetic in nature. The terms “operably associated” or “operably linked,” as used herein, refer to functionally related nucleic acid sequences. A promoter is operably associated or operably linked with a coding sequence if the promoter controls the transcription of the encoded polypeptide. While operably associated or operably linked nucleic acid sequences can be contiguous and in reading frame, certain genetic elements, e.g., repressor genes, are not contiguously linked to the encoded polypeptide but still bind to operator sequences that control expression of the polypeptide.
    • Codon Optimized Sequences
  • Included herein are codon-optimized sequences of the aforementioned nucleic acid sequences and vectors. Codon optimization for expression in a host cell, e.g., bacteria such as E. coli or insect Hi5 cells, may be routinely performed using Codon Optimization Tool (CodonOpt), available freely from Integrated DNA Technologies, Inc., Coralville, Iowa.
    • Host Cells
  • Included herein are host cells containing the aforementioned nucleic acid sequences and vectors. In one embodiment, the host cell is capable of recombinantly expressing the gene sequence contained in the vector under standard culture conditions to generate the polypeptide product, e.g., polypeptide sequences for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSubl CBM, ElaSub 1 CBM His, CatGSub 1 CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1_PDM, CatGSub 1_PDM, ElaSub 1 PDM His, CatGSubl PDM His, ElaSub2_PDM, CatGSub2_PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof. In one specific embodiment, the host cell is E. coli.
    • Polypeptides
  • In one embodiment, included herein are polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V F/A)Xy-L-Z ; XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z or XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • In another embodiment, included herein are the polypeptide sequences for ElaSub 1 CBM [SEQ ID NO: 111, CatGSubl CBM [SEQ ID NO: 121, ElaSub 1 CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 13], CatGSub 1 _CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 14], ElaSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 151, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2__CBM _His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1_PDM, CatGSubl PDM, ElaSub 1 PDM His [SEQ ID NO: 161, CatGSubl PDM His [SEQ ID NO: 17], ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2_PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His [SEQ ID NO: 181, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • In particular embodiments, included herein are the polypeptide sequences set forth in Table 4 (for ElaSubl CBM [SEQ ID NO: 111, CatGSub 1 CBM [SEQ ID NO: 121, ElaSub l_CBM_His [SEQ ID NO: 131, CatGSub l CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 14], ElaSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 151] CatGSub2_CBM [SEQ ID NO: 161, ElaSub2_CBM His [SEQ ID NO: 171, CatGSub2_CBM_His [SEQ ID NO: 181] or an enzyme- cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • In another embodiment, included herein are variants of aforementioned polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, an amino acid sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the following polypeptide sequences: XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V F/A)Xy-L-Z ; XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z or XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above.
  • In another embodiment, included herein are variant polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, an amino acid sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%o, 99%, or greater % identity to, for example, the polypeptide sequences for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSub 1 CBM, ElaSub 1 CBM His, CatGSub 1 CBM His, ElaSub2 CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1 PDM, CatGSub 1 PDM, ElaSub 1 PDM His, CatGSub 1 PDM His, ElaSub2 _PDM, CatGSub2 _PDM, ElaSub2 _PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof. Particularly, the fragment comprises a minimal structural motif for the enzyme recognition site (S) or enzyme-reactive site (R) for the hydrolase enzymes described herein, e.g., lysozyme, elastase, cathepsin G, MAO, or a combination thereof. Alternately or additionally, the fragment peptides are immunogenic molecules that can be recognized by antibodies or antigen-binding domains thereof.
    • Homologs
  • In another embodiment, included herein are homologs to the aforementioned peptides and polynucleotides. The term “homology,” as used herein, refers to a degree of complementarity. There may be partial homology or complete homology. The word “identity” may substitute for the word “homology.” A partially complementary sequence that at least partially inhibits an identical sequence from hybridizing to a target nucleic acid is referred to as “substantially homologous.” The inhibition of hybridization of the completely complementary sequence to the target sequence may be examined using a hybridization assay (Southern or northern blot, solution hybridization, and the like) under conditions of reduced stringency. A substantially homologous sequence or hybridization probe will compete for and inhibit the binding of a completely homologous sequence to the target sequence under conditions of reduced stringency. This is not to say that conditions of reduced stringency are such that nonspecific binding is permitted, as reduced stringency conditions require that the binding of two sequences to one another be a specific (i .e., a selective) interaction. The absence of non-specific binding may be tested by the use of a second target sequence which lacks even a partial degree of complementarity (e.g., less than about 30% homology or identity). In the absence of nonspecific binding, the substantially homologous sequence or probe will not hybridize to the second non-complementary target sequence.
    • Mutants
  • In another embodiment, included herein are variant peptides comprising a mutation in the core polypeptide sequence for ElaSub 1 CBM, CatGSub 1 CBM, ElaSubl CBM His, CatGSub 1_CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub 1 PDM, CatGSub 1 PDM, ElaSubl PDM His, CatGSub1 PDM His, ElaSub2 PDM, CatGSub2 PDM, ElaSub2 PDM His, CatGSub2 PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the mutation is a substitution, deletion, addition of 1-3 amino acids. Preferably, the mutation does not change the enzyme recognition sites in the mutant peptides so formed. If the mutation results in a change in the composition of the recognition site or cleavage site, then it is contemplated that the mutation is due to a conserved amino acid substitution,
  • The words “insertion” or “addition,” as used herein, refer to changes in an amino acid or nucleotide sequence resulting in the addition of one or more amino acid residues or nucleotides, respectively, to the sequence found in the naturally occurring molecule. A “substitution,” as used herein, refers to the replacement of one or more amino acids or nucleotides by different amino acids or nucleotides, respectively.
    • Antibodies
  • Embodiments disclosed herein further include antibodies which bind specifically to one or more of the aforementioned immunogenic peptides.
  • In one embodiment, the antibodies bind to polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V F/A)Xy-L-Z ; XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z or XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, L and Z are each, as described above. In another embodiment, the antibodies bind to fragment of these polypeptides. Contemplated herein are antigen-binding fragments of such antibodies, e.g., F(ab) domain, F(ab)2 domains, scFv domains, including synthetically generated antibodies (using, e.g., phase display technology).
  • In one embodiment, the antibodies bind to polypeptide sequences for ElaSub1_CBM, CatGSub1_CBM, ElaSub1_CBM His, CatGSub1_CBM His, ElaSub2_CBM, CatGSub2_CBM, ElaSub2_CBM His, CatGSub2_CBM His, ElaSub1_PDM, CatGSub1_PDM, ElaSub1_PDM His, CatGSub1_PDM His, ElaSub2_PDM, CatGSub2_PDM, ElaSub2_PDM His, CatGSub2_PDM or an enzyme-cleavable fragment thereof and/or an immunogenic fragment thereof. Contemplated herein are antigen-binding fragments of such antibodies, e.g., F(ab) domain, F(ab)2 domains, scFv domains, including synthetically generated antibodies (using, e.g., phase display technology).
    • Purified Molecules
  • Included herein are purified biomolecules, e.g., nucleic acids, proteins, peptides, and/or antibody molecules, including, conjugates thereof. The term “substantially purified,” as used herein, refers to nucleic acids, amino acids or antibodies that are removed from their natural environment and are isolated or separated, and are at least about 60% free, preferably about 75% free, and most preferably about 90% free from other components with which they are naturally associated.
  • In embodiments described herein, the biomolecules may be altered by combining with various components of the chemical entities, e.g., anchor region and/or indicator region, such that their form and/or functionality is significantly changed compared to any natural counterparts.
    • Methods of Making Compounds of Formula I:
  • Embodiments provided herein further relate to methods of making compounds of Formula I, including precursors thereof. The term “precursor” includes any compound which is employed as a reactant to generate an intermediary or a final product.
  • In one embodiment, provided herein is a method of making a compound of Formula I comprising the structure A-I, wherein, A is an anchor as described above and I is an indicator as described above, comprising, conjugating the anchor with the indicator molecule, e.g., via covalent bond. In one embodiment, the anchor or the indicator may comprise a recognition site (S) or a reaction/labile site (R) for a wound-specific marker, e.g., a wound-specific enzyme such as a hydrolase, and more specifically a protease or glycosidase, as described before. Under this embodiment, the substrate for the wound-specific marker comprises, for example, a hydrolysable substrate, e.g., an amino acid, a sugar, a peptide, a polysaccharide, a nucleic acid, a lipid, or a combination thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the anchor is conjugated to the reporter molecule via a peptide linkage, a glycosidic linkage, an amide linkage, an ester linkage, an ether linkage, an anhydride linkage or a similar linkage. As used herein, a “peptide bond” is formed by the condensation reaction between two amino acids, wherein the acid moiety of one reacts with the amino moiety of the other to produce a peptide bond (—CO—NH—) between the two amino acids. In one embodiment, the peptide bond is cleaved with a wound-specific protease, e.g., elastase, cathepsin G or MAO, or a combination thereof. As used herein, a “glycosidic bond” is formed between the hemiacetal or hemiketal group of a saccharide (or a molecule derived from a saccharide) and the hydroxyl group of some compound such as an alcohol. In one embodiment, the peptide bond is cleaved with a wound-specific glycosidase, e.g., lysozyme.
  • Methods for conjugating reactive moieties to generate glycosidic, peptide, ester, oxyester, amide, amido, oxyamido, ether, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfonamide, or other linkages such as alkoxy, alkylthio, alkylamino, etc. are known in the art and are further described in the examples.
  • In another embodiment, provided herein is a method of making a compound of Formula I comprising the structure A-I, wherein, A and I are each, as described previously.
  • In one embodiment, the A is conjugated to the I via a glycosidic linkage.
  • In another embodiment, the A is conjugated to the I via a hydrophilic or hydrophobic linkage.
  • In one embodiment, the compound of Formula I having the structure A-I is synthesized by first conjugating the anchor region A with the indicator region I to generate the compound of Formula I.
  • In another embodiment, the indicator is first synthesized via genetic recombinant technology, e.g., expressing a nucleic acid encoding the indicator region in a suitable host cell, and combining the indicator with the anchor region. Under this embodiment, in one instance, the indicator region is designed to contain nucleic acid sequences which bind to the anchor region, e.g., hydrophilically or hydrophobically. One representative example of a hydrophilic interaction comprises use of an anchor containing polar groups, e.g., partially deacetylated (e.g., DA of <30%) chitosan, cellulose or carboxym ethyl cellulose (or a derivative thereof), which interacts with a hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I {Trichoderma reesei). Another representative example of a hydrophobic interaction comprises use of an anchor containing non-polar groups, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate (or a derivative thereof), which interacts with a or the hydrophobic binding module from Alcaligenes faecalis Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolym erase (PDB).
  • In one embodiment, peptide indicators, e.g., polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z ; XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z or XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, Land Z are each, as described above, (including variant polypeptides) may be synthesized via host-cell expression systems. Such a method may comprise, for example, generating a construct encoding one or more of the aforementioned polypeptides or variants, placing said construct in a suitable vector, e.g., plasmid vector or baculovirus vector, transfecting a host cell, e.g., E coli or insect Hi5 cells, with the vector; culturing the host cells under suitable conditions to allow expression of said vector; and optionally purifying the expressed polypeptide from the culture.
  • In another embodiment, peptide indicators, e.g., polypeptides comprising the following amino acid sequences: XyAAPXy-Z , XyAAPXy-L-Z , XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-Z or XyAAP(V/F/A)Xy-L-Z ; XyN4N3N2N1Xy-Z or XyN4N3N2N1Xy-L-Z , wherein X, N1, N2, N3, N4, Land Z are each, as described above (including variant polypeptides) may be synthesized using solid-phase peptide synthesis (see, Merrifield et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85 (14): 2149-2154).
  • Still further, the compound of Formula I having the structure A-I may be synthesized in a single reaction chamber or multiple reaction chambers.
    • Diagnostic and Therapeutic Methods:
  • In one embodiment, the compositions, dressing materials, articles, kits and systems described herein are useful in diagnosing or treating wounds, particularly chronic or infected wounds. Although any type of wound may be diagnosed and/or treated, the embodiments are particularly suitable for diagnosing and treating wounds that exude wound fluid. For example, the wound may be a chronic or acute wound. Representative examples of chronic wounds include, e.g., venous ulcers, pressure sores, decubitis ulcers, diabetic ulcers and chronic ulcers of unknown aetiology. Representative examples of acute wounds include, e.g., acute traumatic laceration, perhaps resulting from an intentional operative incision.
  • As used herein, the term “a wound fluid” refers to any wound exudate or other fluid (suitably substantially not including blood) that is present at the surface of the wound, or that is removed from the wound surface by aspiration, absorption or washing. The determining, measuring or quantifying is suitably carried out on wound fluid that has been removed from the body of the patient, but can also be performed on wound fluid in situ. The term “wound fluid” does not normally refer to blood or tissue plasma remote from the wound site. The wound fluid is mammalian wound fluid, suitably human wound fluid.
  • In one embodiment, the diagnostic method comprises contacting a wound with at least one composition comprising a compound of Formula I or Formula II, a dressing material comprising such compounds, article comprising such materials or compounds, kits comprising such materials or compounds, or a system comprising such materials or compounds described herein; and measuring a parameter associated with the wound. In a specific embodiment, the parameter being measured is a level or activity of a wound-specific hydrolase. Particularly, the parameter being measured is the activity of the hydrolase.
  • In the aforementioned embodiments, the measurement may either be made in situ or ex situ. As used herein, the term “in situ” refers to processes, events, objects, or components that are present or take place within the context of the system or device, including, the surrounding environment, for example, the biological material with which the composition, article, system or device is in contact with. As an example, an in situ reaction may refer to the reaction of the various components present in the device (e.g., compound of Formula I or Formula II), including, components provided by the human skin tissue (e.g., wound exudate containing the enzyme). The term is contrasted with ex situ, which refers to outside of the environment.
  • In a second embodiment, the measurement is performed ex situ, e.g., removing the fluid from the wound for analysis in the apparatus or device of the disclosed technology.
  • Suitably, the measurement is made in situ.
  • In one diagnostic embodiment, the method comprising determining a level of a reporter, e.g., a product of a substrate acted upon by a wound-specific enzyme. More specifically, the method comprises determining a level of a hydrolase enzyme product. As used herein, the term “determining” includes measuring a numerical value of the activity or level of said hydrolase; establishing if the activity or level falls above or below a predetermined range; and/or comparing the numerical value of activity or level with a control standard. The control standard may comprise determining a level or activity of the hydrolase in a biopsy material obtained from an unwounded site or from a healthy subject.
  • In one specific embodiment, the term “determining” comprises measuring the parameter (e.g., activity or level) of at least one wound specific protease is selected from the group consisting of MMP-1 (collagenase), MMP-2 (gelatinase A), MMP-3 (stomelysin 1), MMP-8 (neutrophil collagenase), MMP-9 (gelatinase B), human neutrophil elastase (HNE), cathepsin G, urokinase-type plasminogen activator (uPA), and lysozyme, or a combination thereof; establishing if said parameter exceeds a first predetermined threshold; and/or comparing the numerical value of parameter with a control standard. The control standard may comprise determining a parameter of the protease in a biopsy material obtained from an unwounded site or from a healthy subject. In related embodiments, the term “determining” comprises establishing whether a weighted average (weighted sum) of the parameters associated with a plurality of the aforementioned proteases exceeds a predetermined threshold value for said weighted average.
  • In one particular embodiment, the parameter is activity level of the analyte (e.g. a protease) in a wound fluid. Typically, the activity of an individual analyte is expressed in terms units/mL.
  • In another embodiment, the parameter is the level of the analyte (e.g., protease) in a wound fluid. Typically, the term amount is also indicative of the activity of a particular analyte.
  • When used herein, the term “combined amount” or “combined activity” refers to a single numerical value that results from the application of a mathematical function to a plurality of values, for example those amounts obtained for a number of individual analytes. For example, the term “combined amount” or “combined activity” may refer to the sum or product of a group of individual values. Typically, the term “combined amount” or “combined activity” relates to the sum of a group of individual values. For example, in suitable embodiments, the amount of elastase refers to elastase-like activity (e.g., U/mL) and the amount of metalloproteinase (MMP) refers to total concentration of the respective analyte (e.g., in ng/mL).
  • When used herein, the term “quantifying” refers to measuring an absolute numerical quantity of a particular analyte(s) or substrate(s) in a sample, within the margins of experimental error.
  • The term “marker” or “analyte” refers to any chemical entity that is identified or determined using the apparatus, devices, kits or methods defined herein. The markers or analytes determined or identified by the apparatus, devices, kits or methods of the disclosed technology are cleaved products of the aforementioned enzymes.
  • When used herein, the term “predetermined range” refers to a data range or profile that the skilled person would understand is indicative of a particular sub-class of patient. For instance, the predetermined range may be a data range or profile that is typical of a wound that would respond well to a particular wound treatment, such as antibiotic therapy. Alternatively, the predetermined range may suitably refer to a data range that is typical of a wound that would not respond well to a particular wound treatment, such as antibiotic therapy.
  • When used herein, the term “predetermined threshold” refers to a minimum level that the skilled person would determine is indicative of a non-healing wound based on statistical analysis of levels determined for known healing and non-healing wounds, for example as explained further above. For the test to be clinically useful, the threshold should be set at an appropriate level so that non-healing wounds with high protease activity are correctly identified. Increasing the threshold will increase the chance of only non-healing wounds being over the threshold. However, if the threshold is too high, wounds that are non-healing due to a high level of proteases would not be identified and clinically this would mean they would not receive the required protease modulating treatment.
  • When used herein, the term “control standard” or “control” refers to a data set or profile that can be used as a reference or comparison in order to define or normalize another data point or set of data. For instance, the term “control” or “control standard” may be data set or profile that is indicative of a particular sub-class of patient. Suitably, the control standard may be a data set or profile indicative of healing or non-healing wound status.
  • Suitably, in other aspects or embodiments of the disclosed technology, the “control” or “control standard” can be a data set or profile that can be used as a comparative tool to allow a skilled person to determine whether a wound is likely to be responsive or non-responsive to a wound treatment, such as antibiotic therapy. In one embodiment, the control standard is a data set or profile indicative of a patient that does not respond well to wound treatment. Typically, the control standard is a data set or profile indicative of a patient that responds well to wound treatment. Patients that tend to respond well to wound treatment as disclosed herein exhibit lower combined amount or activity of hydrolases than patients that tend not to respond well to the treatment. For example, patients that tend to respond well to wound treatment as disclosed herein exhibit lower combined amounts of at least one wound-specific hydrolase.
  • In one embodiment, the threshold human neutrophil elastase activity is about 5 U/mL to about 30 U/mL, including all values in between, e.g., about 6 U/mL, about 7 U/mL, about 8 U/mL, about 9 U/mL, about 10 U/mL, about 11 U/mL, about 12 U/mL, about 13 U/mL, about 14 U/mL, about 15 U/mL, about 16 U/mL, about 17 U/mL, about 18 U/mL, about 19 U/mL, about 20 U/mL, about 21 U/mL, about 22 U/mL, about 23 U/mL, about 24 U/mL, about 25 U/mL, or more, indicate chronic wound infection.
  • In one specific embodiment, the threshold human neutrophil elastase activity levels of at least 9.6 indicate chronic wound infection. In some embodiments, human neutrophil elastase activity levels of at least 22.9 U/mL indicate chronic wound infection.
  • In one embodiment, the threshold lysozyme activity levels of about 1000 U/mL to about 10000 U/mL, including all values in between, e.g. , about 1100 U/mL, about 1200 U/mL, about 1300 U/mL, about 1400 U/mL, about 1500 U/mL, about 1600 U/mL, about 1700 U/mL, about 1800 U/mL, about 1900 U/mL, about 2000 U/mL, about 2100 U/mL, about 2200 U/mL, about 2300 U/mL, about 2400 U/mL, about 2500 U/mL, about 2600 U/mL, about 2700 U/mL, about 2800 U/mL, about 2900 U/mL, about 3000 U/mL, about 3250 U/mL, about 3500 U/mL, about 3750 U/mL, about 4000 U/mL, about 4250 U/mL, about 4500 U/mL, about 4750 U/mL, about 5000 U/mL, about 5250 U/mL, about 5500 U/mL, about 5750 U/mL, about 6000 U/mL, or more, indicate chronic wound infection. In one specific embodiment, lysozyme activity levels of at least 4800 U/mL indicate chronic wound infection.
  • In one embodiment, the threshold cathepsin G activity levels of about 10 U/mL to about 100 U/mL, including all values in between, e.g., about 15 U/mL, about 20 U/mL, about 25 U/mL, about 30 U/mL, about 35 U/mL, about 40 U/mL, about 45 U/mL, about 50 U/mL, about 55 U/mL, about 60 U/mL, about 65 U/mL, about 70 U/mL, about 75 U/mL, about 80 U/mL, about 85 U/mL, about 90 U/mL, about 95 U/mL, about 100 U/mL, about 1 10 U/mL, about 120 U/mL, or more, indicate chronic wound infection. In some embodiments, cathepsin G activity levels of at least 50 U/mL, at least 40 U/mL, at least 30 U/mL, at least 20 U/mL, at least 15 U/mL or at least 10 U/mL indicates chronic wound infection.
  • Embodiments disclosed herein further relate to treatment of chronic or infected wounds using the compositions, materials, articles, dressings, kits and/or systems described herein. The therapeutic embodiment includes, contacting a composition, material, article, dressing, kit, system or devices of the disclosed technology with a subject in need thereof. Optionally, the method may include determination of whether the subject is responding to the treatment.
  • The skilled person would be able to easily identify whether wounds are “responsive to treatment” or not. In particular, the skilled person will readily be able to determine the levels of the proteases identified in the present claims that are predictive or indicative of a good response or poor response to wound treatment, particularly to treatment with wound dressings comprising oxidized cellulose. The terms “responsive” and “responder(s)” as used herein refer to wounds that are considered to respond well to wound treatment, particularly to treatment with a pharmacological agent, e.g., antibiotics. Similarly, “non-responsive” and “non-responder(s)” refers to wounds that are not considered to respond well to wound treatment, particularly to treatment with the pharmacological agent, e.g., antibiotics. For instance, patients who exhibit better than 50% wound closure after 4 weeks of wound treatment are considered to be responsive to said treatment.
  • In certain embodiments, a patient may be simultaneously diagnosed and treated with the compositions, articles, systems, or devices described herein. When used herein, the term “simultaneously” means performing the stated objectives, e.g., diagnosis and treatment, together.
  • In certain embodiments, a patient may be sequentially diagnosed and treated with the compositions, articles, systems, or devices described herein. When used herein, the term “sequentially” means the stated objectives, e.g., diagnosis and treatment, are temporally or spatially separated, e.g., diagnosis prior to treatment or diagnosis following treatment or a combination thereof, e.g., 1st diagnosis==>treatment==>2nd diagnosis.
  • Embodiments described herein further enable a care giver or a patient to determine quickly and reliably whether a wound is likely to be non-healing, and to select an appropriate therapy based on this determination. For example, non-healing wounds may require the application of special wound dressings such as wound dressings comprising specific therapeutic agents, to promote healing. Accordingly, embodiments described herein further provide methods of treatment of a wound, e.g., chronic or infected wounds, comprising determining whether a wound is healing or non-healing, followed by applying a wound dressing comprising a therapeutic agent to the wound if it is non-healing.
  • Embodiments described herein provide methods and assays for diagnosis or detection of infected wounds. The methods are suitable for the detection of bacterial infectious agents. In one embodiment, the wounds are infected with gram-negative bacteria. Typical gram-negative bacteria include proteobacteria such as E. coli, Salmonella, Pseudomonas, and Helicobacter, and cyanobacteria. When classified in connection with medicine, they include Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Hemophilus influenzae causing the disturbance of the respiratory system, Escherichia coli and Proteus mirabilis causing the disturbance of the urinary system, and Helicobacter pylori and Bacillus Gaertner causing the disturbance of the alimentary system and micrococci such as Neisseria meningitidis, Moraxella catarrhalis, and Neisseria gonorrhea.
  • In another embodiment, the wounds are infected with gram-positive bacteria. By “gram-positive bacteria” is meant a bacterium or bacteria that contain(s) teichoic acid {e.g., lipoteichoic acid and/or wall teichoic acid), or a functionally equivalent glycopolymer {e.g., a rhamnopolysaccharide, teichuronic acid, arabinogalactan, lipomannan, and lipoarabinomannan) in its cell wall. Non-limiting examples of functionally equivalent glycopolymers are described in Weidenmaier et al, Nature, 6:276-287, 2008.
  • The bacteria include pathogenic bacteria that infect mammalian hosts {e.g. , bovine, murine, equine, primate, feline, canine, and human hosts). Examples of such pathogenic bacteria include, e.g., members of a bacterial species such as Bacteroides, Clostridium, Streptococcus, Staphylococcus, Pseudomonas, Haemophilus, Legionella, Mycobacterium, Escherichia, Salmonella, Shigella, Vibrio, or Listeria. Some clinically relevant examples of pathogenic bacteria that cause disease in a human host include, but are not limited to, Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus cereus, Bordetella pertussis, Borrelia burgdorferi, Brucella aborus, Brucella canis, Brucella melitensis, Brucella suis, Campylobacter jejuni, Chlamydia pneumoniae, Chlamydia psittaci, Chlamydia trachomatis, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Corynebacterium diphtheriae, Enterococcus faecalis, vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus faecium, Escherichia coli, enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli (ETEC), enter opathogenic Escherichia coli, E. coli 0157 :H7, Francisella tularensis, Haemophilus influenzae, Helicobacter pylori, Legionella pneumophila, Leptospira interrogans, Listeria monocytogenes, Mycobacterium leprae, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Neisseria meningitidis, Proteus, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Rickettsia rickettsii, Salmonella typhi, Salmonella typhimurium, Shigella sonnei, Staphylococcus aureus, Staphylococcus epidermis, Staphylococcus saprophyticus, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA), vancomycin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (VSA), Streptococcus agalactiae, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus pyogenes, Treponema pallidum, Vibrio cholerae, and Yersinia pestis.
  • In another embodiment, the infectious bacteria is selected from the group consisting of Clostridium difficile, Carbapenem-Resistant Enterobacteriaceae (CK-Klebsiella spp; CK- E. coli), and Neisseria gonorrhoeae. In another embodiment, the infectious bacteria is selected from the group consisting of multi drug-resistant Acinetobacter , drug-resistant Campylobacter, extended spectrum β-Lactamase (ESBL)-producing enterobacteriaceae, vancomycin-resistant enterococcus, multidrug-resistant pseudomonas aeruginosa, drug-resistant non-typhoidal Salmonella, drug-resistant Salmonella enterica serovar Typhi, drug-resistant Shigella, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA), drug-resistant Streptococcus pneumoniae, and drug-resistant Tuberculosis. In another embodiment, the infectious bacteria is selected from the group consisting of vancomycin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus, erythromycin-resistant Group A Streptococcus, clindamycin-Resistant Group B Streptococcus.
  • In certain embodiments, the chronic or infected wounds are found in host subjects. Preferably, the hosts are mammals, e.g., a rodent, a human, a livestock animal, a companion animal, or a non-domesticated or wild animal. In one embodiment, the subject may be a rodent, e.g. a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, etc. In another embodiment, the subject may be a livestock animal. Non-limiting examples of suitable livestock animals may include pigs, cows, horses, goats, sheep, llamas and alpacas. In still another embodiment, the subject may be a companion animal. Non-limiting examples of companion animals may include pets such as dogs, cats, rabbits, and birds. In yet another embodiment, the subject may be a zoo animal. As used herein, a “zoo animal” refers to an animal that may be found in a zoo. Such animals may include non-human primates, large cats, wolves, and bears. In an exemplary embodiment, the subject is a human.
  • In one aspect, provided herein are methods of detecting levels of one or more enzymes in a mammalian wound, the method comprising the steps of: (a) placing the wound dressing material described herein in contact with the mammalian wound; (b) visually comparing the wound dressing material in contact with the mammalian wound with one or more reference samples; and (c) obtaining a qualitative determination of the concentration of reporter molecules in the wound dressing material in contact with the mammalian wound.
  • Preferably, the diagnosis and treatment is conducted in situ. Embodiments described herein therefore allow diagnosis and treatment of wounds in an easy, non-invasive manner. For instance, the diagnosis may be made in real time and the treatment may be applied to the infected wound or to the patient (systemically) and the progress of wound treatment be monitored over real-time, e.g., dissipation of the signal generated by the reporter molecule due to wound-healing.
  • In another aspect, provided herein are methods of detecting protease activity in wounds using a chemical entity, wherein the chemical entity comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of: an anchor region, an enzyme-labile or enzyme-reactive region, and an indicator region. In another aspect, the method compromises placing substrates for MPO, elastase, lysozyme, phospholipase, and catalase on a solid surface such that any reaction is visible to the eye. In another aspect, the method serves to assess a variety of body fluids including wound, tear, vitreal, CSF, airway aspirates or sputum, synovial, blood, plasma, serum, urine, peritoneal, interstitial, subcutaneous, bile, intestinal or similar fluids, via contacting them with a material containing the substrates and assessing the change of the substrates thereafter.
    • EXAMPLES
  • The structures, materials, compositions, and methods described herein are intended to be representative examples, and it will be understood that the scope of the disclosure is not limited by the scope of the examples. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the embodiments and disclosed technology may be practiced with variations on the disclosed structures, materials, compositions and methods, and such variations are regarded as within the ambit of the disclosure.
    • Example 1: Purification of Chitosan
  • Chitosan (10 g, from shrimp shells) was dissolved in 2% acetic acid solution (1 L). The solution was stirred overnight at room temperature and afterwards filtered using a nylon filter (0.45 µηt). Subsequently the pH was adjusted to 8 by the addition of 4 M NaOH to precipitate chitosan. The obtained precipitate was isolated by centrifugation (10000 rpm, 10 min) and thoroughly washed with distilled water until the pH of the washing solution reached ~7. Afterwards the precipitate was washed with 90% ethanol, the remaining ethanol was allowed to evaporate and the chitosan was freeze-dried. The purified product was analyzed by FTIR (1560 cm′1, 1640 cm″1) and material with an approximate DA of 48% was used further
    • Example 2: Selective V-Acetylation of Chitosan
  • Purified chitosan (example 1) was dissolved in 10% acetic acid solution to obtain a 1% chitosan solution. An equal volume of 96% Ethanol was added as well as acetic anhydride. The reaction was stirred for 1 h before the pH was adjusted to 7. The precipitate was isolated by centrifugation and freeze-dried. Subsequently, the obtained acetylated chitosan was several times washed with distilled water and again freeze-dried. The degree of N-acetylation (DA) was analyzed by ^-NMR and FTIR (1560 cm″1, 1640 cm″1) and found to be 40-60% as indicated in the graphic below. Chitosan derivatives with varying DA were produced, but only material with a DA of 48% was further used
    • Example 3: Conjugation of Reactive Black 5 Onto Acetyl-Chitosan
  • Acetylated chitosan (DA = 48%, 100 mg; Example 2) was suspended in distilled water before a 0.5% (w/w) solution of reactive black 5 was added (0.5 mL). A solution consisting of 2.5% (w/v) Na2SO4 and 1% (w/v) Na2CO3 in distilled water was added, and the mixture was incubated at 25° C. for 10 min. After a subsequent incubation step at 65° C., the solid was isolated by centrifugation (7800 rpm, 5 min). The precipitate was washed with distilled water until the washing solution remained colorless and subsequently freeze dried. The dye content was determined measuring the unbound reactive black 5 after the reaction was completed. The dye was largely associated with the precipitate and high MW fraction. Degree of acylation was 48%.
  • Percent dye solution applied in the reaction Dye Content [% w/w]
    0.4 4.58
    0.2 2.55
    0.1 1.33
    • Example 4: Hydrolysis of Chitosan to Obtain Chitooligosaccharides
  • Purified chitosan (2.5 g; Example 1) was dissolved in acetate buffer (100 mM, pH 5) to obtain a 1% chitosan solution. Afterwards chitosanase from Streptomyces griseus (1 unit) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 d on a thermomixer (37° C., 150 rpm). The solution was concentrated in vacuo and non-oligomeric chitosan was precipitated using 1 volumetric equivalent of 96% ethanol. The supernatant was concentrated again and subsequently oligosaccharides were precipitated by the addition of 9 volumetric equivalents of acetone. The oligosaccharides were isolated by centrifugation, several times washed with 50% acetone in water, and freeze-dried without prior washing. The degree of polymerization was determined by TLC and SEC (TSK gel G5000 PWXL, Pullulan as standard), indicating a mean MW of 5360 associated to a degree of polymerization of ca. 24.
  • Number molecular weight (Mn) Polydispersity Index (PDI) Degree of polymerization (DP) expected from SEC data
    5360 2.51 - 30
    • Example 5: Selective N-Acetylation of Chitooligosaccharides
  • A chitooligosaccharide mixture (7 g) (example 4) was dissolved in distilled water (200 mL) before 96% ethanol (400 mL) was added. The solution was stirred for 5 min and acetic anhydride (4.12 mL, 1 molar equiv. calc. to free amines) was added. The mixture was stirred for further 2 h at room temperature before the pH was adjusted to 7 with a 10%) NaOH solution. The solvent was removed, and the remaining precipitate was freeze-dried. The degree of N-acetylation was analyzed by 1H-NMR, FTIR (1560 cm-1, 1640 cm-1) and dye content (photometrically, 626 nm). The degree of N-acetylation was found to be 48 %.
    • Example 6: Conjugation of Toluidine O Blue Onto Chitooligosaccharides
  • Acetylated chitooligosaccharides (DA = 48%, 7 g; Example 5) were dispersed in 1% acetic acid (500 mL). Afterwards toluidine O blue (3.9 g) was added and allowed to dissolve before 1ml of a solution of glutaraldehyde was added. The mixture was stirred for 2 h and the pH was adjusted to 7 using 10% NaOH. The solid fraction was isolated by filtration, several times washed with distilled water, and freeze-dried. The degree of N-acetylation was analyzed by 1H-NMR, FTIR and photometrically. Degree of acetylation was found to be 48%. Dye content was found to be 0.74.
  • Lysozyme digestion of dyed chitosan derivatives. The synthesized substrates were investigated in different media: potassium phosphate buffer (66 mM, pH 6.2) as well as artificial wound fluid containing 5000 U of lysozyme from hen egg white, and human wound fluid from infected wounds (see FIGS. 5 and 6 ).
  • Two milligrams of the lysozyme substrates was suspended in the respective test medium and incubated at 35° C. For time measurements, the sample was briefly centrifuged, 200 µL of the supernatant was transferred to a 96-well plate and photometrically analyzed at the absorption maximum of the respective dye. After the analysis, the withdrawn sample was returned in the reaction vial and further incubated.
  • The composition of the artificial wound fluid contained human serum albumin (2%), sodium chloride (0.36%), sodium bicarbonate, (0.05%), sodium citrate (0.02%), sodium lactate (0.1%), glucose (0.1%), calcium chloride dihydrate (0.01%), magnesium chloride (0.02%), and urea (0.01%).
    • Example 7: Synthesis of Indol/Chitooligomer Based Substrates for the Detection Of Wound Infection. Synthesis of a (GlcNAc)n - Indol (n = 4-6) Acetolvsis of Chitin
  • Chitin (2 g) was suspended in cooled acetic anhydride (20 mL) and cone, sulufuric acid (2.3 mL) is added dropwise. The suspension was stirred overnight and allowed to reach room temperature. The solution was neutralized with sodium acetate (12 g) after dilution with ice cold water. The solution was filtered and the filtrate was extracted with cholorform. The chloroform phase was washed with bicarbonate, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Resulting chito oligosaccharides (COSs) of varying degree of polymerization (DP) were fractionized by MPLC (S1O2, 40 g) using a chloroform:ethanol gradient (98:2 → 90: 10).
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00001
    • Example 8: 1-chloro,3-O,6-O-Diacetyl-4-O-[3-O,4-O,6-O-triacetyl-2- (acetylamino)-2-deoxy-P-D-glucopyranosyl]-2-(acetylamino)-2-deoxy-α-D-glucopyranoside (Compound 7)
  • Chitobiose octaacetate 2 (20 mg) was suspended in acetyl chloride and the solution was saturated with HCl gas and stirred for 30 h. Afterwards the solution was evaporated and used without further purification.
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00002
  • Chemical Formula: C28H4oN2017 Chemical Formula: C26H37CIN20 5 Molecular Weight: 676,63 Molecular Weight: 653,03
    • Example 9: 1-(5-Bromo-4-chloro-N-acetyl-3-indolyl),3-0,6-0-Diacetyl-4-0-[3-0,4-O,6-O-triacetyl-2-(acetylamino)-2-deoxy-β-D-glucopyranosyl]-2-(acetylamino)-2-deoxy-α-D-glucopyranoside (Compound 13)
  • Compound 7 (0,028 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (2.5 mL), 11 (82.87 mg) was added and dissolved. Afterwards of tetrabutyl-ammonium hydrogen sulphate (9.7 mg) and 1 mL of 1 M potassium carbonate solution were added. Under vigorous stirring the reaction was left for 1 h at room temperature. The organic phase was separated and the solvent was removed under pressure.
  • A 12 g MPLC column was used for the separation with a gradient of pure chloroform to 15 parts chloroform to one part ethanol over 10 column volumes. Then 5 column volumes 15 parts chloroform to one part ethanol were used isocratic. The final flushing step was 10 parts chloroform to one part ethanol for 5 column volumes.
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00003
    • Example 10: N-Acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc) Oxazoline 15
  • GlcNAc 14 (100 mg) was dissolved in H20 (1.8 mL) and triethylamine (0.6 mL) was added. The solution was chilled in an ice bath prior to the addition of 2-chloro-1, 3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride (DMC, 230 mg). The solution was stirred for 30 min. DMC and TEA were removed by MPLC (CI 8) using H 20 as eluent. The product fractions were pooled and concentrated in vacuo.
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00004
    • GlcNAc Dimer (Compound 17)
  • Compound 15 (27 mg) was dissolved in a sodium phosphate buffer (50 mM, pH 8,0) and chitinase (25 mU/mL) was added. The solution was incubated and the reaction progress was monitored by TLC (CHCL3 :MeOH 2: 1).
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00005
    • (GlcNAc)2 - Indol (Compound 18)
  • Compound 15 (27 mg) and GlcNAc - Indol 16 were dissolved in a sodium phosphate buffer (50 mM, pH 8.0) and chitinase (25 mU/mL) was added. The solution was incubated and the reaction progress was monitored by TLC (CHCL3 MeOH 2: 1).
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00006
    • Example 11: 2-Acetamido-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranosyl Chloride
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00007
  • N-Acetyl-β-D-glucosamine tetraacetate (391 mg, 1.00 mmol) was suspended in acetyl chloride (7 mL) while cooling with an ice bath. The mixture was degassed with argon for 5 min. Afterwards MeOH (1.00 mL) was added dropwise over a period of two hours. During the first 15 min of MeOH addition the reaction mixture was degassed with argon; then it was kept under argon atmosphere (stirred in ice bath all the time). After complete addition of the MeOHl the reaction mixture was stirred additional 10 min with cooling in an ice bath. Afterwards it was allowed to warm to RT and was stirred at RT overnight. The mixture was concentrated to dryness, taken up in DCM (10 mL), concentrated to dryness again, taken up in diisopropyl ether (15 mL) and concentrated to dryness once more to yield a yellow solid which was used without further purification.
    • Example 12: (jV-Acetyl-5-bromo-4-chloro-indol-3-yl) 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (12a) and (5-Bromo-4-chloro-indol-3-yl) 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (12b)
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00008
  • DMF (dry, 4 mL) was degassed with argon for 5 min before 1-Acetyl-5-bromo-4-chloro-3-indolylacetate (100 mg, 0.30 mmol) was added. The mixture was degassed with argon for additional 5 min, then NaOMe (51 mg, 0.94 mmol) was added in one portion. Stirring at RT while degassing with argon was continued for 25 min, afterwards the 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-<3-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranosyl chloride (110 mg, 0.30 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred at RT under protection from light (aluminium-foil) while degassing with argon for 1 h, then it was stirred under argon atmosphere at RT under protection from light overnight. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and co-evaporated with toluene (3 x 20 mL). Afterwards it was taken up in EtOAc (30 mL) and was filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to dryness to yield 150 mg of the crude products. ESI-MS (positive): [M+Na]+: 597 (14b) and [M+Na]+: 639 (12a).
    • Example 13: (Indox-3-ylic Acid Methyl Ester) 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-0-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00009
  • 2-Acetamido-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranosyl chloride (1.00 mmol, Example 13), TBAHS (339 mg, 1.00 mmol) and methyl -3 -hydroxy-1 H-indole-2-carboxylate (210 mg, 1.10 mmol) were dissolved in DCM (dry, 10 mL) at RT. A K2C03 -solution (12 mL) was then added in one portion and the mixture was stirred at RT for 2.5 h. DCM (20 mL) and water (20 mL) were added. After extraction the organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to dryness. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (30.0 g silica gel, eluent: 5 % MeOH in DCM) 250 mg of the pure product and 92 mg of the product with impurities were isolated. ESI-MS (positive): [M+Na]+: 543, [M+ K]+: 559.
    • Example 14: (Indox-3-ylic Acid Methyl Ester) 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00010
  • (Indox-3-ylic acid methyl ester) 2-acetamido-3,4,6-tri-0-acetyl-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (250 mg, 0.48 mmol) was suspended in MeOH (7 mL) at RT. NaOMe (catalytic amount) was added and the mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h 45 min. The precipitate was filtered off. Since MS of precipitate and filtrate were identical they were combined again and concentrated to dryness. The product was suspended in DCM MeOH (9: 1, 10 mL) and kept in the fridge for 3 h. The colorless solid was filtered off to yield 90 mg of a colorless solid. The filtrate was concentrated to dryness again to yield 105 mg of a brownish solid. Both, solid and filtrate were used without further purification. ESI-MS (positive): [M+Na]+: 417.
    • Example 15: (Indox-3-ylic Acid) 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00011
  • (Indox-3-ylic acid methyl ester) 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (105 mg, 0.25 mmol) was suspended in a NaOH-solution (0.1 M in water, 10 mL) and stirred at RT for 3.5 h. Reaction mixture was concentrated to dryness and the product was used without further purification. ESI-MS (positive): [M+Na]+: 403.
    • Example 16: (N-Acetyl-indol-3-yl) 2-deoxy-3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-D- Glucopyranoside
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00012
  • (Indox-3-ylic acid) 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranoside (105 mg, 0.25 mmol), AgOAc (125 mg, 0.75 mmol), K2C03 (207 mg, 1.50 mmol), and Ac20 (6 mL) were heated to 1 18° C. (oil bath temperature) for 1 h. Then the reaction mixture was allowed to cool down to RT. DCM (40 mL) and water (30 mL) were added. After extraction the organic phase was washed with sat. NaHC03-sol. (3 × 30 mL), dried (Na2S04), and concentrated to dryness. ESI- MS (positive): [M+Na]+: 527.
    • Example 17: Peracetyl-oligo-β-D-1,4-glucosamine
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00013
  • Pyridine (500 µL) and acetic anhydride (500 µL) were added to chitosan oligomers (mixture of the oligomers and sodium acetate in a ratio of 5 to 4.1) (101 mg, chain length between 1 and 4) and the mixture was shaken at RT overnight. Since not all material was dissolved the mixture was shaken overnight again. Afterwards it was kept in the fridge for ten days. DCM (20 mL) was added and the mixture was poured on ice cold citric acid (10 % in water, 20 mL) After extraction the organic phase was washed with ice cold citric acid (10 % in water, 20 mL), followed by brine (15 mL). The organic phase was dried (Na2S04) and concentrated to dryness (64 mg crude product). The crude product was used without further purification. MS data: . ESI-MS (positive): [M+Na]+ (dimer): 699, [M+Na]+ (trimer): 986.
    • Example 18: 1-Chloro-peracetyl-oligo-β-D-1,4-glucosamine
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00014
  • The crude product of Example 19 was dissolved in acetyl chloride (1 mL) under argon atmosphere and cooled in an ice bath. MeOH (55 µL) was added dropwise within approximately 1 min. After complete addition the mixture was stirred in the ice bath for additional 10 min, then the solution was allowed to warm to RT; additional acetyl chloride (5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at RT overnight. Afterwards it was concentrated to dryness, taken up in dichloromethane (5 mL), concentrated to dryness again, suspended in diisopropyl ether and concentrated to dryness another time to yield 55 mg crude product. The crude product was used for the next step without further purification.
    • Example 19: 0-(2-Carboxymethyl-3-indoxyl)-peracetyl-oligo-β-D-1,4- Glucosamin
  • Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00015
  • The crude product of example 20 (55 mg crude product), tetrabutylammonium hydrogen sulfate (20 mg), and methyl 3-hydroxy-1H-indole-2-carboxylate (13 mg) were dissolved in DCM (dry, 1.5 mL) at RT.; K2C03 (1 M in water, 1 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at RT overnight. DCM (20 mL) and water (15 mL) were added. After extraction the organic phase was dried (Na2S04) and concentrated to dryness (39 mg crude product). The crude product was purified by column chromatography. Eluent: 5% MeOH in DCM. Isolated: 1.8 mg product with one sugar moiety, 1.2 mg product with two sugar moieties. ESI-MS (positive): [M+Na]+ (monomer): 543, [M+Na+] (dimer): 830.
    • Example 20. Synthesis of Phenol/Chitosan/Laccases Based Substrates for The Detection of Wound Infection. N-acetyl Chitosan Grafted With Sinapic Acid (SA).
  • N-acetyl chitosan was dissolved in sodium acetate buffer (100 mM, pH 5.0) to obtain a 1% solution (w/v). 20 mL of this solution were mixed with 20 mL of a sinapic acid solution in ethanol (20 mM). EDC and NHS were added (1.3 g each) and the solution was stirred for 2 h. The reaction was stopped by adding NaOH (1 M) drop-wise, the resulting precipitate was washed with water until no phenol could be detected anymore in the washing solution. Afterwards the product was freeze dried.
    • N-acetyl Chitosan / Aminomethoxyphenol Nanoparticles
  • N-acetyl chitosan was dissolved in sodium acetate buffer (100 mM, pH 5.0) and aminomethoxyphenol (dissolved in ethanol) was added to obtain a total concentration of 20 mM. 2.3 mL of this solution were mixed with 1.6 mL of dodecane and applied to a sonicator to produce an emulsion.
    • Hydrolysis of SA Grafted N-acetyl Chitosan by Lysozyme
  • SA grafted N-acetyl chitosan (5 mg) was suspended in 500 potassium phosphate buffer (62 mM, pH 6.2) containing lysozyme (0.1 mg/mL). The solution was incubated for one hour. The reaction supernatant was incubated with laccase (1 U/mL) and an immediate color change was observed.
    • Hydrolysis of N-acetyl Chitosan / Aminomethoxyphenol Nanoparticles by Lysozyme
  • An N-acetyl chitosan / aminomethoxyphenol nanoparticle emulsion (50 µL) was mixed with 450 µL potassium phosphate buffer (62 mM, pH 6.2) containing lysozyme (0.1 mg/mL) and laccase (1 U/mL). The nanoparticles were destructed after 15 min (yielding a clear solution) developing strong colour.
    • Example 21. Dying of Peptidoglycan for the Detection of Wound Infection
  • Different reactive dyes can be used for the dying of peptidoglycan (Table 1). Preferable are reactive dyes containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group such as reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5 or reactive orange 16. Alternatively dyes containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group such as reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19 and reactive brown 10 can be used. Dyes were evaluated by consideration of their degree of reaction with peptidoglycan and the speed with which the dye was released when the dyed peptidoglycan was incubated with lysozyme (see earlier section of Example 7 for dying and Example 6 for digestion assay).
  • TABLE 1
    Evaluation of reactive dyes
    Dyes Evaluation
    Reactive black 5
    Remazol brilliant blue
    Reactive green
    Reactive brown
    • Peptidoglycan Dying Procedure 1 :
  • Preparation and sterilization of peptidoglycan for staining with reactive dyes:
  • Micrococcus lysodeicticus cell broth from an animal free fermentation was centrifuged at 4000 g and 4° C. for 15 min to gain a wet cell pellet. The cell pellet (20 g) was washed twice with ddH20 (800 ml) to get rid of any remaining media components (constant centrifugation conditions).
  • The wet Micrococcus lysodeicticus cell pellet (20 g, we dry ration 4: 1, 5 g dry M. lysodeicticus cells) were suspended in 1 M HCl (80 g) and incubated for 1 h at 60° C. and 720 rpm. The sterilized and interrupted cells were then centrifuged at 4000 g and 4° C. for 15 min. The peptidoglycan pellet was resuspended and washed with Na-Phosphate buffer (400 ml, 100 mM, pH 7.0) to adjust the pH of the suspension to a neutral pH and to get rid of cell components of the disruption process (constant centrifugation conditions). Another washing step with 500 ml of ddH20 was carried out to get rid of disrupted cell components and buffer salts. The gained pellet after the last washing step was ready to use for the staining procedure.
  • Peptidoglycan (50 mg), reactive black 5 (5 mg), Na2C03 (10 mg), and Na2S04 (25 mg) were dissolved/suspended in double-distilled water (ddH20) (2 mL). After shaking for 1 min, the reaction mixture was incubated at 25° C. and 750 rpm for 10 min followed by a second incubation step at 65° C. and 750 rpm-shaking for another 30 min.
  • The dyed peptidoglycan was centrifuged at 10000 g for 10 min. The supernatant was collected, and the pellet was re-suspended in ddH20 and centrifuged again at 10000 g for 10 min. The washing procedure was repeated until the supernatant was clear. Different buffers or organic solvents like ethanol could be used for the washing procedure. The absorbance levels of all supernatants were measured at 597 nm. The supernatant was defined as clear, if the absorbance was below a value of 0.05. The amount of unbound dye in the supernatant was calculated using a calibration curve and the measured absorbance levels of the supernatants. Consequentially, the amount of peptidoglycan-bound dye was calculated. The dyed peptidoglycan was stored at 4-8° C. for a maximum of 2 wks or dried via lyophilization for a longer storage period.
    • Peptidoglycan Dying Procedure 2:
  • Reactive black 5 (200 mg) and peptidoglycan (300 mg) were dissolved in ddH20 (40 mL). The reaction solution was stirred at 50° C. for 30 min. During the 30 min, Na2S04 (1 g) was added every 6 min (total amount: 4 g). After the first 30 min incubation, Na3P04 (200 mg) was added to the reaction solution, which was stirred again for 30 min at 50° C.
  • The dyed peptidoglycan was centrifuged at 10000 g for 10 min. The supernatant was collected, and the pellet was re-suspended in ddH20 and was again centrifuged at 10000 g for 10 min. The washing procedure was repeated until the supernatant was clear. Different buffers or organic solvents like ethanol could be used for the washing procedure. The absorbance levels of all supernatants were measured at 597 nm. The supernatant was defined as clear, if the absorbance was below a value of 0.05. The amount of unbound dye in the supernatant was calculated using a calibration curve and the measured absorbance levels of the supernatants. Consequentially, the amount of peptidoglycan-bound dye was calculated. The dyed peptidoglycan was stored at 4-8° C. where it appears to be stable or dried via lyophilisation.
    • Peptidoglycan Dying Procedure 3:
  • Peptidoglycan (150 mg, dry weight) was suspended in ddH20 (20 ml) and heated to 50° C. The reaction was started by the addition of reactive black 5 (7 different variants with different amounts of reactive dye according to table X). The reaction was stirred (210 rpm) at 50° C. for 1 h. After the first 10 min Na2C03 was added periodically every 10 minutes (5 x 100 mg, after 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 min reaction time). The reaction mixture was stirred for another 10 min after the last addition of Na2C03. The reaction solution was centrifuged at 4000 g at 4° C. for 15 min. The pellet was resuspended and washed in ddH20 (40 g) 3 times and always centrifuged as before. Different buffers or organic solvents like ethanol could be used for the washing procedure. All the supernatants were weight out and were used for the determination of the unbound dye concentration and in further consequence for the determination of the staining degree. Therefore, 1 ml of each supernatant was transferred into a 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube and centrifuged for 5 min at 10000 g and ambient temperature. 3 times 100 µL of each supernatant were transferred into a 96-well plate and the absorbance levels were measured at 597 nm. The supernatant was defined as clear, if the absorbance was below a value of 0.05. The amount of unbound dye in the supernatant was calculated using a calibration curve and the measured absorbance levels of the supernatants. The percentages of bound dye are listed in table 2. The percentage of reactive black 5 of the whole stained peptidoglycan construct (LPG-RB5) is also listed in Table 2.
  • TABLE 2
    Different variants of stained peptidoglycan
    Variants Amount Reactive Black 5 (mg) % Reactive Black 5 bound % RB5 of LPG-RB5
    LPG-RB5-05 150 74 45
    LPG-RB5-06 200 64 50
    LPG-RB5-07 75 89 34
    LPG-RB5-08 50 92 22
    LPG-RB5-09 25 92 12
    LPG-RB5-10 10 88 5
    • Example 22. Lysozyme Activity Measurement for the Detection of Wound Infection Dyed Peptidoglycan:
  • One suspension of every LPG-RB5 variant (Example 21) (1.5 mg/ml) was prepared (NaCl— solution, 0.9%) and divided into 61 ml samples each (3 positive, 3 negative). The positive controls were mixed with a Lysozyme stock solution (10 µl, 1,000,000 U/ml) to a final Lysozyme activity of 10,000 U/ml. All samples were incubated at 37° C. for 60 min and centrifuged afterwards (5 min, 10000 g). A development of blue colour was detected in the supernatants. 100 µL of each supernatant was transferred into a 96-well plate and the absorbance was measured at 597 nm. The absorbances of the supernatants of the different variants are shown in FIG. 8 . The influence of the staining degree is shown in FIG. 9 .
  • Calculation of dye: PG ratio:
    • Amount of unbound dye:
    • x = AbsWL − d k ∗ z ∗ y
    • AbsWL... measured absorbance of different washing solutions
    • d. . . intercept of linear regression of dye calibration curve
    • k. .. slope of linear regression of dye calibration curve
    • z. .. Dilution factor of measured washing solution
    • y. .. Volume of washing solution (ml)
    • x. . . amount of RB5 in washing solution (mg)
    • Amount of bound dye:
    • a = (amount used dye)— amount unbound dye)
    • a. .. amount of bound dye
    • Consideration of dye content in dye container:
    • c = a * 0.85
    • c. .. amount of bound dye (mg) (dye content considered)
    • 0.85... 85% dye content
    • a... amount of bound dye (mg)
    • Consideration of weight loss due to leaving groups of reactive dye Reactive Black 5):
    • f = c * 0.76
    • f... final amount of bound dye (mg) ( -reactive groups)
    • c. .. amount of bound dye (mg) (dye content considered)
    • Ratio between PG and RB5:
    • R = L − f f
    • R... ratio between pure PG and RB5
    • L.. . Yield of dry PG-RB5 (mg)
    • f... final amount of bound dye (mg)
    Example 23: Colorimetric Enzyme Assay for Detection of Myeloperoxidase Activity
  • Reagents like 3,4-diamino benzoic acid, 3-amino-4-hydroxy benzoic acid, 4-amino- 3-hydroxy benzoic acid, 2,3-diamino benzoic acid, 3,4-dihydroxy benzoic acid, 2-amino phenol, 2-amino-3-methoxy benzoic acid, Methyl-3,4-diaminibenzoate and 2-amino-4-methoxy phenol can be used for the detection of MPO activity (Table 2). Assay conditions: 1 mg/mL DABA or equivalent was dissolved in 100 mM sodium-phosphate-buffer (pH 6.4). H2O2 was added to a final concentration of 5 mM. The substrate/H 202 solution (95 µL) was added to a 96-well microtiter plate along with 5 µL of a MPO-containing sample. The solution turned brownish upon MPO oxidation. The reaction was monitored at 450 nm using a standard photometric plate reader.
  • TABLE 3
    Evaluation of novel MPO substrates
    Substrates Evaluation
    3,4-Diamino benzoic acid +++
    3-Amino-4-hydroxy benzoic acid ++
    4-Amino-3-hydroxy benzoic acid +++
    2,3-Diamino benzoic acid ++
    3,4-Dihydroxy benzoic acid +
    2-Amino phenol ++
    2-Amino-3-methoxy benzoic acid +
    Methyl-3,4-diaminibenzoate +++
    2-Amino-4-methylphenol +
    • Example 24. Construction of Human Leukocyte Elastase (HLE) and Human Cathepsin G (CatG) Substrates with Polymer Binding Sequences
  • Chimeric gene variants were synthesized encoding one to four concatemers of the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module (CBM) from Cellobiohydrolase I (Trichoderma reesei), or the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) from Polyhydroxyalkanoate depolymerase (Alcaligenes faecalis). Chimeric variants with the hydrophilic binding module (CBM) enable the attachment onto cellulose based filter papers/fabrics, in contrast, chimeric variants with the hydrophobic binding module (PDM) enable the attachment onto PET (Polyethylene terephthalate) based strips.
  • In order to confer a proper recombinant protein expression, variants of TrxA- ElaSub 1_CBM_His fusion proteins were designed. The construct consists of the trxA (thioredoxin) gene, a short spacer sequence that encodes a 6xHis-Tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] and the enterokinase cleavage site (Asp Asp Asp Lys) [SEQ ID NO: 2] for separating the TrxA fusion tag from the protein of interest. Subsequently to the enterokinase site, the newly designed elasub1_cbm coding sequence was introduced into the construct. The elasub1 sequence encodes for amino acids that expose a lot of functional groups like thiol-, hydroxyl-, amino- or carboxy groups. These amino acids (cysteine, lysine, arginine, glutamine, asparagine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, serine, threonine or tyrosine) should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptides. The coding sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) was located directly downstream to the elasub1 sequence, termed elasub1_cbm. Additionally, two or more recognition/cleavage sites for HLE (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val) [SEQ ID NO: 3] or for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] were introduced into the elasub1 coding sequence. To visualize the action of HLE or CatG, certain dye molecules (e.g. Remazol Brilliant Blue), comprising positive or negative charged groups were attached to the functional groups of the amino acids listed above. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptides through HLE or CatG leads to the release of peptide fragments that carry the coupled dyes or pro-dyes. Through ionic exchange, the enzyme reactions (HLE or CatG) can be visualized by binding the released peptide fragments through the charged groups of the dye. For the purification of the chimeric peptide, an additional repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag (6xHis) [SEQ ID NO: 1] was attached to the C-terminal end of to the elasub1_cbm fusion construct.
  • DNA sequence of the fusion construct trxA_elasub1_cbm_his [SEQ ID NO: 8]; sequences from the expression vector pET32b(+) are undelined:
  • ATGAGCGATAAAATTATTCACCTGACTGACGACAGTTTTGACACGGATGT ACTCAAAGCGGACGGGGCGATCCTCGTCGATTTCTGGGCAGAGTGGTGCG GTCCGTGCAAAATGATCGCCCCGATTCTGGATGAAATCGCTGACGAATAT CAGGGCAAACTGACCGTTGCAAAACTGAACATCGATCAAAACCCTGGCAC TGCGCCGAAATATGGCATCCGTGGTATCCCGACTCTGCTGCTGTTCAAAA ACGGTGAAGTGGCGGCAACCAAAGTGGGTGCACTGTCTAAAGGTCAGTTG AAAGAGTTCCTCGACGCTAACCTGGCCGGTTCTGGTTCTGGCCATATGCA CCATCATCATCATCATTCTTCTGGTCTGGTGCCACGCGGTTCTGGTATGA AAGAAACCGCTGCTGCTAAATTCGAACGCCAGCACATGGACAGCCCAGAT CTGGGTACCGACGACGACGACAAGGCCATGGGTGGTAGCTGCGGTGGTGG
    TGGTAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGGTGGTGGCGGTTCAGCTGCTCCTGTGGGTG
    GCGGTGGTTCACCGCCTGGTGGTAATCGTGGTACAACCACCACCCGTCGT
    CCGGCAACCACAACCGGTAGCAGTCCGGGTCCGACCCAGAGCCATTATGG
    TCAGTGTGGTGGTATTGGTTATAGCGGTCCGACCGTTTGTGCAAGCGGCA
    CCACCTGTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTATTATAGCCAGTGTCTGCTCGAGCAC
    CACCACCACCACCACTGA
  • Protein sequence of the TrxA_ElaSub1_CBM-His fusion protein [SEQ ID NO: 9]:
  • MSDKIIHLTDDSFDTDVLKADGAILVDFWAEWCGPCKMIAPILDEIADEY
    QGKLTVAKLNIDQNPGTAPKYGIRGIPTLLLFKNGEVAATKVGALSKGQL
    KEFLDA LAGSGSGHMHHHHHHSSGLVPRGSGMKETAAAKFERQHMDSPD
    LGTDDDDKAMGGSCGGGGSAAPVGGGGSAAPVGGGGSPPGGNRGTTTTRR
    PATTTGSSPGPTQSHYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQVLNPYYSQCLLEH
    HHHHH*
  • Protein sequence of the native ElaSub1_CBM-His fusion protein [SEQ ID NO: 10]:
  • MGGSCGGGGSAAPVGGGGSAAPVGGGGSPPGG RGTTTTRRPATTTGSSP
    GPTQSHYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQVLNPYYSQCLLEHHHHHH*
  • The following variants with the hydrophilic binding module were designed as shown in Table 4.
  • TABLE 4
    Variants with the hydrophilic binding module (CBM) as well as with possible hydrophobic binding modules
    variant construct (name) binding unit cutting unit purification reaction site color
    1 ElaSub1_CBM CBM HLE thiol group (n=1) blue
    2 CatGSub1_CBM CBM CatG thiol group (n=1) blue
    3 ElaSub1_CBM His CBM HLE His-Tag thiol group (n=1) blue
    variant construct (name) binding unit cutting unit purification reaction site color
    4 CatGSub1_CBM His CBM CatG His-Tag thiol group (n=1) blue
    5 ElaSub2_CBM CBM HLE thiol group (n=3) blue
    6 CatGSub2_CBM CBM CatG thiol group (n=3) blue
    7 ElaSub2_CBM His CBM HLE His-Tag thiol group (n=3) blue
    8 CatGSub2_CBM His CBM CatG His-Tag thiol group (n=3) blue
    9 ElaSub1_PDM PDM HLE thiol group (n=1) blue
    10 CatGSub1_PDM PDM CatG thiol group (n=1) blue
    11 ElaSub1_PDM His PDM HLE His-Tag thiol group (n=1) blue
    12 CatGSub1_PDM His PDM CatG His-Tag thiol group (n=1) blue
    13 ElaSub2_PDM PDM HLE thiol group (n=3) blue
    14 CatGSub2_PDM PDM CatG thiol group (n=3) blue
    15 ElaSub2_PDM His PDM HLE His-Tag thiol group (n=3) blue
    16 CatGSub2_PDM His PDM CatG His-Tag thiol group (n=3) blue
    • Variant 1: ElaSub1_CBM.
  • The ElaSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub1 protein sequence, termed ElaSub1_CBM. Within this region a codon for cysteine is inserted. The thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, two recognition/cleavage sites for HLE (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 3] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of HLE certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteine. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye. Through ionic exchange, the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
    • Variant 2: CatGSub1_CBM.
  • The CatGSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub1 protein sequence, termed CatGSub1_CBM. Within this region a codon for cysteine is inserted. The thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, two recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of CatG certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteine. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye. Through ionic exchange, the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
    • Variant 3: ElaSub1_CBM_His.
  • The ElaSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub 1 protein sequence, termed ElaSub1_CBM. Within this region a codon for cysteine is inserted. The thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, two recognition/cleavage sites for HLE (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 3] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of HLE certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteine. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye. Through ionic exchange, the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye. For the purification of this chimeric variant, a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
    • Variant 4: CatGSub1 CBM His.
  • The CatGSub 1 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSubl protein sequence, termed CatGSub 1 CBM. Within this region a codon for cysteine is inserted. The thiol group of the cysteine should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, two recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of CatG certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteine. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide fragment that carries the coupled dye or pro-dye. Through ionic exchange, the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment through the charged groups of the dye. For the purification of this chimeric variant, a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in table 4.
    • Variant 5: ElaSub2_CBM.
  • The ElaSub2 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub2 protein sequence, termed ElaSub2_CBM. Within this region three codons for cysteine are inserted. The thiol group of the cysteines should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, three recognition/cleavage sites for HLE (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 3] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of HLE certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteines. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye. Through ionic exchange, the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 4.
    • Variant 6: CatGSub2_CBM.
  • The CatGSub2_CBM construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the CatGSub2 protein sequence, termed CatGSub2 CBM. Within this region three codons for cysteine are inserted. The thiol group of the cysteines should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, three recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of CatG certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteines. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye. Through ionic exchange, the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 4.
    • Variant 7: ElaSub2_CBM_His.
  • The ElaSub2 construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the ElaSub2 protein sequence, termed ElaSub2_CBM. Within this region three codons for cysteine are inserted. The thiol group of the cysteines should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, three recognition/cleavage sites for HLE (Ala-Ala-Pro- Val) [SEQ ID NO: 3] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of HLE certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteines. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through HLE should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye. Through ionic exchange, the HLE enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye. For the purification of this chimeric variant, a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 4.
    • Variant 8: CatGSub2_CBM_His
  • The CatGSub2_CBM construct encodes a stretch of mainly hydrophilic amino acids. The sequence for the natural hydrophilic binding module (CBM) is located directly downstream to the CatGSub2 protein sequence, termed CatGSub2_CBM. Within this region three codons for cysteine are inserted. The thiol group of the cysteines should facilitate the coupling of dyes or pro-dyes to the chimeric peptide. Additionally, three recognition/cleavage sites for CatG (Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe) [SEQ ID NO: 4] are introduced into the hydrophilic spacer region. To visualize the action of CatG certain dye molecules comprising positive or negative charged groups can be attached to the thiol group of the cysteines. Enzymatic cleavage of the chimeric peptide through CatG should lead to the release of a peptide/peptides fragment/fragments that carry the coupled dye or pro- dye. Through ionic exchange, the CatG enzyme reaction should be visualized by binding the released peptide fragment/fragments through the charged groups of the dye. For the purification of this chimeric variant, a repetitive sequence stretch encoding a His-tag [SEQ ID NO: 1] is attached subsequently to the sequence encoding the carbohydrate binding module. The amino sequence of this variant is shown in Table 5.
  • Variant 9 to variant 16 could be designed identically as variant 1 to variant 8 with the exception of changing the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module (CBM) against the hydrophobic binding module (PDB).
  • TABLE 5A
    Amino acid sequence of the chimeric protein variants with the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module.
    ElaSub1_CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 11]; CatGSub1_CBM = [SEO ID NO: 12]; ElaSub1_CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 13]; CatGSub1_CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 14]; ElaSub2_CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 15]; CatGSub2 CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 16]: ElaSub2_CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 17]; CatGSub2_CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 18]
    Construct Sequence
    ElaSub1_C BM MGGSCGGGGSAAPVGGGGSAAPVGGGGSPPGGNRGTTTTRRPATTTGSSPGPTQS HYGQCGGIGYSGP1VCASGTTCQVLNPYYSQCL
    CatGSub1_ CBM MGGSCGGGGSAAPFGGGGSAAPFGGGGSPPGGNRTGTTTTRKPATTTGSSPGPTQSH YGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQVLNPYYSQCL
    ElaSub1_C BM His MGGSCGGGGSAAPVGGGGSAAPVGGGGSPPGGINRGTTTTRRPATTTGSSPGPTQS HYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQYTNPYTSQCLLEHHHHHH
    CatGSub1_ CBM His MGGSCGGGGSAAPFGGGGSAAPFGGGGSPPGGNRGTTTTRRPATTTGSSPGPTQSH YGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQVLNPYYSQCLLEHHHHHH
    ElaSub2_C BM MCGGGGSAAPYTQLEWLQGGGGSCGGGGSAAPVSEALEQWGGGGSCGGGGSAA PVAGAGAGTQSHYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQVLNPYYSQCL
    CatGSub2_ CBM MCGGGGSAAPFEQUEWLQGGGGSCGGGGSAAPFSEALEQWGGGGSCGGGGSAAP FAGAGAGTQSHYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTICQVLNPYYSQCL
    EhSub2_C BM His MCGGGGSAAPVEQLEWLQGGGGSCGGGGSAAPVSEALEQWGGGGSCGGGGSAA PVAGAGAGTQSHYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGITCQVLNPYYSQCLLEHHHHHH
    CatGSub2_ CBM His MCGGGGSAAPFEQLEWLQGGGGSCGGGGSAAPFSEALEQWGGGGSCGGGGSAAP FAGAGAGTQSHYGQCGGIGYSGPTVCASGTTCQVLNNPYYSQCLLEHHHHHH
  • Table 5B: Nucleotide sequence of the chimeric gene variants with the hydrophile carbohydrate binding module. All eight constructs were cloned into a pET-32b(+) expression vector (Novagen) using the Nco I and Xho I restriction sites located in the MCS of the cloning vector.
  • Elasubl CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 191
    ElaSub1_CBM ATGGGTGGTAGCTGCGGTGGTGGTGGTAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGGTGGTGGCGGTTCGCTGCTC CTGTGGGTGGCGGTGGTTCACCGCCTGGTGGTAATCGTGGTACAACCACCACCCGTCCGC AACCACAACCGGTAGCAGTCGGGTCCGACCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTGGTGGAGGT AACCACAACCGETAGCAGTCCGGGTCCCGACCCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTGGTGGTATTGGT TATAGCGG7CCGACCGTTTGTGCAAGCGGCACCACCTGTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTAT7ATAGCC AGTGTCTG
    • CatGSub1_CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 20];
    • ElaSubl CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 21];
  • CatGSubl_ CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 22]; ElaSub2 CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 231
    CatGSub1_CBM ATGGGTGGTAGCTGCGGTGGTGGTGGTAGCGCGCACCGTTTGGTGGTGGCGGTTCAGCTGCTC CTTTTGGTGGCGGTGGTTCACCGCCTGGTGGTAATCGTGGTACAACCACCACCCGTCGTCCGGC AACCACAACCGGTAGCAGTCCGGGTCCGACCCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTGGTGGTATTGGT TATAGCGGTCCGACCGTTTGTGCAAGCGGCACCACCT GTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTATTATAGCC AGTGTCTG
    E1aSub1_CBM_His ATGGGTGGTAGCTGCGGTGGTGGTGGTAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGGTGGTGGCGGTTCAGCTGCTC CTGTGGGTGGCGGTGGTTCACCGCCTGGTGGTAATCGTGGTACAACCACCACCCGTCGTCCGGC AACCACAACCGGTAGCAGTCCGGGTCCGACCCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTGGTGGTATTGGT TATAGCGGTCCGACCGTTTGTGCAAGCGGCACCACCTGTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTATTATAGCC AGTGTCTGCTCGAGCACCACCACCACCACCACTGA
    CatGSub1_CBM_His ATGGGTGGTAGCTGGGGTGGTGGTGGTAGCAGCACCGTTTGGTGGTGGCGGTTCAGCTGCTC CTTTTGGTGGCGGTGGTTCACCGCCTGGTGGTAATCGTGGTACAACAACCACCCGTCGTCCGGC AACCACAACCGGTAGCAGTCCGGGTCCGACCCAGAGCACCACCTGTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTATTATAGCC TATAGCGGTCCGACCGTTTGTGCAAGCGGCACCACCTGTCAGGTTCTGAATCCGTATTATAGCC AACCAGAACCGGTAGCAGTCCGGGTCCGACCCAGAGCCATTATGGTCAGTGTC^GTGGTATTGGT AGTGTCTGCTCGAGCACCACCACCACCACCACTGA
    ElaSub2_CBM ATGTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGAACAGCTGGAATGGCTGCAGGGCGGCGGCG CGGCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGCGGGCGCGGGCGCGGGCACCCAGAGC CATTATGGCCAGTGCGGCGGCATTGGCTATAGCGGCCCGACCGTGTGCGCGACGGCACCACCT GCCAGGTGCTGAACCCGTATTATAGCCAGTGCCTG
  • CatGSub2 CBM = [SEQ ID NO: 24]; ElaSub2_CBM_His = [SEQ ID NO: 25]; CatGSub2 _CBM His = [SEQ ID NO: 26]
    CatGSub2_CBM ATGTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGTTTGAACAGCTGGAATGGCTGCAGGGCGGCGGCG GCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGTTTAGCGAAGCGCTGGAACAGTGGGGCGGCGG CGGCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGTTTGCGGGCGCGGGCGCGGGCACCC CATTATGGCCAGTGCGGCGGCATTGGCTATAGCGGCCCGACCGTGTGCGCGAGCGGGACCACCT GCCAGGTGCTGAACCCGTATTATAGCCAGTGCCTG
    E1aSub2_CBM_His ATGTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGAACAGCTGGAATGGCTGCAGGGCGGCGGCG GCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGGTTAGCGAAGCCGTGGAACAGTGGGGCGGCGG CGGCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGCGCGCGCGGGCGCQGGCACCCAGAGC CCTGCGCGGCGGCCGCAGCGCAGCACCGGTTGCGGGCGCGGGCGCGCCCACCCAGCGGCACCACCT GCCAGGTGCTGAACCCGTATTATAGCCAGTGCCTGCTCGAGCACCACCACCACCACCACTGA
    CatGSub_CBM_His ATGTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGTTTGAACAGCTGGAATGGCTGCAGGGCGGCGGCG GCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGTTTAGCGAAGCGCTGGAACAGTGGGGCGGCGG CGGCAGCTGCGGCGGCGGCGGCAGCGCAGCACCGTTTGCGGGCGCGGGCGCGGGCGCGGGCACCCAGAGC CATTATGGCCAGTGCGGCGGCATTGGCTATAGCGGCCCGACCGTGTGCGCGAGCGGCACCACCT GCCAGGTGCTGAACCCGTATTATAGCCAGTGCCTGCTCGAGCACCACCACCACCACCACTGA
    • Example 25: Expression of Elastase (HLE) Substrates With Polymer Binding Sequences. Variant 3 (Example 9): BL21 Gold (DE3) [pET32b(+)ela Sub1_cbm His]
  • The chimeric gene was cloned into a pET32b(+) expression system using Ncol and Xhoi restriction sites/enzymes. Final protein expression of the chimeric peptide was carried out in E. coli BL21 Gold (DE3), a protease deficient expression host, which enables a proper protein expression based on the T7 promoter of the pET32b(+) expression vector. Fermentation of the BL21 Gold (DE3) host strain, harbouring the recombinant [pET32b(+)e/ subl cbm] construct, was done with 2xTY media supplemented with 100 µg ml-1 ampicillin for maintaining the plasmid. Overnight cultures grown at 30° C. with shaking were used to inoculate the main cultures. Cells were grown at 37° C. (fast induction protocol) and at 30° C. (slow induction protocol), with shaking, until the optical density at 600 nm reached approximately 0.6. Expression of the recombinant constructs were induced by the addition of 0.5 mM IPTG (final concentration), whereas protein expression was carried out 4 hours at 37° C. (fast induction) and 20 hours at 18° C. (slow induction). Both protocols (fast and slow induction) displayed the same results concerning the yield of soluble recombinant protein. After protein expression, cells were harvested by centrifugation and cells were disrupted by lysozyme treatment followed by sonification. The proper protein expression of the recombinant protein was monitored with SDS-PAGE, compared to the identically expressed empty pET32b(+) vector. Purification of the chimeric construct from crude lysate was done using the IBA -NTA sepharose gravity flow column (1 ml) according to the IBA protocol. Fractions containing the purified protein were examined using SDS-PAGE. In order to prevent protein exposure to the high imidazole concentration after elution, buffer exchange was carried out using PD 10 desalting columns from GE Healthcare. The yield of the purified chimeric fusion construct could be calculated with 30 mg protein per 2 g initial cell pellet. To separate the chimeric construct from the TrxA fusion tag, the recombinant expressed bovine enterokinase from Merck Millipore was used. The separation of the desired chimeric construct from the TrxA-Tag was verified by SDS-PAGE. The isolated chimeric protein, containing the HLE recognition/cleavage site twice, was used for the coupling procedures with varying dyes or pro dyes that exhibit different properties concerning their ability to expose positive and negative charged groups.
  • The finished chimeric construct was adsorbed onto a cellulose based filter paper (or fabrics) through the hydrophilic carbohydrate binding module. The filter strip containing the chimeric peptide was incubated for 30 min with a 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.4), containing 0.05 U/ml HLE, as well as with human wound fluids. Initially non coloured samples (clear supernatant) that exhibit elastase activity developed a blue colour, depending on the attached dye. Due to enzymatic cleavage at one or both of the internal HLE restriction sites (Ala-Ala-Pro-Val), peptide fragments with the attached Remazol Brilliant Blue dye molecules get uncoupled, resulting in a blue coloured supernatant. Alternatively, chimeric constructs with the hydrophobic binding module (PDB) can be used for adsorption of PET (Polyethylene terephthalate) based carrier materials. The production of chimeric variants harbouring the CatG cleavage sites instead of the HLE cleavage sites, allow the detection of human CatG enzyme under the same requirements as denoted for constructs possessing the HLE restriction sites.
  • In constructs containing the PDM domains, the PDM group can be interchanged with the CBD in a manner described before. The polyhydroxybutyrate depolymerase from A. faecalis (PBM or PDM) sequences are described in Ribitsch et al., “Fusion of Binding Domains to Thermobifida cellulosilytica Cutinase to Tune Sorption Characteristics and Enhancing PET Hydrolysis,” Biomacromolecules, 14 (6), pp 1769-1776, 2013. The disclosure in Ribitsch is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Analogously, any solid phase binding domain can be used in this manner. Other types of CBD peptides may be employed interchangably to achieve the desired functionality.
  • As demonstrated in the aforementioned Example and the functional assays, the constructs disclosed herein comprise a non-soluble ancher like CBD, this can be interchanged with other anchors, notably other CBDs or PDMs. Smaller anchors are preferred for stoiciometric reasons.
  • With regard to the enzyme recognition site contained in the construct, elastase, as exemplified herein, has broad preferences, wherein AAPV [SEQ ID NO: 3] sequence is most preferred, however, AAPF [SEQ ID NO: 4] is almost the same in terms of turnover and AAAA [SEQ ID NO: 4] is similar. Thus, anyone of these sequences could be exchanged for the other without loss of function.
  • With regard to the C-terminus of the constructs and amino acids appended thereto, many variations are possible but the consensus is that lack of sidechains and lack of charge are important to un-hinder the cutting site. Cyteines are particularly employed as a means to anchor dyes and particularly not more than one per construct, preferably one per cutting site. They should be distal from the cutting sites to ensure that the sulfonated dye does not interact with the enzyme more than necessary.
  • With respect to the dyes that are employed in peptide substrates, it is important to consider the particular enzymes which are target the recognition sites. To this end, elastase is a basic enzyme and it is inhibited by strong negatively charged groups. This means that more than one sulfonated dye per cutting site is not required. It is desirable that the number of sulfonate groups is lower than 4 per cutting site. With greater number of such sulfonate groups, there is a risk that they will mask access to the cutting site.
    • Example 26: Staining of Purified Trx-Ela-Sub1 With Vinyl Sulfone Dyes as Elastase Substrate
  • Purified and lyophilised Trx-Ela-Subl was dissolved in ¾0 (0.01 g/2.5 ml) (protein concentration ~0.2 mg/ml). The buffer was exchanged from Tris-HCl to a Na2P04/Na2S04 solution using a PD-10 column.
  • Staining with a vinyl sulfone dye (remazol brilliant blue R, RBB): 210 µl RBB (7.7 mg dissolved in 1.5 ml Na2P04/Na2S04) solution was added to 1900 µl protein solution and was shaken (750 rpm) at 37° C. for 80 min.
  • Purification was carried out via His-Tag [SEQ ID NO: 11 purification.
    • Reaction of Trx-Ela-Sub 1-RBB With Elastase:
  • The stained and purified peptide construct was applied on a cellulose surface and dried at 37° C. for 2 h. Unbound Trx-Ela-Sub 1-RBB was removed with H 20. The stripes with the applied Elastase substrate were incubated with and without Elastase containing buffer, respectively. The Elastase responsive dye release can be seen in FIG. 10 .
    • Example 27: Immobilization of Nitrazine Yellow and Bromocresol Purple
  • Immobilization of nitrazine yellow and bromocresol purple onto cellulose via (3-Glycidyloxypropyl)trimethoxysilane (GPTMS). A 15 mM solution of the above dyes is reacted with GPTMS (300 mM) overnight at 25° C. The complete reaction mixture (5 µL,) is pipetted onto a filter paper strip and dried for 30 minutes at 80° C. and 5 min at 170° C. Thereafter the dyed strips are washed exhaustively in water. The pH response of the strips can be observed by incubating them in solutions of different pH. Color response after incubating in pH 4.5, 7.2 or 8.5 is indicated in FIG. 7 . Both dye mixtures show no color response except in the pH 8.5 buffer showing that their pH transition lies between pH 7.2 and 8.5.
    • Example 28: 3-Step-Immobilisation of Bromocresol Purple Onto OH-Rich Surfaces Like Cellulose as pH Indicator.
  • 1. Step: Reaction of GPTMS (9 mM - 450 mM) in acetic acid (57 µM) for 10 - 180 min at ambient temperature under stirring conditions.
  • 2. Step: Soaking of OH-rich surface (e.g. cellulose) in reaction solution. Incubation of soaked material at 80 - 120° C. for 5-20 min.
  • 3. Step: Bromocresol purple (0.1 - 3.3 mg/ml) applied on pretreated material and dried at 120° C. for 20 min.
  • The different colours at different pH values are listed in Table 6.
  • TABLE 6
    different pH values and the corresponding colours of immobilised bromocresol purple
    pH value colour
    4.5 Yellow
    5.0 Yellow/green
    5.5 green
    6.0 Green
    6.2 green
    6.5 Dark green
    7.0 Petrol
    7.5 Blue
    8.0 Blue
    • Example 29: Phospholipase C Based Test - Liquid System Preparation of Diagnostic System
  • For this diagnostic tool, p-Nitrophenylphosphorylcholine as substrate for Phospholipase C was used. p-Mtrophenylphosphorylcholine is dissolved in water (50-100 mM). A 250 mM: Tris/HCi buffer with 70% Sorbitol pH 7.2 was used as assay buffer. 230 µl of the buffer and 100 µl of the substrate are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • Diagnosis: A volume between 5 and 12 µL of wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 µL and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to yellow.
    • Test Protocol and Results:
  • Infected wound fluid samples (A, B, C) and non-infected samples (D, E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA. Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Wound fluid sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 30: Phospholipase A2 Based Test - Liquid System
  • Preparation of diagnostic system. For this diagnostic tool, 4-Nitro-3- octanoylbenzoic acid as Phospholipase A2 - substrate was used. 4-Nitro-3-octanoylbenzoic acid (1.7 mM) is dissolved in assay buffer containing 50 mM Tris/HCl buffer pH 7.2, 150 mM KCL and 10 mM CaC12. 190 µl of the buffer are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • Diagnosis: A volume between 5 and 12 pL of wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 µl and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to yellow.
  • Test protocol and results: Infected wound fluid samples (A, B, C) and non infected samples (D, E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA. Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Wound fluid sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow ves
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 31: Catalase Based Test - Liquid System Preparation of Diagnostic System:
  • For this diagnostic tool: Purpald as substrate for Catalase was used. Purpalt is dissolved in water (50-100 mM). 200 µl of substrate solution are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • Diagnosis: A volume between 5 and 12 µL of wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 µl and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to dark violet.
  • Test protocol and results: Infected wound fluid samples (A, B, C) and non infected samples (D, E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA. Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to violet only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Wound fluid Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 32: Testing Body Fluids
  • A material containing substrates for one or more of MPO, elastase, lysozyme, phospholipase, and catalase and optionally a pH indicator, is contacted with a body fluids such as wound, tear, vitreal, CSF, airway aspirates or sputum, synovial, blood, plasma, serum, urine, peritoneal, interstitial, subcutaneous, bile, intestinal or similar fluids. Samples from infected organisms or tissues tend to show a higher degree of reaction. A combination of one or more of the reactions is used to detect the infection and its degree.
    • Example 33: Elastase Based Test - Liquid System
  • 100 µL of a solution of N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p- nitroanilide dissolved at a concentration of 20 mM in DMSO in 0.1 M HEPES buffer (pH 7.4, containing 0.5 M NaCl) is pipetted into a transparent eppendorf tube. The final concentration of N- methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide can be between 0.05 to 2.50 mM, and is preferentially between 0.80 and 1.20 mM. A volume between 1 and 15 L of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 2-5 µL. and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. Thereafter, wound infection will be indicated by a colour change from light pink to yellow. Mixtures containing non infected sputum samples will not change colour. 2 µL of infected (A, B, C) and non-infected sputum samples (D, E, F) were incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA containing a substrate concentration of 1.0 mM N- methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide . Visual inspection of the samples after 10 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected sputum samples A, B, and C.
  • Sputum Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour no
  • change
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 34: Elastase Based Test - Cellulose Paper Based System Preparation of Diagnostic System.
  • N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide is dissolved at a concentration of 281 mM in dimethoxysulfoxide. 2-5 µl of this solution, preferentially 2 µl were pipetted onto Whatman-Filterpapier.
  • The test system of Whatman-Filterpapier incubated with N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide is then incubated with 1-5 µl, preferentially 2 µl sputum sample and 2 µl 2 µl NaCl (50 mM) and incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change of the filterpaper to yellow. Non infected sputum samples will not change colour.
  • Using small swabs of Whatman-Filterpapier, infected samples (A, B) and non infected samples (C, D) were taken and placed into the diagnostic system described in 1C containing the substrate mM N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide . Visual inspection of the samples after 10 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B.
  • Sputum Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C no No colour change no
    D no No colour change no
    • Example 35: Cathepsin Based Test - Liquid System
  • N-succinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe-p-nitroanilide is dissolved at a concentration of 20 mM in dimethoxysulfoxide and diluted in 0.1 M HEPES buffer (pH 7.4, containing 0.5 M NaCl). The final concentration of N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe p-nitroanilide can be between 0.5 to 5 mM, and is preferentially 3 mM.
  • A volume between 1 and 5 µL of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially 2-4 uL and mixed by manual shaking. This mixture is incubated at 37° C. for 20 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change to yellow. Mixtures containing non infected samples will not change colour.
  • 5 µL of infected (A, B, C) and non infected sputum samples (D, E, F) were incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA comprising a substrate concentration of 3.0 mM N-
  • ala-ala-pro-phe-p-nitroanilide . Visual inspection of the samples after 20 to 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Sputum Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 36: Cathepsin Based Test - Cellulose Based System
  • N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe-p-nitroanilide is dissolved at a concentration of 20 mM in dimethoxysulfoxide and diluted in 0.1 M HEPES buffer (pH 7.4, containing 0.5 M NaCl). The final concentration of N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-phe-p- nitroanilide can be between 0.5 to 10 mM, and is preferentially 5.00 mM. 10 µL of this solution were pipetted onto Whatman filter paper.
  • The test system of Whatman-Filterpapier incubated with N-methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide is then incubated with 1-5 µl preferentially 2 µl sputum sample and 2 µl 2 µl NaCl (50 mM) and incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change of the filterpaper to yellow. Non infected sputum samples will not change colour,
  • Using small swabs of Whatman-Filterpapier, infected samples (A, B) and non- infected samples (C, D) were taken and placed into the diagnostic system described in 1C containing the substrate mM -methoxysuccinyl-ala-ala-pro-val-p-nitroanilide . Visual inspection of the samples after 210 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B.
  • Sputum Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C no No colour change no
    D no No colour change no
    • Example 37: Myeloperoxidase Based Test - Liquid System
  • For this diagnostic tool, six different substrates can be used, namely TMB, ABTS, Guaiacol, 4-Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid and Fast Blue RR 3350 µl of succinate buffer (pH 5.4) comprising 0.3 M sucrose were used, 15 µl 1% H202 and 7 µl of the substrates (5-40 mM ABTS, 20-150 mM TMB, 0.025 mM of Fast Blue RR, 10-50 mM 4- Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid and 10-20 mM Guaiacol) were added. TMB (3, 3′, 5, 5′ -Tetramethylbenzidine) is firstly dissolved in N, N- Methylformamide, Fast Blue RR is dissolved in ethanol, while ABTS can be dissolved in water and 4- Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid is dissolved in DMSO. Guaiacol. 100 µl of the solutions are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • A volume between 1 and 7 pL of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 4-6 pL and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to blue (TMB or green (ABTS), respectively and to brown to red (4-Amino-3 -methoxy benzoic acid and Guaiacol) Mixtures containing non infected samples will not change colour
  • Infected Sputum samples of (A, B, C) and non infected sputum samples (D, E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA containing the different substrates. Visual inspection of the samples after 5 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to blue in case of TMB only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Sputum Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes blue yes
    B yes blue yes
    C yes blue yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 38: Myeloperoxidase Based Test - Cellulose Based System
  • 1.5 µl of H202 (50 mM) and 1.5 µl of the substrates (109 mM ABTS, 454 mM TMB, 230 mM Fast Blue, x mM Guaiacol, x mM 4-Amino-3-methoxy benzoic acid) were incubated on small Whatmann Filterpaper discs.
  • The test system of Whatman-Filterpapier incubated with the different MPO substrates is then incubated with 1 -5 µl preferentially 2 µl sputum sample and incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change of the filterpaper to blue, green or brown-red. Non infected sputum samples will not change colour.
  • Using small swabs of Whatman-Filterpapier, infected samples (A, B) and non infected samples (C, D) were taken and placed into the diagnostic system described in 1C containing the substrates TMB, ABTS, Fast Blue RR, Guaiacol and 4A3Mba. Visual inspection of the samples after 5 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to brown (4A3Mba) in case of for infected samples A, B.
  • Sputum Sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes brown yes
    B yes brown yes
    C no No colour change no
    D no No colour change no
    • Example 39: Phospholipase A2 Based Test - Liquid System
  • For this diagnostic tool, 4-Nitro-3-octanoylbenzoic acid as Phospholipase A2 - substrate was used. 4-Nitro-3-octanoylbenzoic acid (1.7 mM) is dissolved in assay buffer containing 50 mM Tris/HCl buffer pH 7.2, 150 mM KCL and 10 mM CaC12. 190 µl of the buffer are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • A volume between 5 and 12 µL· oí sputum wound fluid sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 µl and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to yellow. Infected sputum samples (A, B) and non infected samples (E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA. Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to yellow only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Sputum sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 40: Catalase Based Test - Liquid System
  • For this diagnostic tool: Purpald as substrate for catalase was used. Purpalt is dissolved in water (50-100 mM?). 200 µl of substrate solution are pipetted into a microtiterplate.
  • A volume between 5 and 12 µL of sputum sample is added to the test system, preferentially between 8 and 10 µl and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a colour change from colourless to dark violet.
  • Infected wound fluid samples (A, B, C) and non-infected samples (D, E, F) are incubated with the diagnostic system described in IA. Visual inspection of the samples after 30 minutes of incubation indicated a colour change to violet only for infected sputum samples A, B, and C.
  • Sputum sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes yellow yes
    B yes yellow yes
    C yes yellow yes
    D no No colour change no
    E no No colour change no
    F no No colour change no
    • Example 41: Lysozyme Based Test - Liquid System
  • An amount between 1 and 15 mg Micrococcus lysodeikticus pep- tidoglycan is suspended in 15 ml 0.1 M KH2PO4 buffer (pH 7.0) . Preferentially, an amount between 8 and 10 mg is suspended. 290 µL of this solution is pipetted into a transparent microtiterplate.
  • A volume of 10 µL of sputum is added to the test system and mixed by manual shaking for 10 seconds. This mixture is incubated at 37° C. for 15 minutes. Thereafter, infection will be indicated by a decrease in turbidity. Mixtures containing non infected samples will not change.
  • 10 of infected (A, B, C) and non-infected samples (D, E, F) were incubated with the diagnostic system described in 2A containing Micrococcus lysodeikticus as a substrate for lysozyme. Visual inspection of the samples after 20 minutes of incubation indicated a change of turbidity only for infected samples A, B, and C.
  • Sputum sample Infection according to diagnosis of medical doctors Test response Infection according to test
    A yes clear yes
    B yes clear yes
    C yes clear yes
    D no No turbidity loss no
    E no No turbidity loss no
    F no No turbidity loss no
    • Lysozyme Activity Measurement for the Detection of Infection Dyed Peptidoglycan.
  • One suspension of every LPG-RB5 variant (1.5 mg/ml) was prepared (NaCl-solution, 0.9%) and divided into 6 1 ml samples each (3 positive, 3 negative). The positive controls were mixed with a Lysozyme stock solution (10 µl, 1,000,000 U/ml) to a final Lysozyme activity of 10,000 U/ml. All samples were incubated at 37° C. for 60 min and centrifuged afterwards (5 min, 10000 g). A development of blue colour was detected in the supernatants. 100 µl of each supernatant was transferred into a 96-well plate and the absorbance was measured at 597 nm.
    • Other Embodiments
  • The preceding examples can be repeated with similar success by substituting the generically or specifically described reactants and/or operating conditions of this disclosed technology for those used in the preceding examples.
  • From the foregoing description, one skilled in the art can easily ascertain the essential characteristics of this disclosed technology and, without departing from the spirit and scope thereof, can make various changes and modifications of the disclosed technology to adapt it to various usages and conditions.
  • Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosed technology belongs. Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the disclosed technology, suitable methods and materials are described in the foregoing paragraphs. In addition, the materials, methods, and examples are illustrative only and not intended to be limiting. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.
  • All United States patents and published or unpublished United States patent applications cited herein are incorporated by reference. All published foreign patents and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference. All published references, documents, manuscripts, scientific literature cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference. All identifier and accession numbers pertaining to NCBI, GENBANK, EBI, PUBMED databases that are cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • While preferred embodiments of the present disclosed technology have been shown and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the disclosed technology. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the disclosed technology described herein may be employed in practicing the disclosed technology. It is intended that the following claims define the scope of the disclosed technology and that methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents be covered thereby.

Claims (14)

1-77. (canceled)
78. A chemical entity comprising a compound of Formula I:
Figure US20230213525A1-20230706-C00016
wherein
A is an anchor;
I is an indicator region,
wherein the anchor A is covalently associated with the indicator I via a covalent interaction to form a recognition site S, and comprises a polysaccharide, a cellulose, a polyacrylate, a polyethyleneimine, a polyacrylamide, a peptidoglycan, or a chitosan, or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof, and
wherein the indicator I or a motif therein attached to the anchor A is a substrate for a glycosidase.
79. The chemical entity of claim 78, wherein the indicator I or a motif therein attached to the anchor is a substrate for a glycosidase which is lysozyme.
80. The chemical entity of claim 79, wherein the indicator I or a motif therein is attached to a 1α-carbon of chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, or a derivative thereof.
81. The chemical entity of claim 78, wherein the anchor A comprises chitosan or a monomer thereof, an oligomer thereof, a derivative thereof, a mixture or a combination thereof.
82. The chemical entity of claim 81, wherein the monomer of chitosan comprises D-glucosamine and N-acetyl-D-glucosamine, an oligomer thereof, or a combination thereof.
83. The chemical entity of claim 81, wherein the chitosan comprises at least two units of D-glucosamine, N-acetyl-D-glucosamine, or a combination thereof.
84. The chemical entity of claim 81, wherein the chitosan derivative comprises a randomly substituted partial N-, partial O-acetylated chitosan, chitosan oligosaccharide, carboxymethyl chitosan, or hydroxyalkyl chitosan.
85. The chemical entity of claim 81, wherein the indicator I comprises a dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group or a dye containing a dichlortriazine reactive-group.
86. The chemical entity of claim 85, wherein the dye containing a sulfonylethyl-hydrogensulphate-reactive-group or the dye containing a dichlorotriazine reactive-group is reactive black 5, remazol brilliant blue, reactive violet 5, reactive orange 16, reactive blue 4, reactive red 120, reactive blue 2, reactive green 19, reactive brown 10, or a combination thereof.
87. The chemical entity of claim 78, wherein the indicator comprises a detectable label selected from the group consisting of a luminescent molecule, a chemiluminescent molecule, a fluorochrome, a fluorescent quenching agent, a lipid, a colored molecule, a radioisotope, a scintillant, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, an antibody or a fragment thereof, a polyhistidine, Ni2+, a Flag tag, a myc tag, a heavy metal, and an enzyme.
88. The chemical entity of claim 78, wherein the anchor is a polystyrene bead, a silica gel bead, a polysaccharide bead, a polyacrylamide bead, a cellulose bead, a polysaccharide, a derivatized cellulose, a polyacrylate, a polyethyleneimine, a polyacrylamide, a UV-activable reactive group, a peptidoglycan, a chitosan derivative, or a combination thereof.
89. The chemical entity of claim 88, wherein the indicator (I) attached to the anchor comprises a pH-sensitive moiety that presents a visible colour change.
90. The chemical entity of claim 89, wherein the pH sensitive moiety is selected from the group consisting of bromothymol blue, phenol red, bromophenol red, chlorophenol red, thymol blue, bromocresol green, bromocresol purple, nitrazine yellow, and sulfophthalein dyes or a combination thereof.
US16/090,091 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Detecting microbial infection in wounds Pending US20230213525A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/090,091 US20230213525A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Detecting microbial infection in wounds

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662315546P 2016-03-30 2016-03-30
US201662315556P 2016-03-30 2016-03-30
PCT/IB2017/000442 WO2017168249A2 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Detecting microbial infection in wounds
US16/090,091 US20230213525A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Detecting microbial infection in wounds

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230213525A1 true US20230213525A1 (en) 2023-07-06

Family

ID=58709502

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/090,075 Active 2039-12-20 US11740241B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Construct including an anchor, an enzyme recognition site and an indicator region for detecting microbial infection in wounds
US16/090,091 Pending US20230213525A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Detecting microbial infection in wounds
US18/312,017 Pending US20240027454A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2023-05-04 Detecting microbial infection in wounds

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/090,075 Active 2039-12-20 US11740241B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-30 Construct including an anchor, an enzyme recognition site and an indicator region for detecting microbial infection in wounds

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/312,017 Pending US20240027454A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2023-05-04 Detecting microbial infection in wounds

Country Status (14)

Country Link
US (3) US11740241B2 (en)
EP (2) EP3436821A2 (en)
JP (3) JP2019513238A (en)
KR (2) KR20190015210A (en)
CN (2) CN109564213B (en)
AU (3) AU2017278022B2 (en)
BR (2) BR112018070244A2 (en)
CA (2) CA3019436A1 (en)
CL (2) CL2018002776A1 (en)
CO (2) CO2018011706A2 (en)
EC (2) ECSP18081945A (en)
IL (2) IL262024A (en)
SG (1) SG11201808598UA (en)
WO (2) WO2017212345A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10874541B2 (en) 2017-11-09 2020-12-29 11 Health And Technologies Limited Ostomy monitoring system and method
FR3074047B1 (en) * 2017-11-30 2019-12-20 Biomerieux NON-IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICES INCORPORATING A DEVICE FOR DETECTION AND / OR IDENTIFICATION OF MICROBIOLOGICAL INFECTIONS
CN108922620A (en) * 2018-06-20 2018-11-30 南华大学 A kind of surgery cut infection risk evaluating system
TR201809384A2 (en) * 2018-07-02 2018-07-23 Arkan Tic Paz Teks Ins Kag San Ltd Sti BABY CLOTH FOR BACTERIAL INFECTION DETECTION OF URINE URINE
EP3591066A1 (en) 2018-07-05 2020-01-08 Qualizyme Diagnostics GmbH&Co KG Method for detecting synovial joint infections
CN112805305B (en) * 2018-09-19 2023-03-21 南洋理工大学 Biohybrid peptidoglycan oligomers
USD893514S1 (en) 2018-11-08 2020-08-18 11 Health And Technologies Limited Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
JP7320078B2 (en) * 2019-04-30 2023-08-02 チュンイェン ヂョン Biocellulose fiber, hemostatic dressing containing same and related applications
WO2020250037A1 (en) * 2019-06-14 2020-12-17 Qualizyme Diagnostics GmbH & Co. KG Ph responsive materials for optical monitoring of wound status
CN112169717B (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-06-03 深圳大学 Microencapsulated hemin and preparation method and application thereof
TWI757149B (en) * 2021-04-14 2022-03-01 正美企業股份有限公司 Dressing and wound determination system
CN113484386B (en) * 2021-05-21 2024-02-13 郑州轻工业大学 Preparation method and application of metal phthalocyanine nano material, aptamer sensor and preparation method thereof
CN113671077B (en) * 2021-08-17 2023-08-18 成都倍特药业股份有限公司 Method for detecting acryloyl chloride and related substances
EP4180121A1 (en) * 2021-11-15 2023-05-17 Universidad Autónoma de Madrid Composition for assessing the presence of microorganisms in a test sample
JP2023133892A (en) * 2022-03-14 2023-09-27 国立大学法人 東京大学 Sperm detection method

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100178203A1 (en) * 2009-01-15 2010-07-15 Polestar Technologies, Inc. Non-Invasive Colorimetric-Based Infection Detector And Infection Detecting Bandage
US20110158917A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Macdonald John Gavin Anti-viral tissue product with visual efficacy indicator

Family Cites Families (626)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3911116A (en) 1970-04-13 1975-10-07 Leslie L Balassa Process for promoting wound healing with chitin derivatives
US3762859A (en) * 1971-03-15 1973-10-02 Colgate Palmolive Co Enhancing the apparent whiteness of fabrics by applying an effective amount of an alkali and heat stable water soluble disazo blue dyestuff fabric softening and detergent composition therefor
DE2905531A1 (en) * 1979-02-14 1981-01-08 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh DIAGNOSTIC AGENT FOR DETECTING LEUCOCYTES IN BODY LIQUIDS
US5017359A (en) 1985-11-01 1991-05-21 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Aerosol compositions for in vivo imaging and therapy
JPH0762027B2 (en) * 1986-05-29 1995-07-05 焼津水産化学工業株式会社 Substrate for measuring new lysozyme activity
US5700636A (en) * 1990-10-19 1997-12-23 Becton Dickinson And Company Methods for selectively detecting microorganisms associated with vaginal infections in complex biological samples
US5599916A (en) 1994-12-22 1997-02-04 Kimberly-Clark Corporation Chitosan salts having improved absorbent properties and process for the preparation thereof
DE69611319T2 (en) * 1995-05-15 2001-04-26 Xerox Corp Imaging elements after the migration process
TW389694B (en) 1995-08-17 2000-05-11 Novartis Ag Compositions including o-carboxyalkyl chitosan and methods of use in ophthalmics
EP1152013B1 (en) 1998-11-10 2008-04-23 Netech Inc. Functional chitosan derivative
ES2270824T3 (en) 1999-04-02 2007-04-16 Kci Licensing, Inc. CLOSURE SYSTEM ASSISTED BY VACUUM WITH HEATING AND COOLING PROVISION.
US6716970B2 (en) 2000-04-21 2004-04-06 Adjuvant Pharmaceuticals, Llc Water soluble, randomly substituted partial N-partial O-acetylated chitosan, preserving compositions containing chitosan, and processes for making thereof
GB0011202D0 (en) 2000-05-09 2000-06-28 Kci Licensing Inc Abdominal wound dressing
GB0025084D0 (en) 2000-10-13 2000-11-29 Cambridge Meditech Improvements in detection
US7700819B2 (en) 2001-02-16 2010-04-20 Kci Licensing, Inc. Biocompatible wound dressing
US20050004057A1 (en) 2001-12-14 2005-01-06 Isabelle Boucher Chitosan oligosaccharides and uses thereof
US20030204070A1 (en) 2002-01-23 2003-10-30 Jian Chen Polynucleotide encoding a novel methionine aminopeptidase, protease-39
JP4002541B2 (en) * 2002-07-19 2007-11-07 株式会社日本触媒 Light diffusing agent
JP4123351B2 (en) * 2002-08-09 2008-07-23 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 Production method of polyester resin
GB2393120A (en) 2002-09-18 2004-03-24 Johnson & Johnson Medical Ltd Compositions for wound treatment
GB2393656B (en) * 2002-10-01 2005-11-16 Johnson & Johnson Medical Ltd Enzyme-sensitive therapeutic wound dressings
GB0224986D0 (en) 2002-10-28 2002-12-04 Smith & Nephew Apparatus
EP1581268B1 (en) 2003-01-09 2011-05-04 Polyganics B.V. Biomedical foams
US20050250214A1 (en) * 2004-05-05 2005-11-10 Gee Kyle R Zinc binding compounds and their method of use
GB2402882B (en) 2003-06-20 2007-03-28 Johnson & Johnson Medical Ltd Antioxidant wound dressing materials
US20050011261A1 (en) 2003-07-14 2005-01-20 Lyon Mark Damon Container and method for measuring and mixing micro and macro amounts
CN102743785A (en) 2003-08-14 2012-10-24 美利肯公司 Silver-containing wound care device, composition therefor, and method of producing
WO2005035588A1 (en) 2003-09-17 2005-04-21 Eli Lilly And Company Synthetic polysaccharide antigens for immunological intervention in disease
GB0325129D0 (en) 2003-10-28 2003-12-03 Smith & Nephew Apparatus in situ
CA2557612C (en) 2003-11-03 2014-06-17 Ethicon, Inc. Methods, peptides and biosensors useful for detecting a broad spectrum of bacteria
GB2422664A (en) * 2005-01-28 2006-08-02 Ethicon Inc Device for detecting an enzyme in a sample
US7909805B2 (en) 2004-04-05 2011-03-22 Bluesky Medical Group Incorporated Flexible reduced pressure treatment appliance
GB0409446D0 (en) 2004-04-28 2004-06-02 Smith & Nephew Apparatus
US10413644B2 (en) 2004-04-27 2019-09-17 Smith & Nephew Plc Wound treatment apparatus and method
US20060275905A1 (en) * 2004-07-26 2006-12-07 The University Of Chicago Gram positive bacterial mutants and methods of generating and using such mutants
US9162005B2 (en) 2005-04-25 2015-10-20 Arch Biosurgery, Inc. Compositions for prevention of adhesions and other barrier applications
CN101257938A (en) 2005-09-07 2008-09-03 泰科保健集团有限合伙公司 Wound dressing with vacuum reservoir
AU2006287461A1 (en) 2005-09-07 2007-03-15 Tyco Healthcare Group L.P. Self contained wound dressing apparatus
EP1969184B1 (en) * 2006-01-05 2011-04-20 Basf Se Reactive dye grafted binders
KR101117394B1 (en) 2006-01-23 2012-03-07 케이씨아이 라이센싱 인코포레이티드 System for treating a wound using ultrasonic debridement
KR101045751B1 (en) 2006-02-06 2011-06-30 케이씨아이 라이센싱 인코포레이티드 Systems and methods for improved connection to wound dressings in conjunction with reduced pressure wound treatment systems
US7779625B2 (en) 2006-05-11 2010-08-24 Kalypto Medical, Inc. Device and method for wound therapy
GB2439928A (en) 2006-07-13 2008-01-16 Ethicon Inc Hydrogel wound dressings exhibiting reduced fiber losses
CN110251740A (en) 2006-10-13 2019-09-20 凯希特许有限公司 For providing the reduced pressure delivery system for the treatment of to lower severity wound
GB0620504D0 (en) 2006-10-16 2006-11-22 Queen Mary & Westfield College Method
FR2916356B1 (en) 2007-05-25 2009-08-28 Urgo Soc Par Actions Simplifie NOVEL AGENT FOR RELOCATING ACTIVE INGREDIENTS IN DRESSINGS CONTAINING AT LEAST ONE FATTY BODY
US20090075891A1 (en) 2007-08-06 2009-03-19 Macphee Martin Methods and dressings for sealing internal injuries
GB2452720A (en) 2007-09-11 2009-03-18 Ethicon Inc Wound dressing with an antimicrobial absorbent layer and an apertured cover sheet
US8246590B2 (en) 2007-10-11 2012-08-21 Spiracur, Inc. Closed incision negative pressure wound therapy device and methods of use
CN101868203B (en) 2007-11-21 2014-10-22 史密夫及内修公开有限公司 Wound dressing
EP2987510B1 (en) 2007-11-21 2020-10-28 T.J. Smith & Nephew Limited Suction device and dressing
CN101932624B (en) 2007-12-12 2012-09-26 3M创新有限公司 Methods of making one article and articles
CN101946171B (en) * 2007-12-14 2014-03-12 拜奥蒂乌姆股份有限公司 Fluorescent compounds
US8152785B2 (en) 2008-03-13 2012-04-10 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Vacuum port for vacuum wound therapy
US20090234306A1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-09-17 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Vacuum wound therapy wound dressing with variable performance zones
GB0805162D0 (en) 2008-03-19 2008-04-23 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Antibacterial wound dressing
BRPI0909385B1 (en) * 2008-03-28 2020-10-20 Schoeller Technologies Ag use of fiber dyes to reduce, retain or increase near-infrared reflectance
BRPI0906527A2 (en) 2008-04-04 2016-09-06 3Mm Innovative Properties Company apparatus for applying bandages to wounds and medical bandages
GB0808376D0 (en) 2008-05-08 2008-06-18 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Wound dressing
BRPI0912824B8 (en) 2008-05-21 2021-06-22 Topaz Morris wound healing device
ITAR20080022A1 (en) 2008-05-26 2009-11-27 Daniele Guidi DRAINAGE DEVICE, IN PARTICULAR FOR ASPIRATION IN CASE OF SUCTION THERAPIES, FISTULAS, SURGICAL WOUND DEFICIENCIES, DECUBITUS INJURIES, TRAUMAS AND SIMILAR INJURIES.
US20200113741A1 (en) 2008-05-30 2020-04-16 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressing with tissue viewing capability
CA2725569C (en) 2008-05-30 2014-11-25 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-pressure, linear wound closing bolsters and systems
US9572719B2 (en) 2008-05-30 2017-02-21 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-pressure surgical wound treatment systems and methods
EP2145904A1 (en) * 2008-07-18 2010-01-20 Basf Se Method for enzyme-catalysed hydrolysis of polyacrylic acid esters and esterases to be used
US8460698B2 (en) 2008-08-01 2013-06-11 Milliken & Company Composite article suitable for use as a wound dressing
CA2731427C (en) 2008-08-08 2020-01-28 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Wound dressing of continuous fibers
WO2010021930A1 (en) 2008-08-16 2010-02-25 Synedgen, Inc. Prevention and treatment of mrsa infections with chitosan-derivatives
GB2463523B (en) 2008-09-17 2013-05-01 Medtrade Products Ltd Wound care device
JP5337248B2 (en) 2008-09-18 2013-11-06 ケーシーアイ ライセンシング インコーポレイテッド Inflammatory response suppression system and method
GB0904582D0 (en) 2008-09-24 2009-04-29 Lumina Adhesives Switchable adhesives
GB0817796D0 (en) 2008-09-29 2008-11-05 Convatec Inc wound dressing
ES2829956T3 (en) 2008-10-02 2021-06-02 Lrr & D Ltd Interface Layer Wound Dressing
JP5390625B2 (en) 2008-10-29 2014-01-15 ケーシーアイ ライセンシング インコーポレイテッド Depressurized abdominal treatment system and method
BRPI0916062A2 (en) 2008-11-07 2019-09-24 Kci Licensing Inc reduced pressure wound treatment system for patient wound care, wound closure dressing, wound treatment method, and wound closure dressing method
KR20110087317A (en) 2008-11-14 2011-08-02 케이씨아이 라이센싱 인코포레이티드 Fluid pouch, system, and method for storing fluid from a tissue site
KR20110095356A (en) 2008-11-18 2011-08-24 케이씨아이 라이센싱 인코포레이티드 Reduced-pressure, composite manifolds
DK2358425T3 (en) 2008-11-25 2014-12-01 Spiracur Inc A device for the supply of reduced pressure on the body surfaces
WO2010080907A1 (en) 2009-01-07 2010-07-15 Spiracur Inc. Reduced pressure therapy of the sacral region
US8162907B2 (en) 2009-01-20 2012-04-24 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Method and apparatus for bridging from a dressing in negative pressure wound therapy
JP5674684B2 (en) 2009-02-03 2015-02-25 マイクロビオン コーポレーション Bismuth-thiol as a disinfectant for epithelial tissues, acute and chronic wounds, bacterial biofilms and other indications
GB0913775D0 (en) * 2009-08-06 2009-09-16 Medical Res Council Multispecific peptides
GB0902368D0 (en) 2009-02-13 2009-04-01 Smith & Nephew Wound packing
US20190298578A1 (en) 2009-03-26 2019-10-03 Stephen Shulman Vented emergency wound dressings with anti-thrombogenic layers
US10792404B2 (en) 2009-04-10 2020-10-06 Kci Licensing, Inc. Methods and devices for applying closed incision negative pressure wound therapy
GB2470040A (en) 2009-05-06 2010-11-10 Systagenix Wound Man Ip Co Bv Wound dressing material comprising N-acetyl cysteine
SI2433138T1 (en) * 2009-05-18 2017-03-31 Technische Universitaet Method for detecting a wound infection
JP6001449B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2016-10-05 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Flexible adhesive medical article comprising a self-supporting substrate
KR101699992B1 (en) 2009-06-16 2017-01-26 백스터 인터내셔널 인코포레이티드 Hemostatic sponge
US20100324516A1 (en) 2009-06-18 2010-12-23 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Apparatus for Vacuum Bridging and/or Exudate Collection
US8778854B2 (en) * 2009-07-08 2014-07-15 The Lubrizol Corporation Dispersant viscosity modifiers
US8469936B2 (en) 2009-07-15 2013-06-25 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-pressure dressings, systems, and methods employing desolidifying barrier layers
US8690844B2 (en) 2009-08-27 2014-04-08 Kci Licensing, Inc. Re-epithelialization wound dressings and systems
US20110066123A1 (en) 2009-09-15 2011-03-17 Aidan Marcus Tout Medical dressings, systems, and methods employing sealants
BR112012010858B8 (en) 2009-11-09 2018-10-02 3M Innovative Properties Co '' Medical article and method for increasing the moisture vapor transmission rate.
EP2498988B1 (en) 2009-11-09 2019-02-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Medical articles and methods of making using miscible composition
GB0919659D0 (en) 2009-11-10 2009-12-23 Convatec Technologies Inc A component for a wound dressing
WO2011087871A2 (en) 2009-12-22 2011-07-21 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Apparatuses and methods for negative pressure wound therapy
CA2786101C (en) 2010-01-20 2018-08-07 Kci Licensing, Inc. Foam wound inserts with regions of higher and lower densities, wound dressings, and methods
US8791315B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-07-29 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Systems and methods for using negative pressure wound therapy to manage open abdominal wounds
CN102933554A (en) 2010-03-02 2013-02-13 黄玉梅 Crosslinking reagents, methods, and compositions for studying protein-protein interactions
US10709883B2 (en) 2010-03-04 2020-07-14 Donald Spector Bandage with microneedles for antimicrobial delivery and fluid absorption from a wound
US8721606B2 (en) 2010-03-11 2014-05-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressings, systems, and methods for treating a tissue site
US8469935B2 (en) 2010-03-11 2013-06-25 Kci Licensing, Inc. Abdominal treatment systems, delivery devices, and methods
US8430867B2 (en) 2010-03-12 2013-04-30 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-pressure dressing connection pads, systems, and methods
US9358158B2 (en) 2010-03-16 2016-06-07 Kci Licensing, Inc. Patterned neo-epithelialization dressings, systems, and methods
US8814842B2 (en) 2010-03-16 2014-08-26 Kci Licensing, Inc. Delivery-and-fluid-storage bridges for use with reduced-pressure systems
DK2552371T3 (en) 2010-03-31 2020-09-14 Pharmaplast Sae Wound care dressing, a method and a production line for producing the wound care dressing
US8632512B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2014-01-21 Kci Licensing, Inc. Apparatuses, methods, and compositions for the treatment and prophylaxis of chronic wounds
AU2011240749B2 (en) 2010-04-13 2016-12-08 Kci Licensing, Inc. Compositions with reactive ingredients, and wound dressings, apparatuses, and methods
US8702665B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2014-04-22 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-pressure sources, systems, and methods employing a polymeric, porous, hydrophobic material
US20190381222A9 (en) 2010-04-16 2019-12-19 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-Pressure Sources, Systems, And Methods Employing A Polymeric, Porous, Hydrophobic Material
GB201008347D0 (en) 2010-05-19 2010-07-07 Smith & Nephew Wound protection
GB201006986D0 (en) 2010-04-27 2010-06-09 Smith & Nephew Wound dressing
USRE48117E1 (en) 2010-05-07 2020-07-28 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Apparatuses and methods for negative pressure wound therapy
US10639404B2 (en) 2010-06-03 2020-05-05 Wound Healing Technologies, Llc Wound dressing
EP2582404B1 (en) 2010-06-17 2020-08-19 Covalon Technologies Inc. Antimicrobial silicone-based wound dressings
US9265665B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2016-02-23 Kci Licensing, Inc. Inflatable off-loading wound dressing assemblies, systems, and methods
JP2012031056A (en) 2010-07-28 2012-02-16 Dow Global Technologies Llc Polysaccharide derivative having adjusted particle morphology for hydrolytically curable composition
US8795246B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2014-08-05 Spiracur Inc. Alarm system
GB201015656D0 (en) 2010-09-20 2010-10-27 Smith & Nephew Pressure control apparatus
CA2814076A1 (en) * 2010-10-14 2012-04-19 Regado Biosciences, Inc. Nucleic acid modulators of clec-2
MX337627B (en) 2010-11-25 2016-03-10 Smith & Nephew Composition i-ii and products and uses thereof.
US8613733B2 (en) 2010-12-15 2013-12-24 Kci Licensing, Inc. Foam dressing with integral porous film
CA2825709A1 (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-07-26 Ir2Dx, Inc. Biomarkers for rapid determination of drug efficacy
EP2896963B1 (en) 2011-01-31 2019-01-30 Woundchek Laboratories B.V. Wound prognosis
GB2488749A (en) 2011-01-31 2012-09-12 Systagenix Wound Man Ip Co Bv Laminated silicone coated wound dressing
US9226737B2 (en) 2011-02-04 2016-01-05 University Of Massachusetts Negative pressure wound closure device
US9107990B2 (en) 2011-02-14 2015-08-18 Kci Licensing, Inc. Reduced-pressure dressings, systems, and methods for use with linear wounds
WO2012141999A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-10-18 Kci Licensing, Inc. Absorbent polymer dressings, systems, and methods employing evaporative devices
GB201106491D0 (en) 2011-04-15 2011-06-01 Systagenix Wound Man Ip Co Bv Patterened silicone coating
WO2012149242A1 (en) 2011-04-29 2012-11-01 Kci Licensing, Inc. Aptamer -modified polymeric materials for the binding of therapeutic factors in a wound environment
GB201108229D0 (en) 2011-05-17 2011-06-29 Smith & Nephew Tissue healing
EP2714117B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2018-10-24 KCI Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods of stimulation and activation of fluids for use with instillation therapy
WO2012170744A2 (en) 2011-06-07 2012-12-13 Spiracur, Inc. Solutions for bridging and pressure concentration reduction at wound sites
CN103889476B (en) 2011-06-07 2017-04-26 史密夫及内修公开有限公司 Wound contacting members and methods
FR2977491B1 (en) 2011-07-05 2013-07-26 Melvita Production COSMETIC COMPOSITION COMPRISING A MIXTURE OF HONEY
RU2596728C2 (en) 2011-07-26 2016-09-10 Смит Энд Нефью Плс Systems and methods of monitoring system operation for low pressure therapy
EP3281652A1 (en) 2011-07-26 2018-02-14 KCI Licensing, Inc. Systems for treating a tissue site with reduced pressure involving a reduced-pressure interface having a multi-lumen conduit for contacting a manifold
GB201113515D0 (en) 2011-08-04 2011-09-21 Convatec Technologies Inc A dressing
DE102011081818A1 (en) 2011-08-30 2013-02-28 Beiersdorf Ag Active skin coatings
EP2750723B1 (en) 2011-08-30 2020-06-24 Avery Dennison Corporation Silicone absorbent adhesive layer
CA3058744A1 (en) 2011-08-31 2013-03-07 Christopher Brian Locke Inline storage pouches for use with body fluids
DE202011108806U1 (en) 2011-09-02 2012-09-03 BLüCHER GMBH Wound dressing with permeable layer
EP2567682B2 (en) 2011-09-09 2017-12-27 Paul Hartmann AG Abdominal wound dressing with application aid
US9408913B2 (en) 2011-09-12 2016-08-09 Protege Biomedical, Llc Composition and dressing for wound treatment
DK2572737T3 (en) 2011-09-26 2016-06-27 Bsn Medical Gmbh improved wound dressing
GB2504872B (en) 2011-11-01 2015-07-01 Brightwake Ltd Wound dressings, and yarn useful therein
US9393354B2 (en) 2011-11-01 2016-07-19 J&M Shuler Medical, Inc. Mechanical wound therapy for sub-atmospheric wound care system
EP3669841A1 (en) 2011-11-15 2020-06-24 KCI Licensing, Inc. Medical dressings, systems, and methods with thermally-enhanced vapor transmission
US9132040B2 (en) 2011-11-17 2015-09-15 Ethicon, Inc. Dressing device
WO2013074829A1 (en) 2011-11-18 2013-05-23 Kci Licensing, Inc. Tissue treatment systems and methods having a porous substrate with a compressed region and an expanded region
WO2013078096A1 (en) 2011-11-21 2013-05-30 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for identifying portions of a wound filler left at a tissue site
US10940047B2 (en) 2011-12-16 2021-03-09 Kci Licensing, Inc. Sealing systems and methods employing a hybrid switchable drape
WO2013106251A1 (en) 2012-01-10 2013-07-18 Kcl Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods for delivering fluid to a wound therapy dressing
CN107522880B (en) 2012-01-25 2020-07-24 阿克伦大学 Hydrogel and preparation method thereof
GB201201751D0 (en) 2012-02-01 2012-03-14 Haemostatix Ltd Haemostatic wound dressing
CN104053420B (en) 2012-02-02 2020-07-14 凯希特许有限公司 Foam structure wound insert for directional granulation
EP2817038B2 (en) 2012-02-21 2023-06-07 KCI Licensing, Inc. A multi-orientation canister for use with a reduced pressure treatment system
WO2013130684A1 (en) * 2012-02-27 2013-09-06 Amunix Operating Inc. Xten-folate conjugate compositions and methods of making same
US10470936B2 (en) 2012-02-29 2019-11-12 Hollister Incorporated Buffered adhesive compositions for skin-adhering medical products
JP6092243B2 (en) 2012-02-29 2017-03-08 ホリスター・インコーポレーテッドＨｏｌｌｉｓｔｅｒ Ｉｎｃｏｒｐｏｒａｔｅｄ Buffer adhesive composition for skin adhesive medical products
EP2636417B1 (en) 2012-03-05 2017-04-26 Lohmann & Rauscher GmbH Wound treatment assembly and covering device for same
EP3338821B1 (en) 2012-03-12 2020-05-06 Smith & Nephew plc Dressing for reduced pressure wound therapy
US10576037B2 (en) 2012-03-14 2020-03-03 MAM Holdings of West Florida, L.L.C. Compositions comprising placental collagen for use in wound healing
US9427505B2 (en) 2012-05-15 2016-08-30 Smith & Nephew Plc Negative pressure wound therapy apparatus
CN107280857A (en) 2012-05-22 2017-10-24 史密夫及内修公开有限公司 Wound healing device
EP3650055A1 (en) 2012-05-23 2020-05-13 Smith & Nephew plc Apparatuses and methods for negative pressure wound therapy
GB201209745D0 (en) 2012-05-31 2012-07-18 Convatec Technologies Inc Wound dressing
EP2854893B1 (en) 2012-06-03 2019-10-02 Daniel Eduard Kleiner Endoluminal vacuum therapy device
AU2013280335B2 (en) 2012-06-28 2017-06-29 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound connection pad with RFID and integrated strain gauge pressure sensor
RU2015102055A (en) 2012-07-16 2016-09-10 Юниверсити Оф Массачусетс DEVICE FOR CLOSING THE Wound USING NEGATIVE PRESSURE
WO2014012171A1 (en) 2012-07-19 2014-01-23 Innovotech, Inc. Anti-microbial gel formulations containing a silver (i) periodate
CN104487033B (en) 2012-07-30 2018-06-15 凯希特许有限公司 Decompression absorbability for treating tissue site applies part, system and manufactures the method for applying part
DK2879636T3 (en) 2012-08-01 2017-06-19 Smith & Nephew Wound dressing
EP2882470B1 (en) 2012-08-13 2020-03-18 KCI Licensing, Inc. Intelligent therapy system with evaporation management
EP2885389A1 (en) * 2012-08-20 2015-06-24 The Lubrizol Corporation Lubricating composition including esterified copolymer and diene rubber polymer
CN104703635B (en) 2012-08-28 2016-12-07 3M创新有限公司 Chlorhexidine gluconate compositions, resin system and goods
US20150320901A1 (en) 2012-08-31 2015-11-12 Stryker European Holdings I, Llc Hemostatic Foam
US20150202354A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2015-07-23 Integrated Healing Technolgies, LLC Wound Dressing
WO2014039715A1 (en) * 2012-09-07 2014-03-13 University Of Rochester Methods and compositions for site-specific labeling of peptides and proteins
EP2895213B8 (en) 2012-09-12 2017-08-30 KCI Licensing, Inc. Systems for collecting exudates in reduced-pressure therapy
JP6534931B2 (en) 2012-09-20 2019-06-26 ローマン ウント ラウシェル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Negative pressure therapeutic device and film for manufacturing negative pressure therapeutic device
GB201216928D0 (en) 2012-09-21 2012-11-07 I2R Medical Ltd Portable medical device system
US9877875B2 (en) 2012-10-09 2018-01-30 Parasol Medical LLC Antimicrobial hydrogel formulation
US9572968B2 (en) 2012-10-11 2017-02-21 Hanuman Pelican, Inc. Compressive oxygen diffusive wound dressings
JP6183831B2 (en) 2012-10-23 2017-08-23 義之 小山 Hydrogel forming material
WO2014066684A1 (en) 2012-10-24 2014-05-01 Kci Licensing, Inc. Sulfhydryl-functionalized polymeric compositions for medical devices
US9657132B2 (en) 2012-10-24 2017-05-23 Kci Licensing, Inc. Amine-functionalized polymeric compositions for medical devices
US20150354096A1 (en) 2012-12-20 2015-12-10 Convatec Technologies Inc. Processing of chemically modified cellulosic fibres
CA2895751A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Medical dressing comprising a flap
AU2013371545B2 (en) 2013-01-03 2018-05-17 3M Innovative Properties Company Moisture absorbing seal
GB201309369D0 (en) 2013-05-24 2013-07-10 Smith & Nephew Moisture indicating system
WO2014113249A2 (en) 2013-01-16 2014-07-24 Kci Licensing, Inc. Ion exchange enhanced absorbent systems
US20140256925A1 (en) 2013-03-05 2014-09-11 The Penn State Research Foundation Composite materials
WO2014163733A2 (en) 2013-03-13 2014-10-09 Kci Licensing, Inc. Expandable fluid collection canister
JP6259510B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-01-10 ケーシーアイ ライセンシング インコーポレイテッド Multi-porous conduit
EP2968705B1 (en) 2013-03-14 2022-06-29 3M Innovative Properties Company A fluid collection canister with integrated moisture trap
US9662429B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-05-30 Kci Licensing, Inc. Negative pressure therapy with dynamic profile capability
US20160120706A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-05-05 Smith & Nephew Plc Wound dressing sealant and use thereof
BR112015021417A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-07-18 Smith & Nephew Inc dissolvable gel forming film for the delivery of active agents
US10492956B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-12-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. Topical vacuum-press surgical incisional dressings, surgical adjuncts, hybrids and composites
BR112015020855A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-07-18 Smith & Nephew wound dressing and treatment method
EP2976095B1 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-12-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Wound healing compositions
WO2014145255A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Stb, Ltd. Compositions having absorbable materials, methods, and applicators for sealing injuries
EP2970729B1 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-09-06 Euromed Inc. Adhesive composition
LT2983641T (en) 2013-04-08 2020-04-10 Yeditepe Universitesi Polymer based hydrogel
GB2512841B (en) 2013-04-08 2020-07-15 Brightwake Ltd Absorbent wound dressings
WO2014169250A1 (en) 2013-04-11 2014-10-16 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Prefabricated alginate-drug bandages
EP2986448B1 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-12-11 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Wound pad
US10016380B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-07-10 Lanny Leo Johnson Antimicrobials and methods of use thereof
US9884087B1 (en) 2013-05-03 2018-02-06 Chan Soon-Shiong Nanthealth Foundation Compositions and methods of improved wound healing
AU2014266943B2 (en) 2013-05-10 2018-03-01 Smith & Nephew Plc Fluidic connector for irrigation and aspiration of wounds
AU2014268601B2 (en) 2013-05-22 2017-06-15 The Penn State Research Foundation Wound dressings and applications thereof
WO2014209620A1 (en) 2013-06-28 2014-12-31 3M Innovative Properties Company Fibrin-coated wound dressing
WO2015002888A1 (en) 2013-07-01 2015-01-08 Trustees Of Boston University Dissolvable hydrogel compositions for wound management and methods of use
US10765774B2 (en) 2013-07-09 2020-09-08 Ethicon, Inc. Hemostatic pad assembly kit and method
CN105451697B (en) 2013-08-05 2019-10-15 3M创新有限公司 Support device with the packing element for enclosing resistance
MX366611B (en) 2013-08-12 2019-07-15 Bsn Medical Gmbh Wound care article having a substantially polygonal or ellipsoid main surface and at least one recess arranged on one side.
EP3034085B1 (en) 2013-08-13 2019-10-23 Seikagaku Corporation Drug containing cationized chitosan
EP3038667B1 (en) 2013-08-26 2019-10-09 KCI Licensing, Inc. Dressing interface with moisture controlling feature and sealing function
GB2518199A (en) 2013-09-13 2015-03-18 Xiros Ltd Method of producing a swellable polymer fibre
US10342891B2 (en) 2013-09-19 2019-07-09 Medline Industries, Inc. Wound dressing containing saccharide and collagen
BR112016007156B1 (en) 2013-10-02 2022-12-13 3M Innovative Properties Company REDUCED PRESSURE SYSTEM
DK3054908T3 (en) 2013-10-10 2018-06-14 Hoffmann La Roche CARRIER SYSTEM FOR A BODY-MOUNTED OBJECT AND PROCEDURE FOR PREPARING THEREOF
SG11201603058UA (en) 2013-10-18 2016-05-30 Agency Science Tech & Res Nanoparticle-containing hydrogels
AU2014340232B2 (en) 2013-10-21 2019-07-11 Smith & Nephew Inc. Negative pressure wound closure device
GB201318842D0 (en) 2013-10-24 2013-12-11 First Water Ltd Flexible hydrogel wound dressings
US10946124B2 (en) 2013-10-28 2021-03-16 Kci Licensing, Inc. Hybrid sealing tape
EP3513773A1 (en) 2013-10-30 2019-07-24 KCI Licensing, Inc. Condensate absorbing and dissipating system
AU2014345526B2 (en) 2013-11-07 2018-03-15 Bsn Medical Gmbh Medical dressing
GB2522178B (en) 2013-11-12 2018-07-18 First Water Ltd Multilayer composition
WO2015075406A1 (en) 2013-11-19 2015-05-28 Lipopeptide Ab New treatment of chronic ulcers
WO2015089421A1 (en) 2013-12-12 2015-06-18 Innovation Technologies, Inc. Materials and methods for controlling infections
JP6114481B2 (en) 2013-12-31 2017-04-12 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Shape-compatible drape cover dressing
CA2937346A1 (en) 2014-01-24 2015-07-30 Avent, Inc. Traumatic wound dressing system with conformal cover
CA2936873A1 (en) 2014-02-11 2015-08-20 Spiracur Inc. Methods and devices for applying closed incision negative pressure wound therapy
DE102014202578A1 (en) 2014-02-12 2015-08-13 Aesculap Ag Medical product and process for its preparation
US10610623B2 (en) 2014-02-14 2020-04-07 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods for increasing absorbent capacity of a dressing
JP6947506B2 (en) 2014-02-14 2021-10-13 アトミック メディカル イノベーションズ，インコーポレイティド System for tissue healing
WO2015130471A1 (en) 2014-02-28 2015-09-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. Hybrid drape having a gel-coated perforated mesh
GB201404021D0 (en) 2014-03-05 2014-04-23 Lumina Adhesives Ab Low cytotoxity switchable adhesive compositions, medical dressings and skin coverings, and methods of treatment using same
US20150367019A1 (en) 2014-03-12 2015-12-24 Stb, Ltd. Hemostatic compositions and methods
EP3119360B1 (en) 2014-03-21 2020-08-12 Medline Industries, Inc., Wound management system and methods of using
EP3122300B1 (en) 2014-03-24 2020-03-11 Datt Life Sciences Private Limited A ready to use biodegradable and biocompatible device and a method of preparation thereof
GB2524510B (en) 2014-03-25 2020-02-19 Brightwake Ltd Wound dressing impregnated with honey
NZ726323A (en) 2014-04-30 2020-02-28 Matoke Holdings Ltd Antimicrobial compositions
WO2015168681A1 (en) 2014-05-02 2015-11-05 Kci Licensing, Inc. Fluid storage devices, systems, and methods
EP3354241B1 (en) 2014-05-09 2020-12-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Disruptive dressing for use with negative pressure and fluid instillation
CN106255480B (en) 2014-05-09 2020-01-21 凯希特许有限公司 Dressing with a shrink layer for a linear tissue site
US10398610B2 (en) 2014-05-13 2019-09-03 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article with dual core
GB2526267B (en) 2014-05-14 2020-10-28 Brightwake Ltd Dressing for surgical drain
US11026847B2 (en) 2014-06-02 2021-06-08 Zdzislaw Harry Piotrowski Systems and methods for wound healing
EP3854361B8 (en) 2014-06-05 2024-03-27 Solventum Intellectual Properties Company Dressing with fluid acquisition and distribution characteristics
KR101743274B1 (en) 2014-06-12 2017-06-02 주식회사 엘지화학 Super absorbent polymer
US10786980B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2020-09-29 Toray Industries, Inc. Laminate and production method therefor
CA2952284C (en) 2014-06-18 2023-03-28 Smith & Nephew Plc Wound dressing
JP6659540B2 (en) 2014-07-07 2020-03-04 株式会社村田製作所 Negative pressure closure therapy device
ES2860763T3 (en) 2014-07-09 2021-10-05 Lubrizol Advanced Mat Inc Hydrogel compositions
CN106687150A (en) 2014-07-10 2017-05-17 史密夫及内修公开有限公司 Improvements in and relating to devices
CN107075165A (en) 2014-07-24 2017-08-18 亚瑟罗凯尔公司 Many sugarwhips of elasticity and application thereof
US10416144B2 (en) * 2014-07-28 2019-09-17 Kansas State University Research Foundation Nanosensors for detecting enzymatic activity in dairy production
US20200289723A1 (en) 2014-07-31 2020-09-17 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Reduced pressure therapy apparatus construction and control
EP3174569B1 (en) 2014-07-31 2020-01-15 Smith & Nephew, Inc Systems and methods for applying reduced pressure therapy
JP2017527539A (en) 2014-08-04 2017-09-21 ホスピタル サン ホアン デ デュウ System for immediate release of active agent
US9770369B2 (en) 2014-08-08 2017-09-26 Neogenix, Llc Wound care devices, apparatus, and treatment methods
US10583042B2 (en) 2014-08-08 2020-03-10 Neogenix, Llc Wound care devices, apparatus, and treatment methods
CA2955060A1 (en) 2014-08-11 2016-02-18 Kci Licensing, Inc. Protease modulating wound interface layer for use with negative pressure wound therapy
CN106999270B (en) 2014-09-09 2021-01-01 华盛顿大学 Functionalized zwitterionic and mixed charge polymers, related hydrogels, and methods of use thereof
EP2995324A1 (en) 2014-09-11 2016-03-16 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Medical dressing
EP2995287A1 (en) 2014-09-11 2016-03-16 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Medical dressing
US10709807B2 (en) 2014-10-01 2020-07-14 3M Innovative Properties Company Porous devices, kits, and methods for debridement
KR102514142B1 (en) 2014-10-06 2023-03-27 가트 테크놀로지스 비.브이. Tissue-adhesive porous haemostatic product
US10485891B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2019-11-26 Kci Licensing, Inc. Multi-function dressing structure for negative-pressure therapy
US9855364B2 (en) 2014-10-15 2018-01-02 Allison Coomber Wound dressing materials incorporating anthocyanins derived from fruit or vegetable sources
PL3011978T3 (en) 2014-10-24 2017-09-29 Sefar Ag Wound dressing material and method for producing the same
US10485893B2 (en) 2014-11-13 2019-11-26 Sarasota Medical Products, Inc. Antimicrobial hydrocolloid dressing containing sequestered peroxide and preparation thereof
EP3023083A1 (en) 2014-11-20 2016-05-25 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Wound dressings
WO2016086088A2 (en) 2014-11-25 2016-06-02 Northwestern University Wound healing through sirt1 overexpression
US20180303873A1 (en) 2014-12-04 2018-10-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Antimicrobial compositions comprising bioglass
CN107206119B (en) 2014-12-09 2021-01-29 实体科学公司 Medical device coating with biocompatible layer
TW201622668A (en) 2014-12-16 2016-07-01 準訊生醫股份有限公司 Long-term effective patch structure
EP3233001B1 (en) 2014-12-17 2020-06-17 KCI Licensing, Inc. Dressing with offloading capability
EP3233492B1 (en) 2014-12-18 2021-11-10 Kindeva Drug Delivery L.P. Methods of handling adhesive laminate patches
US10617786B2 (en) 2014-12-19 2020-04-14 3M Innovative Properties Company Adhesive article comprising a poly(meth)acrylate-based primer layer and methods of making same
WO2016103032A1 (en) 2014-12-22 2016-06-30 Smith & Nephew Plc Negative pressure wound therapy apparatus and methods
US10828403B2 (en) 2014-12-29 2020-11-10 Smith & Nephew Plc Negative pressure wound therapy apparatus and methods for operating the apparatus
CA2972701A1 (en) 2014-12-30 2016-07-07 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Systems and methods for applying reduced pressure therapy
CN107106723B (en) 2014-12-30 2020-10-23 3M创新有限公司 Negative pressure wound dressing with absorbent adhesive sealing layer
US10660851B2 (en) 2015-01-02 2020-05-26 Rxos Medical Polyfunctional radical scavenger hydrogel formulation
KR101949455B1 (en) 2015-01-07 2019-02-18 주식회사 엘지화학 Superabsorbent Polymers with Improved Anticaking Property And Method Of Preparing The Same
GB201500430D0 (en) 2015-01-12 2015-02-25 Univ Birmingham Dressing
WO2016115448A1 (en) 2015-01-15 2016-07-21 Marshall University Research Corporation Wound coverings comprising vitamin d and related methods
GB201501334D0 (en) 2015-01-27 2015-03-11 Medtrade Products Ltd Composition for a wound dressing
GB201501330D0 (en) 2015-01-27 2015-03-11 Medtrade Products Ltd Composition for a wound dressing
GB201501333D0 (en) 2015-01-27 2015-03-11 Medtrade Products Ltd Composition for a wound dressing
US10500235B2 (en) 2015-01-29 2019-12-10 San Melix Laboratories, Inc. Wound healing compositions comprising buckwheat honey and methylglyoxal and methods of use
US20200093756A1 (en) 2015-01-29 2020-03-26 Sanmelix Laboratories, Inc. Buckwheat honey and povidone-iodine wound-healing dressing
KR101841469B1 (en) 2015-01-30 2018-03-23 (주)메디팁 Method for manufacturing wound covering material using biopolymer and wound covering material using biopolymer manufactured by the same
US10512707B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-24 University Of Southern California System for sutureless closure of scleral perforations and other ocular tissue discontinuities
WO2016126444A1 (en) 2015-02-02 2016-08-11 Kci Licensing, Inc. Customizable closed tissue site dressing for improved postoperative removal
US11207458B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2021-12-28 Kci Licensing, Inc. Pressure-operated switch
CA2975197A1 (en) 2015-02-03 2016-08-11 Matoke Holdings Limited Antimicrobial fibers and compositions
GB201501965D0 (en) 2015-02-05 2015-03-25 Lumina Adhesives Ab Polyurethane based switchable adhesives
US10485892B2 (en) 2015-03-10 2019-11-26 Covalon Technologies Inc. Method for local reduction of microbial skin flora
WO2016141450A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2016-09-15 Covalon Technologies Inc. Method for local reduction of microbial skin flora
WO2016145237A1 (en) 2015-03-11 2016-09-15 Yu Fu-Shin X Composition and methods to promote wound healing
GB201506236D0 (en) 2015-04-13 2015-05-27 Jellagen Pty Ltd Modified collagen, methods of manufacture thereof
ES2773324T3 (en) 2015-04-21 2020-07-10 Moelnlycke Health Care Ab A wound pad and a self-adhesive member comprising a wound pad
KR20170140315A (en) 2015-04-23 2017-12-20 유니버시티 오브 플로리다 리서치 파운데이션, 아이엔씨. Double layer device for improved healing
HUE049136T2 (en) 2015-04-27 2020-08-28 Smith & Nephew Reduced pressure apparatuses
EP3936163B1 (en) 2015-05-07 2024-04-03 Solventum Intellectual Properties Company A controlled release iodine structure for use with wound care
US20190298580A1 (en) 2015-05-08 2019-10-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. Low-acuity dressing with integral pump
US10507259B2 (en) 2015-05-08 2019-12-17 First Quality Retail Services, Llc Flexible absorbent pad
US10471190B2 (en) 2015-05-08 2019-11-12 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound debridement by irrigation with ultrasonically activated microbubbles
EP3294245B1 (en) 2015-05-08 2019-09-04 KCI Licensing, Inc. Low acuity dressing with integral pump
EP3092987A1 (en) 2015-05-11 2016-11-16 3M Innovative Properties Company System for treatment of wounds using serum
EP3093031A1 (en) 2015-05-11 2016-11-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Wound care system
EP3297699B1 (en) 2015-05-18 2020-04-29 Smith & Nephew PLC Heat-assisted pumping systems for use in negative pressure wound therapy
US10076594B2 (en) 2015-05-18 2018-09-18 Smith & Nephew Plc Fluidic connector for negative pressure wound therapy
AU2016267402A1 (en) 2015-05-26 2017-11-30 Monash University Antibacterial bismuth complexes
JP6185215B2 (en) 2015-06-12 2017-08-23 Ｊｆｅミネラル株式会社 Skin wound or rough skin treatment
US11559421B2 (en) 2015-06-25 2023-01-24 Hill-Rom Services, Inc. Protective dressing with reusable phase-change material cooling insert
CN107921183B (en) 2015-06-29 2021-04-30 凯希特许有限公司 Apparatus for negative pressure treatment and irrigation
JP2018519943A (en) 2015-07-14 2018-07-26 ケーシーアイ ライセンシング インコーポレイテッド Medical dressing interface device, system, and method
EP3117806B1 (en) 2015-07-16 2020-06-10 Lohmann & Rauscher GmbH Wound treatment assembly
ES2831751T3 (en) 2015-07-24 2021-06-09 Moelnlycke Health Care Ab Absorbent Antimicrobial Wound Dressings
US10583228B2 (en) 2015-07-28 2020-03-10 J&M Shuler Medical, Inc. Sub-atmospheric wound therapy systems and methods
US10682257B2 (en) 2015-07-29 2020-06-16 Evophancie Biotech Ltd Biological fiber composite dressing
US10471122B2 (en) 2015-07-31 2019-11-12 Blue Blood Biotech Corp. Composition for use in promoting wound healing
WO2017025963A1 (en) 2015-08-10 2017-02-16 The Medical Research, Infrastructure and Health Services Fund of the Tel Aviv Medical Center Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for improving wound healing using cd24
KR101787192B1 (en) 2015-08-12 2017-10-18 주식회사 제네웰 Antimicrbacterial dressing material and method for preparing thereof
EP3135304A1 (en) 2015-08-26 2017-03-01 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Foamed silicone in wound care
WO2017040074A1 (en) 2015-08-31 2017-03-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Negative pressure wound therapy dressings comprising (meth)acrylate pressure-sensitive adhesive with enhanced adhesion to wet surfaces
US11096830B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2021-08-24 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressing with increased apposition force
US10617608B2 (en) 2015-09-25 2020-04-14 Lotte Fine Chemical Co., Ltd. Composition for hydrogel sheet, hydrogel sheet manufactured therefrom, and method for manufacturing same
CN108137841B (en) 2015-09-30 2021-07-06 3M创新有限公司 Hydrogel compositions bonded to polymeric substrates
GB2543307B (en) 2015-10-14 2020-12-09 Selentus Science Ltd Haemostatic device
DK3367987T3 (en) 2015-10-30 2023-07-03 Aatru Medical Llc Apparatus for wound therapy
GB2544342B (en) 2015-11-13 2020-06-03 First Water Ltd Compositions for application to wounds
EP3373984B1 (en) 2015-11-13 2020-12-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Anti-microbial articles and methods of using same
US10568773B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2020-02-25 Kci Licensing, Inc. Medical drapes and methods for reducing trauma on removal
WO2017087163A1 (en) 2015-11-20 2017-05-26 Kci Licensing, Inc. Medical system with flexible fluid storage bridge
GB201520990D0 (en) 2015-11-27 2016-01-13 Edixomed Ltd Dressing system
FR3044893B1 (en) 2015-12-09 2018-05-18 Emile Droche DRESSING FOR SKIN CARE IN A WET MEDIUM
US10575991B2 (en) 2015-12-15 2020-03-03 University Of Massachusetts Negative pressure wound closure devices and methods
CA3009878A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2017-07-06 Smith & Nephew Plc Negative pressure wound therapy apparatus
US11090196B2 (en) 2015-12-30 2021-08-17 Smith & Nephew Plc Absorbent negative pressure wound therapy dressing
EP3187204B1 (en) 2015-12-30 2020-07-15 Paul Hartmann AG Methods and devices for controlling negative pressure wound therapy
US11318243B2 (en) 2016-01-06 2022-05-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. System and methods for the treatment of wounds with dressing having closed cells
JP6895991B2 (en) 2016-01-12 2021-06-30 カウンシル オブ サイエンティフィック アンド インダストリアル リサーチ Nanobiocomposite preparation for wound healing and its preparation method
DE102016000569B3 (en) 2016-01-20 2017-06-22 Lohmann & Rauscher Gmbh Method for producing a film tube
US10918770B2 (en) 2016-02-12 2021-02-16 Corning Incorporated Vacuum assisted wound closure assembly and methods of irradiating a wound using the same
FR3047901B1 (en) 2016-02-22 2018-02-23 Universite Pierre Et Marie Curie (Paris 6) BIOMATERIAL COMPOSITIONS WITH CONTROLLED RELEASE OF ACTIVE INGREDIENTS
EP3423011B1 (en) 2016-03-01 2020-07-08 KCI Licensing, Inc. Drape for use with medical therapy systems
KR101958014B1 (en) 2016-03-14 2019-03-13 주식회사 엘지화학 Preparation method of super absorbent polymer
FR3048885A1 (en) 2016-03-17 2017-09-22 Bluestar Silicones France SILICONE ADHESIVE GEL WITH SKIN
WO2017161038A1 (en) 2016-03-18 2017-09-21 Kci Usa, Inc. Antimicrobial wound dressing
KR101959547B1 (en) 2016-03-25 2019-03-18 주식회사 엘지화학 Preparation method for super absorbent polymer
CN109310528B (en) 2016-03-30 2021-07-20 康沃特克科技公司 Detecting microbial infection in a wound
PL3436012T3 (en) 2016-03-30 2024-04-08 Convatec Technologies Inc. Modified wound dressings
US20200023102A1 (en) 2016-04-05 2020-01-23 Patrick Kenneth Powell Wound therapy system
GB201608099D0 (en) 2016-05-09 2016-06-22 Convatec Technologies Inc Negative pressure wound dressing
EP3246050A1 (en) 2016-05-17 2017-11-22 BSN medical GmbH Wound or skin patch
EP3960137A1 (en) 2016-05-20 2022-03-02 3M Innovative Properties Company Replaceable dressing
DK3463498T3 (en) 2016-05-31 2021-12-20 Octapharma Ag PLASMA - BASED FILMS AND PROCEDURES FOR THE PREPARATION AND USE OF THE SAME.
CN109641076A (en) 2016-06-01 2019-04-16 立美基股份有限公司 Bleeding-stopping dressing with self-assembling peptides hydrogel
CA3030151A1 (en) 2016-07-08 2018-01-11 Convatec Technologies Inc. Fluid collection apparatus
TWI673056B (en) 2016-07-22 2019-10-01 大江生醫股份有限公司 Bacterium-containing hydrogel and method of making the same
US10076552B2 (en) 2016-08-09 2018-09-18 DATT MEDIPRODUCTS LIMITED and DATT LIFE SCIENCE PVT. LTD. Multifunctional formulation comprised of natural ingredients and method of preparation/manufacturing thereof
EP3281617B1 (en) 2016-08-10 2020-09-23 Advanced Medical Solutions Limited Wound dressing
EP3496767A4 (en) 2016-08-10 2020-04-01 Argentum Medical, LLC Antimicrobial hydrogel dressings
DE102016114819A1 (en) 2016-08-10 2018-02-15 Paul Hartmann Ag Absorbent body for endoluminal negative pressure therapy
WO2018034932A1 (en) 2016-08-18 2018-02-22 Kci Licensing, Inc. In-line diagnostic tool for negative-pressure therapy
US20180056087A1 (en) 2016-08-26 2018-03-01 Adolfo Ribeiro Wearable Micro-LED Healing Bandage
US11111362B2 (en) 2016-09-26 2021-09-07 Becton, Dickinson And Company Breathable films with microbial barrier properties
IT201600096247A1 (en) 2016-09-26 2018-03-26 Emodial S R L Polyurethane-based bandage and hydrogel comprising chlorhexidine
TWI674903B (en) 2016-09-26 2019-10-21 國立陽明大學 Process for a preparation of the modified porcine plasma fibronectin for enhance wound healing
WO2018067622A1 (en) 2016-10-05 2018-04-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Fibrinogen composition, method and wound articles
US10293080B2 (en) 2016-10-05 2019-05-21 The Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of Northern Arizona University Ionic liquids that sterilize and prevent biofilm formation in skin wound healing devices
GB2555584B (en) 2016-10-28 2020-05-27 Smith & Nephew Multi-layered wound dressing and method of manufacture
EP3535590B1 (en) 2016-11-02 2023-05-03 Unilever IP Holdings B.V. Malodour sampling method
CN110167495B (en) 2016-11-02 2022-06-14 史密夫和内修有限公司 Wound closure device
EP3538165B1 (en) 2016-11-11 2022-11-09 Avery Dennison Corporation Rubber-based soft gel skin adhesives
CN110072497B (en) 2016-11-11 2020-08-11 3M创新有限公司 Conformable wound dressing that can be trimmed
EP3541336B1 (en) 2016-11-18 2020-08-19 KCI Licensing, Inc. Medical system and dressing for use under compression
US10426874B2 (en) 2016-12-02 2019-10-01 Apex Medical Corp. Wound management assembly and negative pressure wound therapy system
AU2017366855B2 (en) 2016-12-02 2021-03-11 3M Innovative Properties Company Muscle or joint support article
EP3547973A1 (en) 2016-12-02 2019-10-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Muscle or joint support article with bump
WO2018104937A1 (en) 2016-12-06 2018-06-14 Sami Shamoon College Of Engineering (R.A.) Topical antimicrobial formulations containing monovalent copper ions and systems for generating monovalent copper ions
US10500104B2 (en) 2016-12-06 2019-12-10 Novomer, Inc. Biodegradable sanitary articles with higher biobased content
WO2018107130A1 (en) 2016-12-09 2018-06-14 Sanvio,Inc. Composition for treating wounds and other dermatological conditions
US11806217B2 (en) 2016-12-12 2023-11-07 Smith & Nephew Plc Wound dressing
DK3335696T3 (en) 2016-12-15 2020-03-16 Upm Kymmene Corp Process for drying cell-free tissue extract in a hydrogel comprising nanofibrillar cellulose and a dried hydrogel comprising nanofibrillar cellulose and cell-free tissue extract
EP3335740A1 (en) 2016-12-15 2018-06-20 UPM-Kymmene Corporation Medical hydrogel
DK3335695T3 (en) 2016-12-15 2020-04-20 Upm Kymmene Corp Process for freeze-drying hydrogel comprising nanofibrillar cellulose, freeze-dried medical hydrogel comprising nanofibrillar cellulose and hydrogel comprising nanofibrillar cellulose
EP3338813B1 (en) 2016-12-20 2020-01-29 BSN Medical GmbH Multi-layer wound care product with perforated release layer
CN108884236B (en) 2016-12-22 2021-02-09 株式会社Lg化学 Method for producing superabsorbent polymers and superabsorbent polymers
US20200023104A1 (en) 2016-12-22 2020-01-23 Applied Tissue Technologies Llc Devices and methods for wound treatment
DE102016125579A1 (en) 2016-12-23 2018-06-28 Paul Hartmann Ag Hydrous hydrogel composition comprising elemental silver particles
EP3558188A4 (en) 2016-12-23 2020-06-17 Calgon Carbon Corporation Activated carbon composite wound dressing
US20200114040A1 (en) 2016-12-28 2020-04-16 Kci Usa, Inc. Antimicrobial wound dressings
JP7255059B2 (en) 2016-12-29 2023-04-11 アルケア株式会社 Foams and foam compositions
WO2018129062A1 (en) 2017-01-09 2018-07-12 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressing layer for improved fluid removal
TWI621453B (en) 2017-01-13 2018-04-21 廈門聖慈醫療器材有限公司 Suction disc
WO2018135813A1 (en) 2017-01-19 2018-07-26 최성현 Pad for alleviating and treating plasma protein exudation skin diseases including atopic diseases
EP3570798A1 (en) 2017-01-23 2019-11-27 Medela Holding AG Porous wound insert for use in negative pressure therapy
WO2018140363A1 (en) 2017-01-27 2018-08-02 Aziyo Biologics, Inc. Lyophilized placental composite sheet and uses thereof
PL3576701T3 (en) 2017-02-06 2023-03-20 Basf Se Fluid-absorbent article
CA3049463A1 (en) 2017-02-14 2018-08-23 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressing with variable contraction zones
CN110709113A (en) 2017-02-15 2020-01-17 新加坡施乐辉有限公司 Negative pressure wound therapy device and method of use thereof
EP3582816A1 (en) 2017-02-16 2019-12-25 Covestro Deutschland AG Method for producing an adhesive-free wound contact composite material
EP3585453B1 (en) 2017-02-22 2023-05-17 Cornell University Mechanical vacuum dressing for mechanically managing, protecting and suctioning small incisional wounds
CN110545765A (en) 2017-02-28 2019-12-06 T.J.史密夫及内修有限公司 Multi-dressing negative pressure wound treatment system
US20200009289A1 (en) 2017-03-03 2020-01-09 Loma Linda University Health Compositions and methods for promoting hemostasis
EP3592312B1 (en) 2017-03-08 2024-01-10 Smith & Nephew plc Negative pressure wound therapy device control in presence of fault condition
EP3592212A1 (en) 2017-03-09 2020-01-15 Smith & Nephew PLC Wound dressing, patch member and method of sensing one or more wound parameters
AU2018231771A1 (en) 2017-03-09 2019-09-26 Secretary, Department Of Biotechnology A wound dressing for combined negative pressure and fluid delivery system
EP3378450A1 (en) 2017-03-22 2018-09-26 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Method for manufacturing a wound dressing and a wound dressing
JP7150744B2 (en) 2017-03-29 2022-10-11 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Hydrogel composition bound to a polymer matrix
KR101852718B1 (en) 2017-04-04 2018-05-18 주식회사 제네웰 Kit for pain reduction of incision site after surgical operation
EP3932442A1 (en) 2017-04-04 2022-01-05 3M Innovative Properties Co. Apparatuses, systems, and methods for the treatment of a tissue site with negative pressure and oxygen
CA3058657A1 (en) 2017-04-04 2018-10-11 Anti-Plasmin Technologies, Llc Methods to enhance a non-surgical medical treatment
GB201800057D0 (en) 2018-01-03 2018-02-14 Smith & Nephew Inc Component Positioning And stress Relief For Sensor Enabled Wound Dressings
CN108721677B (en) 2017-04-17 2021-11-19 广西美丽肤医疗器械有限公司 Composite material
WO2018195101A1 (en) 2017-04-19 2018-10-25 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Negative pressure wound therapy canisters
DE102017003826A1 (en) 2017-04-20 2018-10-25 Lohmann & Rauscher Gmbh Wound treatment arrangement for the negative pressure therapy
WO2018201257A1 (en) 2017-05-04 2018-11-08 Klox Technologies Inc. Absorbent biophotonic devices and systems for wound healing
MY198078A (en) 2017-05-10 2023-07-31 Toray Industries Medical device
US11628092B2 (en) 2017-05-10 2023-04-18 Mölnlycke Health Care Ab Composite foam in wound treatment
EP3635733A1 (en) 2017-05-15 2020-04-15 Smith & Nephew plc Negative pressure wound therapy system using eulerian video magnification
JP7136812B2 (en) 2017-05-16 2022-09-13 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Absorbable Negative Pressure Dressing System for Postoperative Breast Wounds
EP3634506A4 (en) 2017-05-17 2021-03-10 UVIC Industry Partnerships Inc. Wound covering for wound monitoring and therapeutic agent delivery
EP3634340A1 (en) 2017-05-19 2020-04-15 KCI USA, Inc. Dressings for filtering wound fluids
EP3634341A1 (en) 2017-05-22 2020-04-15 KCI USA, Inc. Post-operative surgical wound dressing
WO2018217620A1 (en) 2017-05-22 2018-11-29 Kci Usa, Inc. Extensible dressings
CN110785151A (en) 2017-05-22 2020-02-11 凯希美国公司 Elastically deformable wound dressing
EP3409248B1 (en) 2017-06-01 2019-11-06 Absorbest AB Wound dressing
CA3064520A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2018-12-13 Kci Usa, Inc. Wound dressing with odor absorption and increased moisture vapor transmission
CA3065529A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2018-12-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Composite dressings for improved granulation reduced maceration with negative-pressure treatment
US11207217B2 (en) 2017-06-07 2021-12-28 Kci Licensing, Inc. Methods for manufacturing and assembling dual material tissue interface for negative-pressure therapy
EP3634335B1 (en) 2017-06-07 2023-05-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Composite dressings for improved granulation and reduced maceration with negative-pressure treatment
AU2018282193A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2019-12-19 3M Innovative Properties Company Multi-layer wound filler for extended wear time
CA3065379A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2018-12-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems, apparatuses, and methods for negative-pressure treatment with reduced tissue in-growth
CN110944607A (en) 2017-06-07 2020-03-31 凯希特许有限公司 Method of manufacturing and assembling a bi-material tissue interface for negative pressure therapy
US20180353334A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2018-12-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Tissue Contact Interface
US20190231943A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2019-08-01 Kci Licensing, Inc. Peel And Place Dressing For Thick Exudate And Instillation
EP3634520A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2020-04-15 KCI Licensing, Inc. Peel and place dressing for negative -pressure treatment
US20200085629A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2020-03-19 Kci Licensing, Inc. Composite dressings with even expansion profiles for treatment of wounds using negative-pressure treatment
WO2018226627A1 (en) 2017-06-07 2018-12-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Composite dressings for improved granulation and reduced maceration with negative-pressure treatment
SG11201909383PA (en) 2017-06-07 2019-11-28 Kci Licensing Inc Customizable composite dressings for improved granulation and reduced maceration negative-pressure treatment
US20210085839A1 (en) 2017-06-08 2021-03-25 Kci Licensing, Inc. Negative-pressure therapy with oxygen
EP3412319A1 (en) 2017-06-09 2018-12-12 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Foam in wound treatment
US20210145648A1 (en) 2017-06-09 2021-05-20 Kci Licensing, Inc. Granulating Chronic Wound Dressing
WO2018231825A1 (en) 2017-06-12 2018-12-20 Kci Licensing, Inc. Foamed and textured sintered polymer wound filler
CN110662516B (en) 2017-06-13 2022-02-22 史密夫及内修公开有限公司 Wound closure devices and methods of use
US11395873B2 (en) 2017-06-14 2022-07-26 Smith & Nephew, Inc. Control of wound closure and fluid removal management in wound therapy
CA3065380A1 (en) 2017-06-14 2018-12-20 T.J.Smith & Nephew, Limited Negative pressure wound therapy apparatus
JP2020523052A (en) 2017-06-14 2020-08-06 スミス アンド ネフュー インコーポレイテッド Fluid removal management and control of wound closure in wound care
WO2018236648A1 (en) 2017-06-19 2018-12-27 Kci Usa, Inc. Wound dressing with saturation indicator
US11633153B2 (en) 2017-06-23 2023-04-25 Smith & Nephew Plc Positioning of sensors for sensor enabled wound monitoring or therapy
WO2019005538A1 (en) 2017-06-26 2019-01-03 Kci Usa, Inc. Absorbent wound dressing that incorporates a novel wound fluid indicating system
US10751212B2 (en) 2017-06-26 2020-08-25 Maryam Raza Multilayer dressing device and method for preventing and treating pressure ulcers and chronic wounds
DE102017006025A1 (en) 2017-06-27 2018-12-27 Carl Freudenberg Kg Hydrogel-forming multicomponent fiber
US11554051B2 (en) 2017-06-30 2023-01-17 T.J. Smith And Nephew, Limited Negative pressure wound therapy apparatus
EP3648810A1 (en) 2017-07-07 2020-05-13 Smith & Nephew plc Wound therapy system and dressing for delivering oxygen to a wound
FR3068974B1 (en) 2017-07-12 2019-08-02 Urgo Recherche Innovation Et Developpement DRESSING FOR THE CONTROLLED AND PROLONGED DELIVERY OF ASSETS
FR3068975B1 (en) 2017-07-12 2020-07-17 Urgo Recherche Innovation Et Developpement COMPOSITION FOR INTERFACE DRESSING
GB201711181D0 (en) 2017-07-12 2017-08-23 Smith & Nephew Polymer foam material, device and use
GB201711179D0 (en) 2017-07-12 2017-08-23 Smith & Nephew Wound care materials, devices and uses
GB201711183D0 (en) 2017-07-12 2017-08-23 Smith & Nephew Antimicrobial or wound care materials, devices and uses
EA201992777A1 (en) 2017-07-21 2020-06-23 Спид Кеа Минерал Гмбх A NEW WOUNDING FOR HEMOSTASIS
GB201804502D0 (en) 2018-03-21 2018-05-02 Smith & Nephew Biocompatible encapsulation and component stress relief for sensor enabled negative pressure wound therapy dressings
US20210228768A1 (en) 2017-07-26 2021-07-29 Youreh Co., Ltd. Wound dressing comprising hyaluronic acid-calcium and polylysine and manufacturing method therefor
GB201712165D0 (en) 2017-07-28 2017-09-13 Smith & Nephew Wound dressing and method of manufacture
US10729826B2 (en) 2017-07-29 2020-08-04 Edward D. Lin Wound cover apparatus and related methods of use
US10780201B2 (en) 2017-07-29 2020-09-22 Edward D. Lin Control apparatus and related methods for wound therapy delivery
WO2019027933A1 (en) 2017-07-31 2019-02-07 Kci Usa, Inc. Bioresorbable dressing with structural support
US20200246195A1 (en) 2017-08-02 2020-08-06 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods for wound debridement
EP3661570B1 (en) 2017-08-02 2022-12-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Multi-layer compartment dressing
WO2019030136A1 (en) 2017-08-07 2019-02-14 Smith & Nephew Plc Wound closure device with protective layer and method of use
DE102017117828A1 (en) 2017-08-07 2019-02-07 Ivf Hartmann Ag Bandage, in particular compression bandage
EP3666300B1 (en) 2017-08-09 2023-02-15 Toray Industries, Inc. Medical device and method for manufacturing same
WO2019030384A2 (en) 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Smith & Nephew Plc Positioning of sensors for sensor enabled wound monitoring or therapy
US20200197580A1 (en) 2017-08-22 2020-06-25 Kci Licensing, Inc. In-line wound fluid sampling systems and methods for use with negative pressure wound therapy
GB201713511D0 (en) 2017-08-23 2017-10-04 Scapa Uk Ltd Wound dressing
EP3672541A4 (en) 2017-08-23 2021-06-09 Cor Medical Ventures LLC Post-operative surgical site wound treatment and method for device removal
GB2565823A (en) 2017-08-24 2019-02-27 Xiros Ltd Psyllium based moisture absorbent material
EP3672655B1 (en) 2017-08-24 2022-01-19 KCI USA, Inc. Biomaterial and methods of making and using said biomaterial
US11246756B2 (en) 2017-08-24 2022-02-15 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary Of Agriculture Healthcare textiles
WO2019050855A1 (en) 2017-09-05 2019-03-14 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods for mitigating premature light deactivation of light deactivated adhesive drapes
US11752041B2 (en) 2017-09-05 2023-09-12 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods for mitigating premature light deactivation of light deactivated adhesive drapes using a filtering layer
EP3681376A1 (en) 2017-09-10 2020-07-22 Smith & Nephew PLC Systems and methods for inspection of encapsulation and components in sensor equipped wound dressings
GB201718070D0 (en) 2017-11-01 2017-12-13 Smith & Nephew Negative pressure wound treatment apparatuses and methods with integrated electronics
EP3681550B1 (en) 2017-09-13 2023-11-08 Smith & Nephew PLC Negative pressure wound treatment apparatuses
US11547789B2 (en) 2017-09-14 2023-01-10 Kci Licensing, Inc. Oxygen therapy with fluid removal
WO2019060229A1 (en) 2017-09-15 2019-03-28 Bard Access Systems, Inc. Antimicrobial dressing with liner for a medical device
US20200282114A1 (en) 2017-09-18 2020-09-10 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressings and systems with remote oxygen generation for topical wound therapy and related methods
US11547611B2 (en) 2017-09-22 2023-01-10 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressings and systems with high-flow therapeutic gas sources for topical wound therapy and related methods
IL254644B (en) 2017-09-24 2021-06-30 Reddress Ltd Wound dressing device, assembly and method
IL254636A0 (en) 2017-09-24 2017-11-30 Reddress Ltd Assembly and method for the preparation of a wound dressing
GB2566951A (en) 2017-09-27 2019-04-03 Brightwake Ltd Compositions for wound treatment
WO2019067264A1 (en) 2017-09-29 2019-04-04 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressing exhibiting low tissue ingrowth and negative-pressure treatment method
JP7304868B2 (en) 2017-10-09 2023-07-07 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Fixed dressings with compatible margins
GB201716986D0 (en) 2017-10-16 2017-11-29 Matoke Holdings Ltd Antimicrobial compositions
CN111491666B (en) 2017-10-20 2021-09-07 水凝胶欧洲事务所 Topical composition for treating burns
EP3700596A1 (en) 2017-10-23 2020-09-02 KCI Licensing, Inc. Wound dressing for use with anti-bacterial material
CA3082020A1 (en) 2017-10-23 2019-05-02 Kci Licensing, Inc. Low profile distribution components for wound therapy
AU2018355151A1 (en) 2017-10-23 2020-05-07 Solventum Intellectual Properties Company Area management of tissue sites on articulating joints
US11432967B2 (en) 2017-10-23 2022-09-06 Kci Licensing, Inc. Fluid bridge for simultaneous application of negative pressure to multiple tissue sites
WO2019083607A1 (en) 2017-10-23 2019-05-02 Kci Licensing, Inc. High-density evaporative bridge dressing
WO2019083827A1 (en) 2017-10-24 2019-05-02 Kci Licensing, Inc. Debridement wound dressings and systems using the same
EP4268775A3 (en) 2017-10-26 2023-12-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Manifolding apparatus
CN111278942A (en) 2017-10-26 2020-06-12 3M创新有限公司 Compositions and methods and articles comprising silicone-based binders and cellulose nanocrystals
EP3700479B8 (en) 2017-10-26 2023-11-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Wound dressing with welded elastic structure
KR102566942B1 (en) 2017-10-27 2023-08-14 주식회사 엘지화학 Preparation method of super absorbent polymer
EP3700480B1 (en) 2017-10-27 2024-05-01 Solventum Intellectual Properties Company Contoured foam dressing shaped for providing negative pressure to incisions in the breast
WO2019089118A1 (en) 2017-10-30 2019-05-09 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems, apparatuses, and methods for negative-pressure treatment with pressure delivery indication
US10463760B2 (en) 2017-10-31 2019-11-05 InMEDBio, LLC Absorbent, breathable and pathogen blocking/killing wound care dressing and fabrication thereof
EP3703632B1 (en) 2017-11-01 2024-04-03 Smith & Nephew plc Negative pressure wound treatment apparatuses and methods with integrated electronics
GB201718054D0 (en) 2017-11-01 2017-12-13 Smith & Nephew Sterilization of integrated negative pressure wound treatment apparatuses and sterilization methods
GB201718014D0 (en) 2017-11-01 2017-12-13 Smith & Nephew Dressing for negative pressure wound therapy with filter
US11850122B2 (en) 2017-11-02 2023-12-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Wound dressing with humidity colorimeter sensor
IL255404B (en) 2017-11-02 2018-10-31 Technion Res & Dev Foundation Hipe-templated zwitterionic hydrogels, process of preparation and uses thereof
US11877910B2 (en) 2017-11-03 2024-01-23 Systagenix Wound Management, Limited Nutrient-enriched dressing
US11771599B2 (en) 2017-11-03 2023-10-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. Extended wear-time dressing
GB2568101B (en) 2017-11-06 2022-09-07 Brightwake Ltd Antimicrobial dressing
US20200261276A1 (en) 2017-11-08 2020-08-20 University Of Massachusetts Post-Operative Hybrid Dressing To Optimize Skin-Grafting Procedures In Reconstructive Surgery
WO2019094147A1 (en) 2017-11-09 2019-05-16 Kci Licensing, Inc. Multi-module dressing and therapy methods
WO2019094923A1 (en) 2017-11-13 2019-05-16 Kci Licensing, Inc. Light-responsive pressure sensitive adhesives for wound dressings
CN107899061A (en) 2017-11-13 2018-04-13 广东泰宝医疗科技股份有限公司 A kind of alginates wound repair dressing and preparation method thereof
CN111343950A (en) 2017-11-15 2020-06-26 史密夫及内修公开有限公司 Integrated wound monitoring and/or therapy dressing and system implementing sensors
FR3074047B1 (en) 2017-11-30 2019-12-20 Biomerieux NON-IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICES INCORPORATING A DEVICE FOR DETECTION AND / OR IDENTIFICATION OF MICROBIOLOGICAL INFECTIONS
EP3720518A4 (en) 2017-12-06 2021-09-15 Cornell University Manually-operated negative pressure wound therapy (npwt) bandage with improved pump efficiency, automatic pressure indicator and automatic pressure limiter
WO2019113091A1 (en) 2017-12-06 2019-06-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressing with negative pressure retaining valve
US11338055B2 (en) 2017-12-11 2022-05-24 Animal Ethics Pty Ltd Wound dressing
EP3498242A1 (en) 2017-12-15 2019-06-19 Mölnlycke Health Care AB Medical dressing
IL256405A (en) 2017-12-19 2018-01-31 Omrix Biopharmaceuticals Ltd Wound dressing and a method for producing the same
WO2019125962A1 (en) 2017-12-20 2019-06-27 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressing for the harvesting of superficial epidermal grafts
US20200337904A1 (en) 2017-12-20 2020-10-29 Systagenix Wound Management, Limited Dressing including dehydrated placental tissue for wound healing
DE102017130893A1 (en) 2017-12-21 2019-06-27 Paul Hartmann Ag pH regulating wound dressing
US20200179673A1 (en) 2018-01-08 2020-06-11 Mianshui WAN Connecting device for wound protection dressing, and wound protection dressing
US11877912B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2024-01-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Systems and methods for coupling a wearable therapy system to a dressing
KR102565968B1 (en) 2018-03-26 2023-08-09 디로얄 인더스트리즈, 인코퍼레이티드 Multi Lumen Bridge for Negative Pressure Wound Care System
US20190298882A1 (en) 2018-03-27 2019-10-03 Kevin M. Nelson Hydrogel bandage
CN111936177A (en) 2018-03-29 2020-11-13 凯希特许有限公司 Wound therapy system with wound volume estimation
WO2019191590A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2019-10-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. An absorbent dressing incorporating ph wound condition indication
GB201805584D0 (en) 2018-04-05 2018-05-23 Smith & Nephew Negative pressure wound treatment apparatuses and methods with integrated electronics
GB2572642B (en) 2018-04-06 2021-03-31 Pellis Care Ltd Treatment of diabetic foot ulcers
US11040127B2 (en) 2018-04-09 2021-06-22 Kci Licensing, Inc. Abdominal dressing with mechanism for fascial closure
WO2019199389A1 (en) 2018-04-10 2019-10-17 Kci Licensing, Inc. Bridge dressing with fluid management
BR102018007306A2 (en) 2018-04-11 2019-10-29 Maria Cristina De Paula Mesquita specific shape adhesive tape / plate making process / silicone dressing
EP3773384A1 (en) 2018-04-12 2021-02-17 KCI Licensing, Inc. Cutting template for a negative pressure wound therapy drape
WO2019199687A1 (en) 2018-04-13 2019-10-17 Kci Licensing, Inc. Method to dynamically measure apposition and patient limb movement in a negative pressure closed incision dressing
WO2019200035A1 (en) 2018-04-13 2019-10-17 Kci Licensing, Inc. Npwt system with selectively controllable airflow
WO2019199849A1 (en) 2018-04-13 2019-10-17 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressing bolster with area pressure indicator
WO2019199798A1 (en) 2018-04-13 2019-10-17 Kci Licensing, Inc. Compression strain and negative pressure delivery indicator for a wound dressing
WO2019212825A2 (en) 2018-05-03 2019-11-07 Kci Licensing, Inc. Negative pressure wound therapy system with detection of full absorbant dressing
CN112236110A (en) 2018-05-04 2021-01-15 干燥可视有限责任公司 Liquid detection article and method of making same
MA52575A (en) 2018-05-08 2021-03-17 Fidia Farm Spa DRESSING FOR THE TREATMENT OF DAMAGED SKIN
EP3569261B1 (en) 2018-05-14 2024-04-03 Paul Hartmann AG Functional wound dressing
US10898606B2 (en) 2018-05-15 2021-01-26 Legacy Research and Development Group, LLC Self-fusing low density silicone
EP3569210B1 (en) 2018-05-15 2022-04-27 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable absorbent articles
AU2019270795B2 (en) 2018-05-16 2024-04-04 Keith R. Berend Negative pressure wound apposition dressing system
US20190351095A1 (en) 2018-05-21 2019-11-21 Milliken & Company Wound care device having fluid transfer and adhesive properties
US20190351094A1 (en) 2018-05-21 2019-11-21 Milliken & Company Wound care device having fluid transfer and adhesive properties
FR3082123B1 (en) 2018-06-07 2020-10-16 Urgo Rech Innovation Et Developpement CELLULARIZED DRESSING AND ITS MANUFACTURING PROCESS
NL2021186B1 (en) 2018-06-26 2020-01-06 Icap Holding B V Intelligent cap for skin tissue treatment
TWI693929B (en) 2018-06-27 2020-05-21 南六企業股份有限公司 Antibacterial wound dressing
WO2020005536A1 (en) 2018-06-27 2020-01-02 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressing for wound volume estimation
US11701264B2 (en) 2018-06-27 2023-07-18 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound therapy system with wound volume estimation using geometric approximation
WO2020005577A1 (en) 2018-06-28 2020-01-02 Kci Licensing, Inc. Distributed negative pressure wound therapy system incorporating an absorbent dressing and piezo-electric pump
EP3813750B1 (en) 2018-06-28 2022-03-02 KCI Licensing, Inc. Release liner with edge protection
WO2020005419A1 (en) 2018-06-28 2020-01-02 Kci Licensing, Inc. Long-duration, deep wound filler with means to prevent granulation in-growth
US20200000642A1 (en) 2018-06-28 2020-01-02 Systagenix Wound Management, Limited Multilayer absorbent dressing construction
US11896462B2 (en) 2018-06-28 2024-02-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Highly conformable wound dressing
US20200000640A1 (en) 2018-06-29 2020-01-02 Milliken & Company Multi-Layer Wound Care Device Having Absorption and Fluid Transfer Properties
WO2020007429A1 (en) 2018-07-04 2020-01-09 Coloplast A/S Foam wound dressing comprising an antiseptic
EP3820417A1 (en) 2018-07-12 2021-05-19 KCI Licensing, Inc. Abdominal dressing with user selection of fascial closure force profile
GB201811449D0 (en) 2018-07-12 2018-08-29 Smith & Nephew Apparatuses and methods for negative pressure wound therapy
WO2020014310A1 (en) 2018-07-13 2020-01-16 Kci Licensing, Inc. Advanced wound dressing with compression and increased total fluid handling
WO2020018300A1 (en) 2018-07-16 2020-01-23 Kci Licensing, Inc. Fluid instillation apparatus for use with negative-pressure system incorporating wireless therapy monitoring
WO2020018538A1 (en) 2018-07-18 2020-01-23 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound view dressing and customization kit
WO2020026061A1 (en) 2018-07-30 2020-02-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Antimicrobial foam articles and method of making the same
US20200038252A1 (en) 2018-07-31 2020-02-06 Joseph Spiro Tri-layered wound dressing and method therefor
EP3829506B1 (en) 2018-07-31 2023-12-20 3M Innovative Properties Company Devices and methods for preventing localized pressure points in distribution components for tissue therapy
WO2020026144A1 (en) 2018-08-01 2020-02-06 Systagenix Wound Management, Limited Dressing packaging with controlled hydration of fluid-activated dressing
JP2021531899A (en) 2018-08-01 2021-11-25 ケーシーアイ ライセンシング インコーポレイテッド Soft tissue treatment using negative pressure
EP3829667A1 (en) 2018-08-03 2021-06-09 KCI Licensing, Inc. Wound therapy system with wound volume estimation
WO2020028514A1 (en) 2018-08-03 2020-02-06 Kci Licensing, Inc. Flexible and conformable wound dressing with enhanced fluid absorption capability
US20210161725A1 (en) 2018-08-10 2021-06-03 Kci Licensing, Inc. Wound dressing system for management of fluids in a wound and methods for manufacturing same
US20200046876A1 (en) 2018-08-13 2020-02-13 Chuang Sheng Medicine Equipment Co. Ltd. Hydrogel surgical dressing product having a multi-dimensional flexible hydrophilic structure-linkage composite
US20200046567A1 (en) 2018-08-13 2020-02-13 Kci Licensing, Inc. Disruptive dressing for use with negative pressure and fluid instillation
WO2020035811A1 (en) 2018-08-17 2020-02-20 3M Innovative Properties Company Wound dressing system
US11938236B2 (en) 2018-08-17 2024-03-26 Seoul Viosys Co., Ltd. Medical dressing
EP4302790A3 (en) 2018-08-21 2024-03-27 Solventum Intellectual Properties Company System for utilizing pressure decay to determine available fluid capacity in a negative pressure dressing
WO2020040917A1 (en) 2018-08-21 2020-02-27 Kci Licensing, Inc. Dressing and system with improved total fluid handling
WO2020040960A1 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-02-27 Kci Licensing, Inc. Methods of managing moisture when using a low profile wound connection conduit
CA3110340A1 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-02-27 The United States Government As Represented By The Department Of Veterans Affairs Devices, systems, and methods for remotely monitoring and treating wounds or wound infections
AU2019331721B2 (en) 2018-08-27 2022-04-21 Advamedica Inc. Composite dressings, manufacturing methods and applications thereof
WO2020043665A1 (en) 2018-08-27 2020-03-05 Claudia Eder Antiseptic gel
US11752039B2 (en) 2018-08-28 2023-09-12 Systagenix Wound Management, Limited Dressings for reduced tissue ingrowth
US11007083B2 (en) 2018-08-28 2021-05-18 Aatru Medical, LLC Dressing
WO2020046589A1 (en) 2018-08-30 2020-03-05 Kci Licensing, Inc. Electro-mechanical pump for negative-pressure treatment
WO2020047255A1 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-03-05 Kci Licensing, Inc. Cooling dressing for improved comfort
US20210244431A1 (en) 2018-09-04 2021-08-12 Lohmann & Rauscher Gmbh Wound cleansing device
JP2021534875A (en) 2018-09-04 2021-12-16 ケーシーアイ ライセンシング インコーポレイテッド Wound therapy equipment and kit
WO2020051273A1 (en) 2018-09-05 2020-03-12 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems and methods for scheduling and controlling wound therapy
US11471335B2 (en) 2018-09-05 2022-10-18 University Of South Carolina Gel-within-gel wound dressing
EP3849626A1 (en) 2018-09-12 2021-07-21 KCI Licensing, Inc. Wound therapy system with instillation therapy and dynamic pressure control
WO2020056182A1 (en) 2018-09-12 2020-03-19 Kci Licensing, Inc. Systems, apparatuses, and methods for negative-pressure treatment with reduced tissue in-growth
WO2020055945A1 (en) 2018-09-12 2020-03-19 Kci Licensing, Inc. Negative pressure wound therapy systems and methods to indicate total fluid handling
WO2020056014A1 (en) 2018-09-14 2020-03-19 Kci Licensing, Inc. Differential collapse wound dressings
EP3852827B8 (en) 2018-09-17 2024-04-10 Solventum Intellectual Properties Company Negative pressure wound therapy system
WO2020060918A1 (en) 2018-09-17 2020-03-26 Kci Licensing, Inc. Absorbent negative pressure dressing
CN112739294A (en) 2018-09-19 2021-04-30 帝皇工业有限公司 Pipe fitting connecting system for negative pressure wound treatment
WO2020060674A1 (en) 2018-09-20 2020-03-26 Kci Licensing, Inc. Super-absorbent, low trauma, advanced wound dressing
US20220047771A1 (en) 2018-09-25 2022-02-17 Systagenix Wound Management, Limited Wound dressing compositions and uses thereof
EP3643331A1 (en) 2018-10-24 2020-04-29 Paul Hartmann AG Ph-triggered therapeutic wound dressing
EP3643328A1 (en) 2018-10-24 2020-04-29 Paul Hartmann AG Ph-triggered diagnostic wound dressing
WO2020124038A1 (en) 2018-12-13 2020-06-18 University Of Massachusetts Negative pressure wound closure devices and methods
WO2021014384A1 (en) 2019-07-24 2021-01-28 Kci Licensing, Inc. System for treating a tissue site
EP4007551B1 (en) 2019-08-01 2023-09-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Dressing with epithelialization and scar reduction feature
WO2021019486A1 (en) 2019-08-01 2021-02-04 Kci Licensing, Inc. Hand dressing for use with negative pressure wound therapy
EP4009929A1 (en) 2019-08-06 2022-06-15 KCI Licensing, Inc. Hand dressing for use with negative pressure wound therapy, negative pressure wound therapy system comprising the same, method for controlling a pump coupled to said dressing
US20220079509A1 (en) 2020-09-11 2022-03-17 Cardiac Assist Holdings Vacuum dressing with control feedback

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100178203A1 (en) * 2009-01-15 2010-07-15 Polestar Technologies, Inc. Non-Invasive Colorimetric-Based Infection Detector And Infection Detecting Bandage
US20110158917A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Macdonald John Gavin Anti-viral tissue product with visual efficacy indicator

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Dai, T. et al "Chitosan preparation for wounds and burns ..." Exp. Rev., vol 9, no 7, pp 857-879. (Year: 2011) *
Guerry, A. et al "Aniline-catalyzed reductive amination ..." Bioconj. Chem., vol 24, pp 544-549. (Year: 2013) *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20190008199A (en) 2019-01-23
WO2017168249A3 (en) 2017-11-16
CL2018002776A1 (en) 2019-05-03
JP2023017787A (en) 2023-02-07
AU2022203055A1 (en) 2022-05-26
IL262023A (en) 2018-10-31
CA3019445A1 (en) 2017-12-14
WO2017168249A2 (en) 2017-10-05
CO2018011706A2 (en) 2019-02-08
AU2017278022A1 (en) 2018-11-15
SG11201808598UA (en) 2018-10-30
EP3436821A2 (en) 2019-02-06
CN109564213A (en) 2019-04-02
CO2018011704A2 (en) 2019-02-08
AU2017278022B2 (en) 2023-07-06
EP3436820A2 (en) 2019-02-06
AU2017243601A1 (en) 2018-11-22
WO2017212345A3 (en) 2018-05-11
BR112018070244A2 (en) 2019-01-29
WO2017212345A2 (en) 2017-12-14
JP2019513238A (en) 2019-05-23
BR112018070238A2 (en) 2019-01-29
JP2019512556A (en) 2019-05-16
CA3019436A1 (en) 2017-10-05
CL2018002774A1 (en) 2019-10-18
US11740241B2 (en) 2023-08-29
KR20190015210A (en) 2019-02-13
US20210088518A1 (en) 2021-03-25
CN109416355A (en) 2019-03-01
ECSP18081954A (en) 2019-02-28
IL262024A (en) 2018-10-31
US20240027454A1 (en) 2024-01-25
ECSP18081945A (en) 2019-02-28
CN109564213B (en) 2023-01-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230213525A1 (en) Detecting microbial infection in wounds
US11865192B2 (en) Modified wound dressings
Hasmann et al. Novel peptidoglycan-based diagnostic devices for detection of wound infection
Sadat Ebrahimi et al. Rapid detection of Escherichia coli via enzymatically triggered reactions in self-reporting chitosan hydrogels
TW201800753A (en) Detecting microbial infection in wounds
US20200393384A1 (en) pH RESPONSIVE MATERIALS FOR OPTICAL MONITORING OF WOUND STATUS
TW201741331A (en) Detecting microbial infection in wounds
Ebrahimi et al. Rapid remote detection of Escherichia coli via a reporter-hydrogel coated glass fiber tip
Lucena Point of care early infection diagnosis: Infection sensitive biomarker immobilization onto chitosan films
US20210252010A1 (en) A chromogenic beta-lactamase substrate
JP2024511762A (en) In vitro diagnostic method for infection
Chibba Substrates and Inhibitors of Enzymes Involved in Exopolysaccharide Dependent Biofilms

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED